[go: up one dir, main page]

CN101515213A - Sensing device, display device, electronic apparatus and sensing method - Google Patents

Sensing device, display device, electronic apparatus and sensing method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
CN101515213A
CN101515213A CNA2009100076527A CN200910007652A CN101515213A CN 101515213 A CN101515213 A CN 101515213A CN A2009100076527 A CNA2009100076527 A CN A2009100076527A CN 200910007652 A CN200910007652 A CN 200910007652A CN 101515213 A CN101515213 A CN 101515213A
Authority
CN
China
Prior art keywords
mentioned
detection signal
mode
picture
under
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
CNA2009100076527A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
茅野岳人
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Japan Display West Inc
Original Assignee
Seiko Epson Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Seiko Epson Corp filed Critical Seiko Epson Corp
Publication of CN101515213A publication Critical patent/CN101515213A/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Landscapes

  • Power Sources (AREA)
  • Position Input By Displaying (AREA)
  • Facsimile Scanning Arrangements (AREA)

Abstract

本发明涉及一种传感装置、显示装置、电子设备以及传感方法,在画面中设有多个传感器,该多个传感器输出检测信号,该检测信号具有与对象物(手指或手写笔等)和画面的接触状态或对象物与画面的距离对应的电平。在对象物与画面接触的情况下和对象物与画面非接触的情况下,传感装置使读出1个画面数量的检测信号的周期不同。而且,在对象物与画面的距离是一定距离以下的情况下和对象物与画面非接触为连续的预定时间以上的情况下,传感装置使读出1个画面数量的检测信号的周期和读出检测信号的传感器的个数不同。

Figure 200910007652

The present invention relates to a sensing device, a display device, an electronic device, and a sensing method. A plurality of sensors are provided on a screen, and the plurality of sensors output detection signals that have an The level corresponding to the contact state of the screen or the distance between the object and the screen. The sensing device makes the cycle of reading detection signals corresponding to one screen different between when the object is in contact with the screen and when the object is not in contact with the screen. Moreover, when the distance between the object and the screen is less than a certain distance and the non-contact between the object and the screen is continuous for more than a predetermined time, the sensing device makes the period and the reading cycle of the detection signal of 1 screen number read out. The number of sensors that output detection signals is different.

Figure 200910007652

Description

传感装置、显示装置、电子设备以及传感方法 Sensing device, display device, electronic device, and sensing method

技术领域 technical field

本发明涉及检测手指或手写笔等对象物在画面上的接触位置的技术。The present invention relates to a technique for detecting a contact position of an object such as a finger or a stylus on a screen.

背景技术 Background technique

在日本特开2004-318819号公报中记载有一种液晶显示装置,其检测手指或手写笔等在画面上指示的坐标位置。该液晶显示装置在每个像素中具有对入射光进行拍摄的图像读取传感器33,根据手指或手写笔接近或接触画面时的摄像数据的变化来检测出坐标位置。另外,在该液晶显示装置中,不是从排列在像素阵列部1中的所有图像读取传感器33中读出摄像数据,而是在行方向上每隔4行,在列方向上每隔3列进行摄像数据的读出。Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2004-318819 discloses a liquid crystal display device that detects a coordinate position indicated on a screen by a finger, a stylus, or the like. This liquid crystal display device has an image reading sensor 33 that captures incident light for each pixel, and detects coordinate positions based on changes in imaging data when a finger or stylus approaches or touches the screen. In addition, in this liquid crystal display device, the imaging data is not read from all the image reading sensors 33 arranged in the pixel array section 1, but is read every 4 rows in the row direction and every 3 columns in the column direction. Readout of camera data.

发明内容 Contents of the invention

日本特开2004-318819号公报中所记载的液晶显示装置,通常是以相同的周期检测利用手指或手写笔指示的坐标位置。因此,例如在坐标位置的检测周期为60Hz的情况下,不能跟踪手指或手写笔的高速的移动,因而难以通过接触输入来顺畅输入手写图像等。另一方面,如果坐标位置的检测周期为120Hz左右,虽然可充分跟踪手指或手写笔的高速移动,但在这种情况下,相应的检测周期的缩短而增加了电力消耗。鉴于上述的情况,本发明的第1方式的目的是,在降低电力消耗的同时顺畅进行接触输入。The liquid crystal display device described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-318819 usually detects a coordinate position pointed by a finger or a stylus at the same cycle. Therefore, for example, when the detection cycle of the coordinate position is 60 Hz, the high-speed movement of the finger or the stylus cannot be tracked, and it is difficult to smoothly input handwritten images or the like by touch input. On the other hand, if the detection cycle of the coordinate position is about 120 Hz, although high-speed movement of a finger or stylus can be sufficiently tracked, in this case, the corresponding shortening of the detection cycle increases power consumption. In view of the above circumstances, an object of the first aspect of the present invention is to smoothly perform touch input while reducing power consumption.

为了达到上述目的,本发明的第1方式的传感装置具有:多个传感器,其被排列在画面上,分别生成具有与对象物和上述画面的接触状态或上述对象物和上述画面的距离对应的电平的第1检测信号;读出单元,其以预定周期从上述多个传感器读出上述第1检测信号;2值化单元,其把由上述读出单元读出的上述各个第1检测信号的电平与阈值比较,分别生成2值化的第2检测信号;判定单元,其根据上述各个第2检测信号,判定上述对象物与上述画面是接触还是非接触;检测单元,其根据上述各个第2检测信号检测上述对象物与上述画面接触的位置;以及控制单元,其在上述判定单元的判定结果是非接触的情况下,按照使上述预定周期成为第1周期的方式控制上述读出单元,在上述判定单元的判定结果是接触的情况下,按照使上述预定周期成为比上述第1周期短的第2周期的方式控制上述读出单元。In order to achieve the above-mentioned object, the sensing device of the first aspect of the present invention has: a plurality of sensors, which are arranged on the screen, respectively generate a sensor corresponding to the contact state between the object and the above-mentioned screen or the distance between the above-mentioned object and the above-mentioned screen. A first detection signal of a level; a readout unit, which reads out the first detection signal from the plurality of sensors at a predetermined cycle; a binarization unit, which converts each of the first detection signals read by the readout unit The level of the signal is compared with the threshold value to generate binarized second detection signals respectively; the determination unit judges whether the object is in contact or not with the screen based on the above-mentioned respective second detection signals; Each of the second detection signals detects a position where the object is in contact with the screen; and a control unit that controls the reading unit so that the predetermined period becomes a first period when the determination result of the determination unit is non-contact. When the determination result of the determination unit is contact, the readout unit is controlled so that the predetermined period becomes a second period shorter than the first period.

根据此结构,在对象物与画面非接触的情况下,读出单元以第1周期读出1个画面数量的第1检测信号,在对象物与画面接触的情况下,以比第1周期短的第2周期读出1个画面数量的第1检测信号。因此,对象物与画面非接触的情况,与对象物与画面接触的情况相比,可减少读出1个画面数量的第1检测信号的频度。例如,在把第1周期设定为60Hz、第2周期设定为120Hz的情况下,对象物与画面非接触的情况比对象物与画面接触的情况,可将读出1个画面数量的第1检测信号的频度减少1/2。因此,可减少第1检测信号的读出和2值化信号的生成所需要的处理负荷,从而电力消耗可减少相应地大小。另一方面,对象物与画面接触的情况与对象物与画面非接触的情况相比,可增加读出1个画面数量的第1检测信号的频度。因此,可提高关于接触位置的检测的时间分辨率,即使在对象物高速移动的情况下,也能够对其进行充分的跟踪。According to this configuration, when the object is not in contact with the screen, the readout unit reads out the first detection signal for one screen at the first period, and at a time shorter than the first period when the object is in contact with the screen. In the second cycle of , the first detection signal of one screen is read out. Therefore, when the object is not in contact with the screen, the frequency of reading the first detection signal for one screen can be reduced compared to when the object is in contact with the screen. For example, when the first period is set to 60Hz and the second period is set to 120Hz, the case where the object is not in contact with the screen is compared to the case where the object is in contact with the screen. 1 The frequency of detection signals is reduced by 1/2. Therefore, the processing load required for reading the first detection signal and generating the binarized signal can be reduced, and power consumption can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, when the object is in contact with the screen, the frequency of reading the first detection signal for one screen can be increased compared to the case where the object is not in contact with the screen. Therefore, the temporal resolution of the detection of the contact position can be improved, and it is possible to sufficiently track the object even when the object is moving at high speed.

这样,根据本发明的第1方式,能够变更读出1个画面数量的第1检测信号的周期,只在对象物与画面接触的情况下,以短的周期读出1个画面数量的第1检测信号,所以,可降低电力消耗,并且即使在对象物高速移动的情况下,也能够对其进行跟踪,顺畅地进行接触输入。In this way, according to the first aspect of the present invention, it is possible to change the cycle of reading out the first detection signal for one screen, and read out the first detection signal for one screen in a short cycle only when the object is in contact with the screen. Therefore, power consumption can be reduced, and even when an object is moving at high speed, it can be tracked and touch input can be performed smoothly.

另外,所谓“被排列在画面上”,例如不仅包括把具备了多个传感器的触摸面板粘贴在画面上的情况,而且包括如后述的实施方式所记载的把多个传感器内置于显示面板中的情况。另外,所谓“对象物”是指手指或手写笔。另外,在是具备电阻膜方式或静电电容方式的触摸面板的情况下,传感器所生成的第1检测信号的电平成为与“对象物与上述画面的接触状态”对应的电平,如果是后述的实施方式中记载的那样使用了光传感器的触摸面板,则传感器所生成的第1检测信号的电平采用“与上述对象物和上述画面的距离对应的”电平。In addition, "arranged on the screen" includes, for example, not only the case where a touch panel equipped with a plurality of sensors is pasted on the screen, but also the case where a plurality of sensors are built into a display panel as described in the embodiment described later. Case. In addition, the "object" refers to a finger or a stylus. In addition, in the case of a resistive film type or capacitive type touch panel, the level of the first detection signal generated by the sensor becomes a level corresponding to the "contact state of the object with the above-mentioned screen". For a touch panel using an optical sensor as described in the above-mentioned embodiments, the level of the first detection signal generated by the sensor is a level "corresponding to the distance between the object and the screen".

在上述的传感装置中,也可以构成为,上述控制单元,在上述判定单元的判定结果是非接触的情况下以及虽然上述判定单元的判定结果是接触但该接触的判定结果未持续预定时间以上的情况下,按照使上述预定周期成为上述第1周期的方式控制上述读出单元,在上述判定单元的判定结果是连续上述预定时间以上的接触的情况下,按照使上述预定周期成为比上述第1周期短的上述第2周期的方式控制上述读出单元。In the sensing device described above, the control unit may be configured such that when the determination result of the determination unit is non-contact and the determination result of the contact does not last for a predetermined time or longer although the determination result of the determination unit is contact. In the case of the above-mentioned predetermined period, the above-mentioned reading unit is controlled in such a manner that the above-mentioned predetermined period becomes the above-mentioned first period. The above-mentioned readout unit is controlled in the above-mentioned second cycle with one short cycle.

根据此结构,只在对象物连续预定时间以上与画面接触的情况下,增加1个画面数量的第1检测信号的读出频度。因为,也在后述的实施方式中记载的那样,如果是不考虑接触时间,根据对象物与画面接触立即缩短读出1个画面数量的第1检测信号的周期的结构,则频繁发生周期的变更,而且有时会增加电力消耗的情况。另外,对于预定时间,可设定任意的时间宽度。According to this configuration, only when the object is continuously in contact with the screen for a predetermined time or longer, the frequency of reading the first detection signal for one screen is increased. Because, as also described in the embodiments described later, if the structure in which the cycle of reading out the first detection signal as many as one screen is immediately shortened according to the contact time between the object and the screen without considering the contact time, frequent occurrence of cycle change, and may increase power consumption. In addition, for the predetermined time, an arbitrary time width can be set.

另外,本发明的第1实施方式的传感装置,具有:多个传感器,其被排列在画面上,分别生成具有与对象物和上述画面的接触状态或上述对象物和上述画面的距离对应的电平的第1检测信号;读出单元,其以预定周期从上述多个传感器读出上述第1检测信号;2值化单元,其把由上述读出单元读出的上述各个第1检测信号的电平与阈值比较,分别生成2值化的第2检测信号;判定单元,其根据上述各个第2检测信号,判定上述对象物与上述画面是接触还是非接触;检测单元,其根据上述各个第2检测信号检测上述对象物与上述画面接触的位置;以及控制单元,其在开始接触输入的受理后,按照使上述预定周期成为第1周期的方式控制上述读出单元,在上述判定单元的判定结果是接触的情况下,按照使上述预定周期成为比上述第1周期短的第2周期的方式控制上述读出单元。In addition, the sensor device according to the first embodiment of the present invention has a plurality of sensors arranged on the screen, and each generates a sensor corresponding to the contact state between the object and the screen or the distance between the object and the screen. A first detection signal of a level; a readout unit that reads out the first detection signal from the plurality of sensors at a predetermined cycle; a binarization unit that converts each of the first detection signals read out by the readout unit The level of the above-mentioned object is compared with the threshold value to generate the second detection signal of binarization respectively; the determination unit judges whether the above-mentioned object and the above-mentioned screen are in contact or non-contact according to the above-mentioned each of the second detection signals; the detection unit, according to the above-mentioned each The second detection signal detects the position where the object is in contact with the screen; and the control unit controls the reading unit so that the predetermined period becomes the first period after the acceptance of the contact input is started, and in the determination unit When the determination result is contact, the readout unit is controlled so that the predetermined period becomes a second period shorter than the first period.

根据此结构,上述读出单元在开始接触输入的受理时,以第1周期读出1个画面数量的第1检测信号,只在对象物与画面接触的情况下,以比第1周期短的第2周期读出1个画面数量的第1检测信号。因此,在开始了接触输入的受理后,能够只在对象物与画面接触的情况下,增加1个画面数量的第1检测信号的读出频度,在其他的情况下,减少1个画面数量的第1检测信号的读出频度。从而,可降低电力消耗,并且即使在对象物高速移动的情况下,也能够对其进行跟踪,进行顺畅的接触输入。According to this structure, when the above-mentioned reading unit starts to accept the touch input, it reads the first detection signal of 1 screen in the first cycle, and only when the object is in contact with the screen, the first cycle is shorter than the first cycle. In the second cycle, the first detection signals for one screen are read out. Therefore, after the acceptance of the touch input is started, the frequency of reading the first detection signal by one screen can be increased only when the object is in contact with the screen, and the frequency of reading the first detection signal can be decreased by one screen in other cases. The readout frequency of the first detection signal. Therefore, power consumption can be reduced, and even when an object moves at a high speed, it can be tracked and smooth touch input can be performed.

在上述的传感装置中,也可以构成为,上述控制单元在开始接触输入的受理时,以使上述预定周期成为上述第1周期的方式控制上述读出单元,在上述判定单元的判定结果是连续预定时间以上的接触的情况下,以使上述预定周期成为比上述第1周期短的第2周期的方式控制上述读出单元。根据此结构,能够只在对象物连续预定时间以上与画面连续接触的情况下,提高1个画面数量的第1检测信号的读出频度。In the sensor device described above, the control unit may control the readout unit so that the predetermined period becomes the first period when the control unit starts accepting the touch input, and when the determination result of the determination unit is When the contact is continued for a predetermined time or longer, the readout unit is controlled so that the predetermined period becomes a second period shorter than the first period. According to this configuration, it is possible to increase the frequency of reading out the first detection signal for one screen only when the object is continuously in contact with the screen for a predetermined time or longer.

另外,本发明的第1实施方式的传感装置具有:多个传感器,其被排列在画面上,分别生成具有与对象物与上述画面的接触状态或上述对象物与上述画面的距离对应的电平的第1检测信号;读出单元,其以预定周期从上述多个传感器读出上述第1检测信号;2值化单元,其把由上述读出单元读出的上述各个第1检测信号的电平与阈值比较,分别生成2值化的第2检测信号;判定单元,其根据上述各个第2检测信号,判定上述对象物与上述画面是接触还是非接触;检测单元,其根据上述各个第2检测信号,检测上述对象物与上述画面接触的位置;和控制单元,其在开始接触输入的受理后,以使上述预定周期成为比第1周期短的第2周期的方式控制上述读出单元,在上述判定单元的判定结果是非接触的情况下,以使上述预定周期成为上述第1周期的方式控制上述读出单元。In addition, the sensor device according to the first embodiment of the present invention has a plurality of sensors arranged on the screen, each of which generates an electric signal corresponding to the contact state of the object with the screen or the distance between the object and the screen. a flat first detection signal; a readout unit that reads out the above-mentioned first detection signal from the above-mentioned plurality of sensors at a predetermined cycle; a binarization unit that converts each of the above-mentioned first detection signals read out by the above-mentioned readout unit The level is compared with the threshold value to generate binarized second detection signals respectively; the determination unit judges whether the object is in contact or not with the screen based on the above-mentioned respective second detection signals; 2. a detection signal for detecting a position where the object is in contact with the screen; and a control unit for controlling the reading unit so that the predetermined period becomes a second period shorter than the first period after the acceptance of the touch input is started. In a case where the determination result of the determination unit is non-contact, the readout unit is controlled so that the predetermined period becomes the first period.

根据此结构,读出单元在开始接触输入的受理时,以比第1周期短的第2周期读出1个画面数量的第1检测信号,只在对象物与画面非接触的情况下,以第1周期读出1个画面数量的第1检测信号。因此,在开始了接触输入的受理后,能够只在对象物与画面非接触的情况下,降低1个画面数量的第1检测信号的读出频度,在其他情况下增加1个画面数量的第1检测信号的读出频度。从而,可降低电力消耗,并且即使在对象物高速移动的情况下,也能够对其进行跟踪,进行顺畅的接触输入。According to this configuration, the reading unit reads out the first detection signal for one screen in the second period shorter than the first period when the acceptance of the touch input is started, and only when the object is not in contact with the screen, the first detection signal is read by In the first cycle, first detection signals for one screen are read. Therefore, after starting to accept the touch input, only when the object is not in contact with the screen, the frequency of reading the first detection signal by one screen can be reduced, and in other cases, the frequency of reading the first detection signal can be increased by one screen. The readout frequency of the first detection signal. Therefore, power consumption can be reduced, and even when an object moves at a high speed, it can be tracked and smooth touch input can be performed.

在上述的传感装置中,也可以构成为,上述控制单元在开始接触输入的受理时,以使上述预定周期成为比上述第1周期短的上述第2周期的方式控制上述读出单元,在上述判定单元的判定结果是连续预定时间以上的非接触的情况下,以使上述预定周期成为上述第1周期的方式控制上述读出单元。In the sensor device described above, the control unit may control the reading unit so that the predetermined period becomes the second period shorter than the first period when the control unit starts accepting the touch input, and When the determination result of the determination unit is non-contact continued for a predetermined time or more, the readout unit is controlled so that the predetermined period becomes the first period.

根据此结构,能够只在对象物连续预定时间以上与画面非接触的情况下,降低1个画面数量的第1检测信号的读出频度。因为,如在后述的实施方式中记载的那样,在例如利用手指或手写笔输入手写文字的情况下,在移动到下一个字画时,手指或手写笔会短时间从画面分离,所以如果在这样的情况下也随之变更读出周期,则频繁发生周期的变更,反而将导致电力消耗的增加。According to this configuration, the frequency of reading out the first detection signal for one screen can be reduced only when the object is not in contact with the screen for a predetermined time or longer. Because, as described in the embodiment described later, in the case of inputting handwritten characters with a finger or a stylus, for example, when moving to the next calligraphy and painting, the finger or the stylus will be separated from the screen for a short time. In the case of changing the readout cycle accordingly, frequent changes in the cycle will result in an increase in power consumption.

另外,在上述的传感装置中,也可以构成为具有变更单元,其在上述控制单元以使上述预定周期成为上述第1周期的方式控制上述读出单元的情况、和上述控制单元以使上述预定周期成为上述第2周期的方式控制上述读出单元的情况下,变更上述阈值。而且,也可以构成为,上述变更单元在上述控制单元以使上述预定周期成为上述第1周期的方式控制上述读出单元的情况下,把对应上述第1周期的第1阈值设定为上述阈值,在上述控制单元以使上述预定周期成为上述第2周期的方式控制上述读出单元的情况下,把对应上述第2周期的第2阈值设定为上述阈值。In addition, in the sensor device described above, it may be configured to include changing means for controlling the reading means so that the predetermined cycle becomes the first cycle by the control means, and the control means so that the When the readout unit is controlled so that the predetermined period becomes the second period, the threshold value is changed. Furthermore, the change unit may be configured such that, when the control unit controls the reading unit so that the predetermined period becomes the first period, the first threshold corresponding to the first period may be set as the threshold. In a case where the control unit controls the reading unit so that the predetermined period becomes the second period, a second threshold corresponding to the second period is set as the threshold.

因为,如后述的实施方式中所记载的那样,不同种类的传感器,随着1个画面数量的第1检测信号的读出周期的变更,第1检测信号的信号电平发生变化,所以,如果不变更阈值,则不能正确地进行对象物与画面是接触还是非接触的判定。As described in the embodiment described later, the signal level of the first detection signal changes with the change of the readout period of the first detection signal corresponding to one screen in different types of sensors. Therefore, If the threshold is not changed, it cannot be accurately determined whether the object is in contact with the screen or not.

另外,在上述的传感装置中,也可以构成为,上述判定单元对全部的上述第2检测信号中的满足由上述阈值所限定的条件的上述第2检测信号的个数进行计数,根据计数结果,判定上述对象物是与上述画面接触、还是非接触。例如,也可以如果计数结果是1以上,则判定为对象物与画面接触。另外,也可以在计数结果是预定值以上的情况下、和计数结果是由上限值和下限值所限定的预定范围内的值的情况下,判定对象物与画面接触。在后者的情况下,可减少误判定。另外,“满足由上述阈值所限定的条件的上述第2检测信号”,相当于例如与信号电平小于阈值的第1检测信号对应的第2检测信号、或与信号电平在阈值以上的第1检测信号对应的第2检测信号。In addition, in the above-mentioned sensing device, the above-mentioned determining unit may also be configured such that the above-mentioned determination unit counts the number of the above-mentioned second detection signals satisfying the condition defined by the above-mentioned threshold value among all the above-mentioned second detection signals, and according to the count As a result, it is determined whether the object is in contact with the screen or not. For example, if the count result is 1 or more, it may be determined that the object is in contact with the screen. Alternatively, it may be determined that the object is in contact with the screen when the count result is equal to or greater than a predetermined value and when the count result is within a predetermined range defined by an upper limit value and a lower limit value. In the latter case, misjudgments can be reduced. In addition, "the above-mentioned second detection signal that satisfies the condition defined by the above-mentioned threshold value" corresponds to, for example, the second detection signal corresponding to the first detection signal whose signal level is lower than the threshold value, or the second detection signal corresponding to the first detection signal whose signal level is not less than the threshold value. The 1st detection signal corresponds to the 2nd detection signal.

另外,本发明的第1实施方式的传感方法,使用多个传感器,检测上述对象物与上述画面接触的位置,该多个传感器被排列在画面上,分别生成具有与对象物和上述画面的接触状态或上述对象物和上述画面的距离对应的电平的第1检测信号,其中,以预定周期从上述多个传感器读出上述第1检测信号;把读出的上述各个第1检测信号的电平与阈值比较,分别生成2值化的第2检测信号;根据上述各个第2检测信号,判定上述对象物与上述画面是接触还是非接触;根据上述各个第2检测信号,检测上述对象物与上述画面接触的位置;在上述判定的结果是非接触的情况下,以使上述预定周期成为第1周期的方式控制上述各个第1检测信号的读出,在上述判定的结果是接触的情况下,以使上述预定周期成为比上述第1周期短的第2周期的方式控制上述各个第1检测信号的读出。采用以上的传感方法,可达到与第1实施方式的传感装置相同的效果。In addition, in the sensing method according to the first embodiment of the present invention, a plurality of sensors are used to detect the position where the object touches the screen. A first detection signal of a level corresponding to the contact state or the distance between the object and the screen, wherein the first detection signal is read from the plurality of sensors at a predetermined cycle; Levels are compared with thresholds to generate binarized second detection signals; whether the object is in contact with the screen or not is determined based on the second detection signals; and the object is detected based on the second detection signals The position in contact with the above-mentioned screen; when the result of the above-mentioned determination is non-contact, control the readout of each of the above-mentioned first detection signals so that the above-mentioned predetermined cycle becomes the first cycle; The readout of each of the first detection signals is controlled so that the predetermined period becomes a second period shorter than the first period. By the above sensing method, the same effect as that of the sensing device of the first embodiment can be achieved.

日本特开2004-318819号公报所记载的液晶显示装置始终以相同的周期进行坐标位置的检测。因此,即使是接触输入不是长时间的情况,也必须以和有接触输入的情况相同的周期从各个图像读取传感器33读出摄像数据,结果产生了多余的电力消耗。鉴于以上的情况,本发明的第2实施方式的的目的是降低电力消耗。The liquid crystal display device described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-318819 always detects coordinate positions at the same cycle. Therefore, even if the touch input is not for a long time, it is necessary to read the imaging data from each image reading sensor 33 at the same cycle as when there is a touch input, resulting in unnecessary power consumption. In view of the above circumstances, an object of the second embodiment of the present invention is to reduce power consumption.

为了达到上述的目的,本发明的第2实施方式的传感装置,用于检测对象物与画面接触的位置,其中具有:多个传感器,其被排列在画面上,分别生成具有与入射的光量对应大小的第1检测信号;读出单元,其能够以通常模式和低耗电模式进行动作,在通常模式下,以第1周期从上述多个传感器读出上述第1检测信号,在低耗电模式下,以比上述第1周期长的第2周期从上述多个传感器读出上述第1检测信号;2值化单元,其把由上述读出单元读出的上述各个第1检测信号与阈值比较,分别生成2值化的第2检测信号;检知单元,其根据上述各个第2检测信号,检知上述对象物与上述画面非接触;检测单元,其根据上述各个第2检测信号,检测上述对象物与上述画面接触的位置;和控制单元,其管理上述通常模式与上述低耗电模式之间的切换,在上述通常模式下,在上述检测单元连续预定时间检测到非接触的情况时,控制上述读出单元转到上述低耗电模式,并在预定的情况下,控制上述读出单元从上述低耗电模式转到上述通常模式。In order to achieve the above object, the sensor device according to the second embodiment of the present invention is used to detect the position where the object touches the screen, and includes: a plurality of sensors arranged on the screen to generate light with a light intensity corresponding to the incident light intensity. The first detection signal corresponding to the size; the readout unit, which can operate in the normal mode and the low power consumption mode, in the normal mode, read the above-mentioned first detection signal from the above-mentioned plurality of sensors in the first cycle, in the low power consumption mode In the electric mode, the above-mentioned first detection signals are read from the plurality of sensors with a second cycle longer than the above-mentioned first cycle; a binarization unit is used to combine the above-mentioned first detection signals read by the above-mentioned readout unit with Threshold value comparison generates binarized second detection signals respectively; detection means detects that the object is not in contact with the screen based on the respective second detection signals; detection means detects that the object is not in contact with the screen based on the respective second detection signals, Detecting a position where the object is in contact with the screen; and a control unit that manages switching between the normal mode and the low power consumption mode, in which non-contact is detected continuously for a predetermined time by the detection unit control the readout unit to switch to the low power consumption mode, and control the readout unit to switch from the low power consumption mode to the normal mode in a predetermined situation.

根据此结构,在连续预定时间检知到对象物与画面非接触的情况时,把读出单元的动作模式从通常模式转到低耗电模式,以比通常模式的情况长的第2周期读出1个画面数量的第1检测信号。因此,在对象物连续预定时间与画面非接触的情况下,与非如此的情况相比,可降低1个画面数量的第1检测信号的读出频度。例如,在把第1周期设定为60Hz、把第2周期设定为10Hz时,在对象物连续预定时间与画面非接触的情况下,与非如此的情况相比,可将1个画面数量的第1检测信号的读出频度减少到1/6。因此,可减少第1检测信号的读出和2值化信号的生成所需要的处理负荷,从而可相应地减少电力消耗。According to this configuration, when it is detected that the object is not in contact with the screen for a predetermined period of time, the operation mode of the reading unit is changed from the normal mode to the low power consumption mode, and the second cycle is longer than that of the normal mode. The number of 1st detection signals for 1 frame is output. Therefore, when the object is not in contact with the screen for a predetermined period of time, the frequency of reading out the first detection signal for one screen can be reduced compared to the case where this is not the case. For example, when the first period is set to 60 Hz and the second period is set to 10 Hz, when the object is not in contact with the screen for a predetermined period of time, the number of 1 screen can be reduced compared to the case where it does not. The readout frequency of the first detection signal is reduced to 1/6. Therefore, the processing load required for reading out the first detection signal and generating the binarized signal can be reduced, thereby reducing power consumption accordingly.

另外,所谓“被排列在画面上”,例如不仅包括把具备了多个传感器的触摸面板粘贴在画面上的情况,而且包括如后述的实施方式所记载的那样把多个传感器内置于显示面板中的情况。另外,所谓“对象物”是指手指或手写笔。另外,所谓“预定的情况”,如果是能够检知对象物接近了画面,并且对象物与画面的距离成为了一定距离以下的情况的结构,则是在低耗电模式下检知到对象物与画面的距离成为了一定距离以下的情况时,另外,如果是能够检知对象物与画面接触的结构,则是在低耗电模式下检知到对象物与画面接触的情况。In addition, "arranged on the screen" includes, for example, not only the case where a touch panel equipped with a plurality of sensors is pasted on the screen, but also the case where a plurality of sensors are built into a display panel as described in the embodiments described later. in the situation. In addition, the "object" refers to a finger or a stylus. In addition, the so-called "predetermined situation", if it is a structure that can detect that the object is close to the screen, and the distance between the object and the screen is less than a certain distance, it means that the object is detected in the low power consumption mode. If the distance to the screen is less than a certain distance, if the structure can detect that the object is in contact with the screen, it is detected that the object is in contact with the screen in the low power consumption mode.

另外,本发明的第2实施方式的传感装置,用于检测对象物与画面接触的位置,其中具有:多个传感器,其被排列在画面上,分别生成具有与入射的光量对应大小的第1检测信号;读出单元,其能够以通常模式和低耗电模式进行动作,在通常模式下,以第1周期从上述多个传感器读出上述第1检测信号,在低耗电模式下,以比上述第1周期长的第2周期从上述多个传感器读出上述第1检测信号;2值化单元,其把由上述读出单元读出的上述各个第1检测信号与阈值比较,分别生成2值化的第2检测信号;检知单元,其根据上述各个第2检测信号,检知上述对象物接近了上述画面,并且上述对象物与上述画面的距离成为了一定距离以下的情况;检测单元,其检测上述对象物与上述画面接触的位置;和控制单元,其管理上述通常模式与上述低耗电模式之间的切换,在上述低耗电模式下,在上述检知单元检知到成为了一定距离以下的情况时,控制上述读出单元转到上述通常模式,并在预定的情况下,控制上述读出单元从上述通常模式转到上述低耗电模式。In addition, the sensor device according to the second embodiment of the present invention is used to detect the position where an object touches the screen, and includes: a plurality of sensors arranged on the screen to generate a first sensor having a size corresponding to the amount of incident light. 1 detection signal; a readout unit, which can operate in a normal mode and a low power consumption mode. In the normal mode, the above-mentioned first detection signal is read from the plurality of sensors in the first cycle. In the low power consumption mode, Read the above-mentioned first detection signals from the plurality of sensors with a second period longer than the above-mentioned first period; a binarization unit that compares the above-mentioned first detection signals read by the above-mentioned readout unit with a threshold value, respectively A binarized second detection signal is generated; a detection unit detects that the object approaches the screen and the distance between the object and the screen is equal to or less than a certain distance based on the respective second detection signals; a detection unit that detects a position where the object is in contact with the screen; and a control unit that manages switching between the normal mode and the low power consumption mode, and in the low power consumption mode, the detection unit detects When the distance falls below a certain distance, the reading unit is controlled to switch to the normal mode, and when predetermined, the reading unit is controlled to switch from the normal mode to the low power consumption mode.

根据此结构,在检知到对象物与画面的距离成为了一定距离以下的情况时,把读出单元的动作模式从低耗电模式转到通常模式。因此,在对象物与画面的距离成为一定距离以下之前,读出单元以低耗电模式动作,以比通常模式的情况长的第2周期读出1个画面数量的第1检测信号。而当对象物与画面的距离成为了一定距离以下的情况时,读出单元以通常模式动作,以比低耗电模式的情况短的第1周期读出1个画面数量的第1检测信号。因此,在对象物与画面的距离成为一定距离以下之前,可降低读出1个画面数量的第1检测信号的频度。例如,在把第1周期设定为60Hz、把第2周期设定为10Hz时,在对象物与画面的距离成为一定距离以下之前,可将1个画面数量的第1检测信号的读出频度减少到1/6。因此,可减少第1检测信号的读出和2值化信号的生成所需要的处理负荷,从而可相应地减少电力消耗。According to this configuration, when it is detected that the distance between the object and the screen has become less than a certain distance, the operation mode of the reading unit is changed from the low power consumption mode to the normal mode. Therefore, until the distance between the object and the screen becomes equal to or less than a certain distance, the reading unit operates in the low power consumption mode, and reads out the first detection signal for one screen in a second period longer than that in the normal mode. On the other hand, when the distance between the object and the screen is less than a certain distance, the reading unit operates in the normal mode, and reads out the first detection signals for one screen in a first period shorter than that in the low power consumption mode. Therefore, until the distance between the object and the screen becomes equal to or less than a certain distance, the frequency of reading out the first detection signal for one screen can be reduced. For example, when the first cycle is set to 60 Hz and the second cycle is set to 10 Hz, the readout frequency of the first detection signal for one screen can be adjusted until the distance between the object and the screen becomes less than a certain distance. The degree is reduced to 1/6. Therefore, the processing load required for reading out the first detection signal and generating the binarized signal can be reduced, thereby reducing power consumption accordingly.

不仅如此,由于在对象物与画面的距离成为一定距离以下时,可增加1个画面数量的第1检测信号的读出频度,所以可提高关于接触判定和接触位置的检测的时间分辨率,能够以高精度进行接触判定和接触位置的检测。特别是,通过把从低耗电模式向通常模式切换的时机,不设定在检知到对象物与画面接触的情况时,而是设定在检知到对象物与画面的离成为了一定离以下的情况时,可以在对象物实际接触到画面之前,预先提高接触判定和接触位置的检测的精度。Furthermore, when the distance between the object and the screen becomes below a certain distance, the frequency of reading out the first detection signal for one screen can be increased, so the temporal resolution of the contact determination and the detection of the contact position can be improved, Contact determination and detection of a contact position can be performed with high precision. In particular, by setting the timing of switching from the low power consumption mode to the normal mode, not when the contact between the object and the screen is detected, but when the distance between the object and the screen is detected to be constant. When the distance is less than or equal to the distance, the accuracy of contact determination and detection of the contact position can be improved in advance before the object actually touches the screen.

另外,所谓“预定的情况”,例如,如果是可检知对象物与画面的非接触的情况的结构,则是在通常模式下检知到对象物连续预定时间与画面非接触的情况,另外,如果是可判定对象物是否接近了画面,并且对象物与画面的距离成为了一定距离以下的结构,则是在通常模式下连续预定时间得到了对象物与画面的距离未成为一定距离以下的判定结果的情况。In addition, the so-called "predetermined situation", for example, if it is a structure that can detect the non-contact of the object and the screen, it is detected in the normal mode that the object is not in contact with the screen for a continuous predetermined time, and , if it is a structure that can determine whether the object is close to the screen, and the distance between the object and the screen has become below a certain distance, it means that the distance between the object and the screen has not become below a certain distance in the normal mode for a predetermined time. The situation of the judgment result.

另外,本发明的第2实施方式的传感装置,用于检测对象物与画面接触的位置,其中具有:多个传感器,其被排列在上述画面上,分别生成具有与入射的光量对应大小的第1检测信号;读出单元,其能够以通常模式和低耗电模式进行动作,在通常模式下,以第1周期从上述多个传感器读出上述第1检测信号,在低耗电模式下,以比上述第1周期长的第2周期从上述多个传感器读出上述第1检测信号;2值化单元,其能够使用为了判定上述对象物是否接近了上述画面,并且上述对象物与上述画面的距离成为了一定距离以下而设定的第1阈值、和为了判定上述对象物是否是与上述画面非接触而设定的第2阈值,把由上述读出单元读出的上述各个第1检测信号与上述第1阈值和上述第2阈值的任意一方比较,分别生成2值化的第2检测信号;检知单元,其在上述2值化单元使用上述第1阈值生成了上述各个第2检测信号的情况下,根据该各个第2检测信号,检知上述对象物接近了上述画面,并且检知上述对象物与上述画面的距离成为了一定距离以下的情况,在由上述2值化单元使用上述第2阈值生成了上述各个第2检测信号的情况下,根据该各个第2检测信号,检知上述对象物与上述画面接触的情况;检测单元,其在上述2值化单元使用上述第2阈值生成了上述各个第2检测信号的情况下,根据该各个第2检测信号,检测上述对象物与上述画面接触的位置;和控制单元,其管理上述通常模式与上述低耗电模式之间的切换,并且管理上述第1阈值与上述第2阈值之间的变更,在上述低耗电模式下,在上述检知单元检知到成为了一定距离以下的情况时,控制上述读出单元转到上述通常模式,并且控制上述2值化单元,使用上述第2阈值生成上述各个第2检测信号,在上述通常模式下,在检知到上述检知单元连续预定时间检知到非接触的情况时,控制上述读出单元转到上述低耗电模式,并且控制上述2值化单元使用上述第1阈值生成上述各个第2检测信号。In addition, the sensor device according to the second embodiment of the present invention is used to detect the position where an object touches the screen, and includes: a plurality of sensors arranged on the above-mentioned screen to generate light beams having a size corresponding to the incident light amount, respectively. The first detection signal; the readout unit, which can operate in the normal mode and the low power consumption mode, in the normal mode, reads the above-mentioned first detection signal from the plurality of sensors in the first cycle, and in the low power consumption mode , read the above-mentioned first detection signal from the above-mentioned plurality of sensors with a second period longer than the above-mentioned first period; a binarization unit, which can be used to determine whether the above-mentioned object is close to the above-mentioned screen, and the above-mentioned object and the above-mentioned The first threshold set when the distance of the screen becomes less than a certain distance, and the second threshold set for judging whether the object is not in contact with the screen, each of the first thresholds read by the readout unit The detection signal is compared with any one of the above-mentioned first threshold value and the above-mentioned second threshold value to generate a binarized second detection signal; In the case of detection signals, based on the second detection signals, it is detected that the object approaches the screen, and when it is detected that the distance between the object and the screen has become a certain distance or less, the binarization unit When each of the second detection signals is generated using the second threshold value, it is detected that the object is in contact with the screen based on the second detection signal; the detection unit uses the second detection signal in the binarization unit 2. When each of the above-mentioned second detection signals is generated by a threshold value, detecting a position where the above-mentioned object touches the above-mentioned screen based on each of the second detection signals; and manage the change between the first threshold and the second threshold. In the low power consumption mode, when the detection unit detects that the distance is below a certain distance, the readout unit is controlled to switch to Go to the above-mentioned normal mode, and control the above-mentioned binarization unit, use the above-mentioned second threshold value to generate each of the above-mentioned second detection signals, and in the above-mentioned normal mode, when the detection unit detects that the non-contact is detected continuously for a predetermined time , control the readout unit to switch to the low power consumption mode, and control the binarization unit to generate the respective second detection signals using the first threshold.

根据此结构,在连续预定时间检知到对象物与画面非接触的情况时,把读出单元的动作模式从通常模式转到低耗电模式,以比通常模式的情况长的第2周期读出1个画面数量的第1检测信号。而在检知到对象物与画面的距离成为了一定距离以下的情况时,把读出单元的动作模式从低耗电模式切换到通常模式,以比低耗电模式的情况短的第1周期读出1个画面数量的第1检测信号。因此,在从连续预定时间检知到对象物与画面非接触的情况到之后检知到对象物与画面的距离成为了一定距离以下的情况的期间,以低耗电模式动作,与通常模式的情况相比,可降低1个画面数量的第1检测信号的读出频度。因此,可减少第1检测信号的读出和2值化信号的生成所需要的处理负荷,从而可相应地减少电力消耗。According to this configuration, when it is detected that the object is not in contact with the screen for a predetermined period of time, the operation mode of the reading unit is changed from the normal mode to the low power consumption mode, and the second cycle is longer than that of the normal mode. The number of 1st detection signals for 1 frame is output. When it is detected that the distance between the object and the screen has become below a certain distance, the operation mode of the readout unit is switched from the low power consumption mode to the normal mode, and the first cycle is shorter than that of the low power consumption mode. The number of first detection signals for one screen is read. Therefore, during the period from when it is detected that the object is not in contact with the screen for a predetermined continuous time to when it is detected that the distance between the object and the screen has become less than a certain distance, the operation is performed in the low power consumption mode, which is different from that in the normal mode. Compared with the case, the frequency of reading out the first detection signal for one screen can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load required for reading out the first detection signal and generating the binarized signal can be reduced, thereby reducing power consumption accordingly.

不仅如此,在从检知到对象物与画面的距离成为了一定距离以下的情况到之后连续预定时间检知到对象物与画面非接触的情况的期间,以通常模式动作,与低耗电模式的情况相比,可增加1个画面数量的第1检测信号的读出频度。因此,可提高关于接触判定和接触位置的检测在时间上的分辨率,能够以高精度进行接触判定和接触位置的检测。特别是,通过把从低耗电模式向通常模式切换的时机,不设定在检知到对象物与画面接触的情况时,而是设定在检知到对象物与画面的距离成为了一定距离以下的情况时,可以在对象物实际接触到画面之前,预先提高接触判定和接触位置的检测的精度。Not only that, during the period from when the distance between the object and the screen is detected to be below a certain distance to when the object is not in contact with the screen is detected for a predetermined period of time, the normal mode operates, and the low power consumption mode Compared with the case of this method, the frequency of reading out the first detection signal for one screen can be increased. Therefore, the temporal resolution of contact determination and contact position detection can be improved, and contact determination and contact position detection can be performed with high accuracy. In particular, by setting the timing of switching from the low power consumption mode to the normal mode, not when the object is detected to be in contact with the screen, but when the distance between the object and the screen is detected to be constant When the distance is less than or equal to the distance, before the object actually touches the screen, the accuracy of the contact determination and the detection of the contact position can be improved in advance.

在上述的传感装置中,也可以构成为,上述多个传感器是,对应m(2以上的整数)条扫描线与n(2以上的整数)条读出线的交叉点,排列在上述画面上的m×n个传感器,上述读出单元能够以通常模式和低耗电模式进行动作,在通常模式下,以上述第1周期从上述m×n个传感器读出上述第1检测信号,在低耗电模式下,以上述第2周期,从与连续排列的M(2以上、上述m以下的整数)条上述扫描线和连续排列的N(2以上、上述n以下的整数)条上述读出线对应的、小于上述m×n个的M×N个上述传感器中,读出上述第1检测信号。In the above sensor device, it may also be configured that the plurality of sensors are arranged on the screen corresponding to intersections of m (an integer greater than 2) scanning lines and n (an integer greater than 2) readout lines. For the m×n sensors above, the readout unit can operate in the normal mode and the low power consumption mode. In the normal mode, the first detection signal is read out from the m×n sensors in the first cycle. In the low power consumption mode, in the above-mentioned second cycle, from the above-mentioned M (integer of more than 2 and less than the above-mentioned m) consecutively arranged above-mentioned scanning lines and N (integer of above-mentioned 2 and below the above-mentioned n) above-mentioned read The above-mentioned first detection signal is read out of the M×N sensors corresponding to the outgoing lines, which are less than the above-mentioned m×n.

根据此结构,读出单元在低耗电模式下,以第2周期从排列在画面上的全部传感器(m×n)中的成为其中一部分的M×N个传感器读出第1检测信号。因此,在低耗电模式下,与通常模式的情况相比,可降低读出第1检测信号的频度,而且可减少读出第1检测信号的传感器的个数。因此,可进一步降低电力消耗。According to this configuration, the reading unit reads out the first detection signal from the M×N sensors which are part of all the sensors (m×n) arranged on the screen in the second cycle in the low power consumption mode. Therefore, in the low power consumption mode, the frequency of reading out the first detection signal can be reduced and the number of sensors that read out the first detection signal can be reduced compared to the case in the normal mode. Therefore, power consumption can be further reduced.

在上述的传感装置中,也可以构成为,具有:背光灯,其被设在上述画面的背面,具有多个可调整出射光的光量的光源;和调整单元,其根据上述读出单元读出的多个上述第1检测信号,计算出环境光的照度,在计算出的照度小于预定值,并且在上述低耗电模式下,相比其他上述光源的出射光的光量,增加与排列了上述M×N个上述传感器的区域对应的上述光源的出射光的光量。In the above-mentioned sensing device, it may also be configured to include: a backlight provided on the back of the above-mentioned screen, having a plurality of light sources capable of adjusting the light quantity of emitted light; The illuminance of the ambient light is calculated from the above-mentioned first detection signals, and when the calculated illuminance is less than a predetermined value, and in the above-mentioned low power consumption mode, compared with the light quantity of the outgoing light of other above-mentioned light sources, the light quantity is increased and arranged The amount of light emitted by the light source corresponding to the M×N areas of the sensors.

如后述的实施方式中记载的那样,在传感装置周围暗的情况下,利用由对象物反射的背光灯的光,检知对象物接近了画面的附近的情况。因此,在传感装置周围暗的情况下,如果背光灯的发光亮度弱,则不容易检知到接近的情况。因此,如果采用上述的结构,即使是传感装置周围暗的情况,也能够更容易检知到对象物接近了画面的附近的情况。另外,由于只对画面中在低耗电模式下排列了读出第1检测信号的传感器的区域,增强来自背光灯的光,所以,可抑制不必要的电力消耗。As described in the embodiments described later, when the surroundings of the sensor device are dark, it is detected that the object approaches the vicinity of the screen by using the light of the backlight reflected by the object. Therefore, when the surroundings of the sensor device are dark, it is difficult to detect approaching if the light emission luminance of the backlight is weak. Therefore, according to the above configuration, it is possible to more easily detect that an object approaches the vicinity of the screen even when the surroundings of the sensor device are dark. In addition, since the light from the backlight is enhanced only in the area of the screen where the sensors that read out the first detection signal are arranged in the low power consumption mode, unnecessary power consumption can be suppressed.

在上述的传感装置中,也可以构成为,上述多个传感器对应多条扫描线与多条读出线的交叉点排列在上述画面上,上述读出单元具有选择单元,该选择单元在上述通常模式的情况下顺序选择上述多条扫描线的各条,在上述低耗电模式的情况下,以每L(2以上的整数)条选择1条的比例,顺序选择上述多条扫描线,上述读出单元通过上述多条读出线从与上述选择单元所选择的上述扫描线对应的上述传感器,分别读出上述第1检测信号。In the above-mentioned sensing device, it may also be configured that the above-mentioned multiple sensors are arranged on the above-mentioned screen corresponding to the intersections of the multiple scanning lines and the multiple read-out lines, and the above-mentioned read-out unit has a selection unit, and the selection unit is in the above-mentioned In the case of the normal mode, each of the above-mentioned plurality of scanning lines is sequentially selected, and in the case of the above-mentioned low power consumption mode, the above-mentioned plurality of scanning lines are sequentially selected at a ratio of selecting one for every L (an integer greater than 2), The readout means reads out the first detection signals from the sensors corresponding to the scanning lines selected by the selection means via the plurality of readout lines.

根据此结构,选择单元在低耗电模式的情况下,以每L条选择1条的比例顺序选择多条扫描线。因此,在低耗电模式的情况下,与通常模式的情况相比,不仅可降低1个画面数量的第1检测信号的读出频度,而且可将读出第1检测信号的传感器的个数减少到1/L。由此,可进一步减少电力消耗。According to this configuration, the selection unit sequentially selects a plurality of scanning lines at a rate of selecting one for every L lines in the low power consumption mode. Therefore, in the case of the low power consumption mode, compared with the case of the normal mode, not only can the frequency of reading the first detection signal for one screen be reduced, but also the number of sensors that read the first detection signal can be reduced. number reduced to 1/L. Accordingly, power consumption can be further reduced.

另外,本发明的第2实施方式的传感方法,使用多个传感器,检知对象物与上述画面接触的位置,该多个传感器被排列在画面上,分别生成具有与入射的光量对应大小的第1检测信号,其中,能够以通常模式和低耗电模式进行上述第1检测信号的读出,在通常模式下,以第1周期从上述多个传感器读出上述第1检测信号,在低耗电模式下,以比上述第1周期长的第2周期从上述多个传感器读出上述第1检测信号,并且以上述通常模式和上述低耗电模式的任意一方,分别读出上述第1检测信号;把读出的上述各个第1检测信号与阈值比较,分别生成2值化的第2检测信号;根据上述各个第2检测信号,检知上述对象物与上述画面非接触的情况;根据上述各个第2检测信号,检测上述对象物与上述画面接触的位置;管理上述通常模式与上述低耗电模式之间的切换,在上述通常模式下,在连续预定时间检测到上述对象物与上述画面为非接触的情况时,把上述第1检测信号的读出转到上述低耗电模式,并在预定的情况下,把上述第1检测信号的读出从上述低耗电模式转到上述通常模式。In addition, the sensing method according to the second embodiment of the present invention detects the position where the object touches the above-mentioned screen using a plurality of sensors arranged on the screen to generate light beams each having a size corresponding to the amount of incident light. The first detection signal, wherein the above-mentioned first detection signal can be read in the normal mode and the low power consumption mode, and in the normal mode, the above-mentioned first detection signal is read from the above-mentioned plurality of sensors in the first cycle, and the low In the power consumption mode, the first detection signals are read from the plurality of sensors in a second cycle longer than the first cycle, and the first detection signals are read out in either the normal mode or the low power consumption mode. detection signal; compare the above-mentioned first detection signals read out with a threshold value to generate binarized second detection signals respectively; according to each of the second detection signals, detect that the above-mentioned object is not in contact with the above-mentioned screen; according to Each of the above-mentioned second detection signals detects the contact position of the above-mentioned object with the above-mentioned screen; manages the switching between the above-mentioned normal mode and the above-mentioned low power consumption mode, and in the above-mentioned normal mode, detects the contact between the above-mentioned object and the above-mentioned screen for a continuous predetermined time. When the screen is non-contact, the readout of the first detection signal is transferred to the above-mentioned low power consumption mode, and in a predetermined case, the readout of the first detection signal is transferred from the above-mentioned low power consumption mode to the above-mentioned normal mode.

另外,本发明的第2实施方式的传感方法,使用多个传感器,检知对象物与上述画面接触的位置,该多个传感器被排列在画面上,分别生成具有与入射的光量对应大小的第1检测信号,其中,能够以通常模式和低耗电模式进行上述第1检测信号的读出,在通常模式下,以第1周期从上述多个传感器读出上述第1检测信号,在低耗电模式下,以比上述第1周期长的第2周期从上述多个传感器读出上述第1检测信号,并且以上述通常模式和上述低耗电模式的任意一方,分别读出上述第1检测信号;把读出的上述各个第1检测信号与阈值比较,分别生成2值化的第2检测信号;根据上述各个第2检测信号,检知上述对象物接近了上述画面,并且检知上述对象物与上述画面的距离成为一定距离以下的情况;管理上述通常模式与上述低耗电模式之间的切换,在上述低耗电模式下,在检知到上述对象物与上述画面的距离成为一定距离以下的情况时,把上述第1检测信号的读出转到上述通常模式,并在预定的情况下,把上述第1检测信号的读出从上述通常模式转到上述低耗电模式。In addition, the sensing method according to the second embodiment of the present invention detects the position where the object touches the above-mentioned screen using a plurality of sensors arranged on the screen to generate light beams each having a size corresponding to the amount of incident light. The first detection signal, wherein the above-mentioned first detection signal can be read in the normal mode and the low power consumption mode, and in the normal mode, the above-mentioned first detection signal is read from the above-mentioned plurality of sensors in the first cycle, and the low In the power consumption mode, the first detection signals are read from the plurality of sensors in a second cycle longer than the first cycle, and the first detection signals are read out in either the normal mode or the low power consumption mode. detection signal; compare the above-mentioned respective first detection signals read out with threshold values to generate binarized second detection signals respectively; based on the above-mentioned respective second detection signals, it is detected that the above-mentioned object is close to the above-mentioned screen, and it is detected that the above-mentioned When the distance between the object and the above-mentioned screen becomes less than a certain distance; manage the switching between the above-mentioned normal mode and the above-mentioned low power consumption mode, and in the above-mentioned low power consumption mode, when the distance between the above-mentioned object and the above-mentioned screen is detected When the distance is less than a certain distance, the reading of the first detection signal is switched to the normal mode, and when predetermined, the reading of the first detection signal is switched from the normal mode to the low power consumption mode.

根据上述的传感方法,也可以达到与第2实施方式的传感装置相同的效果。Also according to the sensing method described above, the same effect as that of the sensing device of the second embodiment can be achieved.

特开2004-318819号公报中记载的液晶显示装置,成为摄像数据的读出对象的多个图像读取传感器33的个数是固定的,始终从相同的多个图像读取传感器33读出摄像数据。因此,即使是接触输入不是长时间的情况,也必须从与有接触输入的情况相同个数的图像读取传感器33读出摄像数据,因而造成了多余的电力消耗。鉴于以上的情况,本发明的第3和第4实施方式的目的是,减少电力消耗。In the liquid crystal display device described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2004-318819, the number of image reading sensors 33 to be read out of image data is fixed, and images are always read from the same plurality of image reading sensors 33. data. Therefore, even if the touch input is not for a long time, it is necessary to read the imaging data from the same number of image reading sensors 33 as in the case of the touch input, resulting in unnecessary power consumption. In view of the above circumstances, an object of the third and fourth embodiments of the present invention is to reduce power consumption.

为了达到上述的目的,本发明的第3实施方式的传感装置,用于检测对象物与画面接触的位置,其中具有:m×n个传感器,其对应m(2以上的整数)条扫描线和n(2以上的整数)条读出线的交叉点排列在上述画面上,分别生成具有与入射的光量对应大小的第1检测信号;读出单元,其能够以通常读出模式和部分读出模式进行动作,在通常读出模式下,从上述m×n个传感器的各个中读出上述第1检测信号,在部分读出模式下,从与连续排列的M(2以上、上述m以下的整数)条上述扫描线和连续排列的N(2以上、上述n以下的整数)条上述读出线对应的、小于上述m×n个的M×N个上述传感器的各个中读出上述第1检测信号;2值化单元,其把由上述读出单元读出的上述各个第1检测信号与阈值比较,分别生成2值化的第2检测信号;检知单元,其根据上述各个第2检测信号,检知上述对象物与上述画面非接触的情况;检测单元,其根据上述各个第2检测信号,检测上述对象物与上述画面接触的位置;和控制单元,其管理上述通常读出模式与上述部分读出模式之间的切换,在上述通常读出模式下,在上述检知单元连续预定时间检知到是非接触的情况时,控制上述读出单元转到上述部分读出模式,并且在预定的情况下,控制上述读出单元从上述部分读出模式转到上述通常读出模式。In order to achieve the above object, the sensor device according to the third embodiment of the present invention is used to detect the position where the object touches the screen, and it has: m×n sensors, which correspond to m (an integer greater than 2) scanning lines and the intersections of n (more than 2 integers) readout lines are arranged on the above-mentioned screen, respectively generating the first detection signal with a magnitude corresponding to the amount of light incident; In the normal readout mode, the above-mentioned first detection signal is read out from each of the above-mentioned m×n sensors; Integer of) above-mentioned scanning lines and N (above 2 above-mentioned integers below n below-mentioned integer) above-mentioned read-out lines corresponding to each of the above-mentioned M×N above-mentioned sensors that are less than the above-mentioned m×n are read out the above-mentioned first 1 detection signal; a binarization unit that compares the above-mentioned first detection signals read by the above-mentioned readout unit with a threshold value to generate a binarized second detection signal; a detection unit that uses the above-mentioned respective second detection signals a detection signal for detecting that the object is not in contact with the screen; a detection unit for detecting a position where the object is in contact with the screen based on each of the second detection signals; and a control unit for managing the normal reading mode Switching between the above-mentioned partial readout mode, in the above-mentioned normal readout mode, when the above-mentioned detection unit detects that it is non-contact for a predetermined time, control the above-mentioned readout unit to switch to the above-mentioned partial readout mode, and In a predetermined situation, the above-mentioned reading unit is controlled to switch from the above-mentioned partial reading mode to the above-mentioned normal reading mode.

根据此结构,在连续预定时间检知到对象物与画面非接触的情况时,把读出单元的动作模式从通常读出模式转到部分读出模式。在部分读出模式的情况下,读出单元从被排列在画面上的全部传感器(m×n)中的其中一部分的M×N个传感器读出第1检测信号。因此,在对象物连续预定时间与画面非接触的情况下,由于只从被排列在画面上的一部分传感器读出第1检测信号,所以可减少读出第1检测信号的传感器的个数。因此可减少第1检测信号的读出和2值化信号的生成所需要的处理负荷,从而可相应地减少电力消耗。According to this configuration, when it is detected that the object is not in contact with the screen continuously for a predetermined time, the operation mode of the reading unit is changed from the normal reading mode to the partial reading mode. In the case of the partial readout mode, the readout means reads out the first detection signal from some M×N sensors among all the sensors (m×n) arranged on the screen. Therefore, when the object is not in contact with the screen for a predetermined time, the first detection signal is read from only some of the sensors arranged on the screen, so the number of sensors that read the first detection signal can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load required for reading out the first detection signal and generating the binarized signal can be reduced, thereby reducing power consumption accordingly.

另外,所谓“被排列在画面上”,例如不仅包括把具备了多个传感器的触摸面板粘贴在画面上的情况,而且包括如后述的实施方式所记载的那样把多个传感器内置于显示面板中的情况。另外,所谓“对象物”是指手指或手写笔。另外,所谓“预定的情况”,如果是能够检知对象物接近了画面,并且对象物与画面的距离成为了一定距离以下的情况的结构,则是在部分读出模式下检知到对象物与画面的距离成为了一定距离以下的情况。另外,如果是能够检知对象物与画面接触的情况的结构,则是在部分读出模式下检知到对象物与画面接触的情况。In addition, "arranged on the screen" includes, for example, not only the case where a touch panel equipped with a plurality of sensors is pasted on the screen, but also the case where a plurality of sensors are built into a display panel as described in the embodiments described later. in the situation. In addition, the "object" refers to a finger or a stylus. In addition, the so-called "predetermined case", if it is a structure that can detect that the object approaches the screen, and the distance between the object and the screen becomes less than a certain distance, it means that the object is detected in the partial readout mode. The distance from the screen may be less than a certain distance. In addition, if it is configured to be able to detect that the object is in contact with the screen, it is detected that the object is in contact with the screen in the partial readout mode.

另外,本发明的第3实施方式的传感装置,用于检测对象物与画面接触的位置,其中具有:m×n个传感器,其对应m(2以上的整数)条扫描线和n(2以上的整数)条读出线的交叉点排列在上述画面上,分别生成具有与入射的光量对应大小的第1检测信号;读出单元,其能够以通常读出模式和部分读出模式进行动作,在通常读出模式下,从上述m×n个传感器的各个读出上述第1检测信号,在部分读出模式下,从与连续排列的M(2以上、上述m以下的整数)条上述扫描线和连续排列的N(2以上、上述n以下的整数)条上述读出线对应的、小于上述m×n个的M×N个上述传感器的各个中读出上述第1检测信号;2值化单元,其把由上述读出单元读出的上述各个第1检测信号与上述阈值比较,分别生成2值化的第2检测信号;检知单元,其根据上述各个第2检测信号,检知上述对象物接近了上述画面,并与上述画面的距离成为了一定距离以下的情况;检测单元,其检测上述对象物与上述画面接触的位置;和控制单元,其管理上述通常读出模式与上述部分读出模式之间的切换,在上述部分读出模式下,在上述检知单元检知到成为了一定距离以下的情况时,控制上述读出单元转到上述通常读出模式,并且在预定的情况下,控制上述读出单元从上述通常读出模式转到上述部分读出模式。In addition, the sensor device according to the third embodiment of the present invention is used to detect the position where the object touches the screen, and has m×n sensors corresponding to m (an integer greater than 2) scanning lines and n (2 The intersections of the above integer) readout lines are arranged on the above-mentioned screen, respectively generating the first detection signal with a magnitude corresponding to the incident light amount; the readout unit can operate in a normal readout mode and a partial readout mode , in the normal read mode, read the above-mentioned first detection signal from each of the above-mentioned m×n sensors, and in the partial read-out mode, read the above-mentioned Read the above-mentioned first detection signal from each of the M×N above-mentioned sensors that are less than the above-mentioned m×n number corresponding to the scanning line and the N (integer of more than 2 and less than the above-mentioned n) readout lines arranged in a row; 2 A value conversion unit, which compares the above-mentioned first detection signals read by the above-mentioned read-out unit with the above-mentioned threshold values, and generates binarized second detection signals respectively; It is known that the above-mentioned object is close to the above-mentioned screen, and the distance from the above-mentioned screen becomes less than a certain distance; a detection unit detects the position where the above-mentioned object is in contact with the above-mentioned screen; and a control unit manages the above-mentioned normal reading mode and In the switching between the above-mentioned partial readout modes, in the above-mentioned partial readout mode, when the above-mentioned detection unit detects that the distance has become less than a certain distance, the above-mentioned readout unit is controlled to switch to the above-mentioned normal readout mode, and In a predetermined situation, the above-mentioned readout unit is controlled to switch from the above-mentioned normal readout mode to the above-mentioned partial readout mode.

根据此结构,在检知到对象物与画面的距离成为了一定距离以下的情况时,把读出单元的动作模式从部分读出模式转到通常读出模式。由此,在对象物与画面的距离成为一定距离以下之前,读出单元以部分读出模式动作,从被排列在画面上的全部传感器(m×n个)中的成为其中一部分的M×N个传感器读出第1检测信号。而在对象物与画面的距离成为了一定距离以下时,读出单元以通常读出模式动作,从被排列在画面上的全部传感器读出第1检测信号。According to this configuration, when it is detected that the distance between the object and the screen has become less than a certain distance, the operation mode of the reading means is changed from the partial reading mode to the normal reading mode. Thus, until the distance between the object and the screen becomes less than a certain distance, the readout unit operates in the partial readout mode, and reads from the M×N sensors which are a part of all the sensors (m×n) arranged on the screen. A sensor reads out the first detection signal. On the other hand, when the distance between the object and the screen is equal to or less than a certain distance, the readout unit operates in the normal readout mode to read out the first detection signals from all the sensors arranged on the screen.

因此,在对象物与画面的距离成为了一定距离以下之前,由于只从被排列在画面上的一部分传感器读出第1检测信号,所以可减少读出第1检测信号的传感器的个数。因此可减少第1检测信号的读出和2值化信号的生成所需要的处理负荷,从而可相应地减少电力消耗。而且,在对象物与画面的距离成为一定距离以下时,由于从被排列在画面上的全部传感器读出第1检测信号,所以可进行把画面整体作为对象的接触判定和接触位置的检测。Therefore, since the first detection signals are read out only from some of the sensors arranged on the screen until the distance between the object and the screen becomes less than a certain distance, the number of sensors for reading out the first detection signals can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load required for reading out the first detection signal and generating the binarized signal can be reduced, thereby reducing power consumption accordingly. Furthermore, since the first detection signals are read from all the sensors arranged on the screen when the distance between the object and the screen is less than a certain distance, contact determination and contact position detection can be performed with the entire screen as an object.

所谓“预定的情况”,如果是能够检知对象物与画面非接触的情况的结构,在通常读出模式下连续预定时间检知到对象物与画面非接触的情况,而如果是能够判定对象物是否接近了画面,并且对象物与画面的距离成为了一定距离以下的情况的结构,则是在通常读出模式下连续预定时间得到了对象物与画面的距离未成为一定距离以下的情况。The so-called "predetermined situation", if it is a structure that can detect that the object is not in contact with the screen, in the normal readout mode, it is detected that the object is not in contact with the screen for a predetermined time, and if it can be determined that the object is not in contact with the screen. Whether the object is close to the screen and the distance between the object and the screen is less than a certain distance means that the distance between the object and the screen is not less than a certain distance in the normal reading mode for a predetermined period of time.

另外,本发明的第3实施方式的传感装置,用于检测对象物与画面接触的位置,其中具有:m×n个传感器,其对应m(2以上的整数)条扫描线和n(2以上的整数)条读出线的交叉点排列在上述画面上,分别生成具有与入射的光量对应大小的第1检测信号;读出单元,其能够以通常读出模式和部分读出模式进行动作,在通常读出模式下,从上述m×n个传感器的各个读出上述第1检测信号,在部分读出模式下,从与连续排列的M(2以上、上述m以下的整数)条上述扫描线和连续排列的N(2以上、上述n以下的整数)条上述读出线对应的、小于上述m×n个的M×N个上述传感器的各个中读出上述第1检测信号;2值化单元,其能够使用为了判定上述对象物是否接近了上述画面,并且上述对象物与上述画面的距离成为一定距离以下而设定的第1阈值、和为了判定上述对象物是否与上述画面非接触而设定的第2阈值,把由上述读出单元读出的上述各个第1检测信号与上述第1阈值和上述第2阈值的任意一方比较,分别生成2值化的第2检测信号;检知单元,其在上述2值化单元使用上述第1阈值生成了上述各个第2检测信号的情况下,根据该各个第2检测信号,检知上述对象物接近了上述画面,并且上述对象物与上述画面的距离成为了一定距离以下的情况,在上述2值化单元使用上述第2阈值生成了上述各个第2检测信号的情况下,根据该各个第2检测信号,检知上述对象物与上述画面非接触的情况;检测单元,其在上述2值化单元使用上述第2阈值生成了上述各个第2检测信号的情况下,根据该各个第2检测信号,检测上述对象物与上述画面接触的位置;和控制单元,其管理上述通常读出模式与上述部分读出模式之间的切换,并且管理上述第1阈值与上述第2阈值之间的变更,在上述部分读出模式下,在上述检知单元检知到成为了一定距离以下的情况时,控制上述读出单元转到上述通常读出模式,并且控制上述2值化单元使用上述第2阈值生成上述各个第2检测信号,在上述通常读出模式下,在上述检知单元连续预定时间检知到非接触的情况时,控制上述读出单元转到上述部分读出模式,并且控制上述2值化单元使用上述第1阈值生成上述各个第2检测信号。In addition, the sensor device according to the third embodiment of the present invention is used to detect the position where the object touches the screen, and has m×n sensors corresponding to m (an integer greater than 2) scanning lines and n (2 The intersections of the above integer) readout lines are arranged on the above-mentioned screen, respectively generating the first detection signal with a magnitude corresponding to the incident light amount; the readout unit can operate in a normal readout mode and a partial readout mode , in the normal read mode, read the above-mentioned first detection signal from each of the above-mentioned m×n sensors, and in the partial read-out mode, read the above-mentioned Read the above-mentioned first detection signal from each of the M×N above-mentioned sensors that are less than the above-mentioned m×n number corresponding to the scanning line and the N (integer of more than 2 and less than the above-mentioned n) readout lines arranged in a row; 2 A value quantization unit that can use a first threshold set for determining whether the object is close to the screen, and a distance between the object and the screen is equal to or less than a certain distance, and a first threshold value for determining whether the object is different from the screen. contact with the second threshold set, and compare each of the first detection signals read by the readout unit with any one of the first threshold and the second threshold, and generate binarized second detection signals respectively; A detecting unit that, when the binarization unit generates the respective second detection signals using the first threshold value, detects that the object approaches the screen based on the respective second detection signals, and that the object When the distance from the screen is less than a certain distance, when the binarization unit generates the respective second detection signals using the second threshold value, the distance between the object and the object is detected based on the respective second detection signals. In the case where the screen is not in contact: a detecting unit configured to detect that the object is in contact with the screen based on the respective second detection signals when the binarization unit generates the respective second detection signals using the second threshold. and a control unit that manages switching between the above-mentioned normal read mode and the above-mentioned partial read-out mode, and manages the change between the above-mentioned first threshold value and the above-mentioned second threshold value, and in the above-mentioned partial read-out mode, in When the detecting unit detects that the distance is less than a certain distance, the reading unit is controlled to switch to the normal reading mode, and the binarization unit is controlled to generate the respective second detection signals using the second threshold value. In the normal readout mode, when the detection unit detects non-contact for a predetermined time continuously, the readout unit is controlled to switch to the partial readout mode, and the binarization unit is controlled to use the first threshold to generate Each of the above-mentioned second detection signals.

根据此结构,在连续预定时间检知到对象物与画面非接触的情况时,把读出单元的动作模式从通常读出模式转到部分读出模式,从被排列在画面上的一部分传感器读出第1检测信号。而在检知到对象物与画面的距离成为了一定距离以下的情况时,把读出单元的动作模式从部分读出模式转到通常读出模式,从被排列在画面上的全部传感器读出第1检测信号。According to this structure, when it is detected that the object is not in contact with the screen for a predetermined period of time, the operation mode of the readout unit is changed from the normal readout mode to the partial readout mode, and the readout is read from a part of the sensors arranged on the screen. output the first detection signal. When it is detected that the distance between the object and the screen has become below a certain distance, the operation mode of the readout unit is changed from the partial readout mode to the normal readout mode, and all the sensors arranged on the screen are read out. 1st detection signal.

因此,由于在从连续预定时间检知到对象物与画面非接触的情况到之后检知到对象物与画面的距离成为了一定距离以下的情况的期间,只从被排列在画面上的一部分传感器读出第1检测信号,所以可减少读出第1检测信号的传感器的个数。因此可减少第1检测信号的读出和2值化信号的生成所需要的处理负荷,从而可相应地减少电力消耗。Therefore, during the period from when the object is not in contact with the screen detected for a predetermined period of time to when the distance between the object and the screen becomes less than a certain distance is detected thereafter, only a part of the sensors arranged on the screen Since the first detection signal is read, the number of sensors for reading the first detection signal can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load required for reading out the first detection signal and generating the binarized signal can be reduced, thereby reducing power consumption accordingly.

不仅如此,由于在从检知到对象物与画面的距离成为了一定距离以下的情况到之后的连续预定时间检知到对象物与画面非接触情况的期间,从被排列在画面上的全部传感器读出第1检测信号,所以可进行把画面整体作为对象的接触判定和接触位置的检测。Furthermore, since the detection of the non-contact between the object and the screen for a continuous predetermined time after the detection of the distance between the object and the screen has become less than a certain distance, all the sensors arranged on the screen Since the first detection signal is read out, it is possible to perform touch determination and touch position detection targeting the entire screen.

在上述的传感装置中,也可以构成为,上述读出单元具有选择单元,该选择单元在上述通常读出模式下,顺序选择上述m条扫描线的各条,在上述部分读出模式下,以每L(2以上的整数)条选择1条的比例,顺序选择上述M条的上述扫描线,上述读出单元在上述通常读出模式下,从上述m×n个传感器的各个读出上述第1检测信号,在上述部分读出模式下,从M×N/L个上述传感器的各个读出上述第1检测信号。In the above sensor device, it may also be configured that the readout unit has a selection unit that sequentially selects each of the m scanning lines in the normal readout mode, and selects each of the m scanning lines sequentially in the partial readout mode. , at a ratio of selecting one for every L (an integer greater than 2), sequentially select the above-mentioned M scanning lines, and the above-mentioned readout unit reads out from each of the above-mentioned m×n sensors in the above-mentioned normal readout mode. The first detection signal is read from each of the M×N/L sensors in the partial readout mode.

根据此结构,选择单元在部分读出模式的情况下,以每L条选择1条的比例,顺序选择成为选择对象的M条扫描线。因此,由于在部分读出模式的情况下,能够把读出第1检测信号的传感器的个数减少到1/L,所以可进一步降低电力消耗。According to this configuration, the selection unit sequentially selects M scanning lines to be selected at a rate of selecting one for every L in the case of the partial readout mode. Therefore, in the case of the partial readout mode, the number of sensors that read out the first detection signal can be reduced to 1/L, so that power consumption can be further reduced.

在上述的传感装置中,也可以构成为,具有:背光灯,其设在上述画面的背面,具有多个可调整出射光的光量的光源;和调整单元,其根据上述读出单元读出的多个上述第1检测信号计算出环境光的照度,在计算出的照度小于预定值,并且在上述部分读出模式的情况下,相比其他上述光源的出射光的光量,增加与排列了上述M×N个上述传感器的区域对应的上述光源的出射光的光量。In the above-mentioned sensing device, it may also be configured to include: a backlight, which is provided on the back of the above-mentioned screen, and has a plurality of light sources that can adjust the light quantity of emitted light; The illuminance of the ambient light is calculated from a plurality of the above-mentioned first detection signals, and when the calculated illuminance is less than a predetermined value, and in the case of the above-mentioned partial readout mode, compared with the light quantity of the outgoing light of the other above-mentioned light sources, the increase and arrangement are The amount of light emitted by the light source corresponding to the M×N areas of the sensors.

根据此结构,即使是传感装置的周围暗的情况,也能够更容易检知到对象物接近了画面的情况。另外,由于只对画面中的排列了在部分读出模式下读出第1检测信号的传感器的区域,增强来自背光灯的光,所以,可抑制不必要的电力消耗。According to this configuration, even when the surroundings of the sensor device are dark, it is possible to more easily detect that an object is approaching the screen. In addition, since the light from the backlight is enhanced only in the area of the screen where the sensors that read out the first detection signal in the partial readout mode are arranged, unnecessary power consumption can be suppressed.

另外,本发明的第3实施方式的传感方法,使用m×n个传感器检测对象物与画面接触的位置,该m×n个传感器对应m(2以上的整数)条扫描线和n(2以上的整数)条读出线的交叉点被排列在上述画面上,分别生成具有与入射的光量对应大小的第1检测信号,其中,能够以通常读出模式和部分读出模式进行上述第1检测信号的读出,在通常读出模式下,从上述m×n个传感器的各个读出上述第1检测信号,在部分读出模式下,从与连续排列的M(2以上、上述m以下的整数)条上述扫描线和连续排列的N(2以上、上述n以下的整数)条上述读出线对应的、小于上述m×n个的M×N个上述传感器的各个中读出上述第1检测信号,并且以上述通常读出模式和上述部分读出模式的任意一方分别读出上述第1检测信号;把读出的上述各个第1检测信号与阈值比较,分别生成2值化的第2检测信号;根据上述各个第2检测信号,检知上述对象物与上述画面非接触的情况;根据上述各个第2检测信号,检测上述对象物与上述画面接触的位置;管理上述通常读出模式与上述部分读出模式之间的切换,在上述通常读出模式下,在连续预定时间检知到上述对象物与上述画面是非接触的情况时,把上述第1检测信号的读出转到上述部分读出模式,并且在预定的情况下,把上述第1检测信号的读出从上述部分读出模式转到上述通常读出模式。In addition, the sensing method according to the third embodiment of the present invention uses m×n sensors corresponding to m (integer of 2 or more) scanning lines and n (2 The intersections of the above integer) readout lines are arranged on the above-mentioned screen to generate first detection signals having a magnitude corresponding to the incident light amount, wherein the above-mentioned first detection signal can be performed in a normal readout mode and a partial readout mode. For the readout of the detection signal, in the normal readout mode, the above-mentioned first detection signal is read out from each of the above-mentioned m×n sensors; Integer of) above-mentioned scanning lines and N (above 2 above-mentioned integers below n below-mentioned integer) above-mentioned read-out lines corresponding to each of the above-mentioned M×N above-mentioned sensors that are less than the above-mentioned m×n are read out the above-mentioned first 1 detection signal, and read the above-mentioned first detection signal respectively in any one of the above-mentioned normal read mode and the above-mentioned partial read mode; compare each of the read-out first detection signals with threshold values, and generate binarized first detection signals respectively. 2 detection signals: detecting that the object is not in contact with the screen based on the second detection signals; detecting a position where the object is in contact with the screen based on the second detection signals; managing the normal readout mode Switching between the above-mentioned partial readout mode, in the above-mentioned normal readout mode, when it is detected that the above-mentioned object is not in contact with the above-mentioned screen for a predetermined time, the readout of the above-mentioned first detection signal is transferred to the above-mentioned Partial readout mode, and in a predetermined case, the readout of the first detection signal is changed from the partial readout mode to the normal readout mode.

另外,本发明的第3实施方式的传感方法使用m×n个传感器检测对象物与画面接触的位置,该m×n个传感器对应m(2以上的整数)条扫描线和n(2以上的整数)条读出线的交叉点被排列在上述画面上,分别生成具有与入射的光量对应大小的第1检测信号,其中,能够以通常读出模式和部分读出模式进行上述第1检测信号的读出,在通常读出模式下,从上述m×n个传感器的各个读出上述第1检测信号,在部分读出模式下,从与连续排列的M(2以上、上述m以下的整数)条上述扫描线和连续排列的N(2以上、上述n以下的整数)条上述读出线对应的、小于上述m×n个的M×N个上述传感器的各个中读出上述第1检测信号,并且以上述通常读出模式和上述部分读出模式的任意一方分别读出上述第1检测信号;把读出的上述各个第1检测信号与阈值比较,分别生成2值化的第2检测信号;根据上述各个第2检测信号,检知上述对象物接近了上述画面,并且上述对象物与上述画面的距离成为了一定距离以下的情况;管理上述通常读出模式与上述部分读出模式之间的切换,在上述部分读出模式下,在检知到上述对象物与上述画面的距离成为了一定距离以下的情况时,把上述第1检测信号的读出转到上述通常读出模式,并且在预定的情况下,把上述第1检测信号的读出从上述通常读出模式转到上述部分读出模式。In addition, the sensing method according to the third embodiment of the present invention uses m×n sensors to detect the position where the object touches the screen, and the m×n sensors correspond to m (an integer of 2 or more) scanning lines and n (2 or more) scanning lines. The intersections of the readout lines are arranged on the above-mentioned screen to generate first detection signals having a magnitude corresponding to the incident light amount, wherein the above-mentioned first detection can be performed in the normal readout mode and the partial readout mode For the readout of the signal, in the normal readout mode, the above-mentioned first detection signal is read out from each of the above-mentioned m×n sensors; Integer) of the above-mentioned scanning lines and N (above 2 and below the above-mentioned integer of n) corresponding to the above-mentioned read-out lines arranged continuously, and each of the above-mentioned M×N above-mentioned sensors that are less than the above-mentioned m×n read out the above-mentioned first detect signals, and read out the above-mentioned first detection signals in any one of the above-mentioned normal readout mode and the above-mentioned partial readout mode; compare the read-out first detection signals with threshold values, and generate binarized second detection signal; based on each of the second detection signals, it is detected that the object is close to the screen, and the distance between the object and the screen is less than a certain distance; the normal reading mode and the partial reading mode are managed In the partial readout mode, when it is detected that the distance between the object and the screen has become less than a certain distance, the readout of the first detection signal is switched to the normal readout mode. , and in a predetermined case, the readout of the first detection signal is switched from the normal readout mode to the partial readout mode.

根据以上的传感方法也能够获得与第3实施方式的传感装置相同的效果。The same effect as that of the sensor device of the third embodiment can be obtained also by the above sensing method.

另外,为了达到上述的目的,本发明的第4实施方式的传感装置,用于检测对象物与画面接触的位置,其中具有:多个传感器,其对应多条扫描线和多条读出线的交叉点,排列在上述画面上,分别生成具有与入射的光量对应大小的第1检测信号;选择单元,其能够以通常模式和间隔剔除模式进行动作,在通常模式下,顺序选择上述多条扫描线的各个,在间隔剔除模式下,以每K(2以上的整数)条选择1条的比例,顺序选择上述多条扫描线;读出单元,其通过上述多条读出线从与上述选择单元所选择的上述扫描线对应的上述传感器中分别读出上述第1检测信号;2值化单元,其把由上述读出单元读出的上述各个第1检测信号与阈值比较,分别生成2值化的第2检测信号;检知单元,其根据上述各个第2检测信号,检知上述对象物与上述画面非接触的情况;检测单元,其根据上述各个第2检测信号,检测上述对象物与上述画面接触的位置;和控制单元,其管理上述通常模式与上述间隔剔除模式之间的切换,在上述通常模式下,在上述检知单元连续预定时间检知到是非接触的情况时,控制上述选择单元转到上述间隔剔除模式,并且在预定的情况下,控制上述选择单元从上述间隔剔除模式转到上述通常模式。In addition, in order to achieve the above object, the sensor device according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention is used to detect the position where an object touches the screen, and includes: a plurality of sensors corresponding to a plurality of scanning lines and a plurality of readout lines The intersection points are arranged on the above-mentioned screen to generate the first detection signal with a size corresponding to the incident light amount; the selection unit can operate in the normal mode and the thinning mode, and in the normal mode, sequentially select the above-mentioned multiple Each of the scanning lines, in the thinning mode, selects one for every K (an integer greater than 2), and sequentially selects the above-mentioned multiple scanning lines; the readout unit, which uses the above-mentioned multiple readout lines from the above-mentioned The above-mentioned first detection signals corresponding to the above-mentioned scanning lines selected by the selection unit are respectively read out; A valued second detection signal; a detection unit that detects that the object is not in contact with the screen based on each of the second detection signals; a detection unit that detects the object based on each of the second detection signals a position in contact with the above-mentioned screen; and a control unit that manages switching between the above-mentioned normal mode and the above-mentioned thinning mode. The selection unit switches to the thinning mode, and controls the selection unit to switch from the thinning mode to the normal mode in a predetermined situation.

根据此结构,在连续预定时间检知到对象物与画面非接触的情况时,把读出单元的动作模式从通常模式转到间隔剔除模式。以每K条选择1条的比例顺序选择扫描线。由此,在对象物连续预定时间以上与画面非接触的情况下,与非如此的情况(有接触输入的情况、和虽然持续无接触输入的状态,但未达到预定时间的情况)相比,可将读出第1检测信号的传感器的个数减少到1/K。因此可减少第1检测信号的读出和2值化信号的生成所需要的处理负荷,从而可相应地减少电力消耗。According to this configuration, when it is detected that the object is not in contact with the screen continuously for a predetermined time, the operation mode of the reading unit is changed from the normal mode to the thinning mode. Scanlines are selected sequentially at a ratio of 1 for every K. Thus, when the object is not in contact with the screen for a predetermined time or more, compared with the non-existing case (the case where there is a touch input, and the case where the non-contact input is continued but the predetermined time has not been reached), the The number of sensors that read out the first detection signal can be reduced to 1/K. Therefore, the processing load required for reading out the first detection signal and generating the binarized signal can be reduced, thereby reducing power consumption accordingly.

另外,所谓“被排列在画面上”,例如不仅包括把具备了多个传感器的触摸面板粘贴在画面上的情况,而且包括如后述的实施方式所记载的那样把多个传感器内置于显示面板中的情况。另外,所谓“对象物”是指手指或手写笔。另外,所谓“预定的情况”,如果是能够检知对象物接近了画面,并且对象物与画面的距离成为了一定距离以下的情况的结构,则是在间隔剔除模式下检知到对象物与画面的距离成为了一定距离以下的情况。另外,如果是能够检知对象物与画面接触的情况的结构,则是在间隔剔除模式下检知到对象物与画面接触的情况。In addition, "arranged on the screen" includes, for example, not only the case where a touch panel equipped with a plurality of sensors is pasted on the screen, but also the case where a plurality of sensors are built into a display panel as described in the embodiments described later. in the situation. In addition, the "object" refers to a finger or a stylus. In addition, the so-called "predetermined case", if it is a structure that can detect that the object approaches the screen, and the distance between the object and the screen becomes less than a certain distance, it is detected in the thinning mode that the object and the screen are close together. The screen distance may be less than a certain distance. In addition, if it is configured to be able to detect that the object is in contact with the screen, it is detected that the object is in contact with the screen in the thinning mode.

另外,本发明的第4实施方式的传感装置,用于检测对象物与画面接触的位置,其中具有:多个传感器,其对应多条扫描线和多条读出线的交叉点排列在上述画面上,分别生成具有与入射的光量对应大小的第1检测信号;选择单元,其能够以通常模式和间隔剔除模式进行动作,在通常模式下,顺序选择上述多条扫描线的各个,在间隔剔除模式下,以每K(2以上的整数)条选择1条的比例顺序选择上述多条扫描线;读出单元,其从与上述选择单元所选择的上述扫描线所对应的上述传感器中,通过上述多条读出线,分别读出上述第1检测信号;2值化单元,其把由上述读出单元读出的上述各个第1检测信号与阈值比较,分别生成2值化的第2检测信号;检知单元,其根据上述各个第2检测信号,检知上述对象物接近了上述画面,并且上述对象物与上述画面的距离成为了一定距离以下的情况;检测单元,其检测上述对象物与上述画面接触的位置;和控制单元,其管理上述通常模式与上述间隔剔除模式之间的切换,在上述间隔剔除模式下,在上述检知单元检知到成为了一定距离以下的情况时,控制上述选择单元转到上述通常模式,并且在预定的情况下,控制上述选择单元从上述通常模式转到上述间隔剔除模式。In addition, the sensor device according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention is used to detect the position where the object touches the screen, and has: a plurality of sensors, the intersections of which correspond to a plurality of scanning lines and a plurality of readout lines are arranged at the above-mentioned On the screen, respectively generate the first detection signal with a magnitude corresponding to the amount of light incident; the selection unit can operate in a normal mode and a thinning mode, and in the normal mode, sequentially selects each of the above-mentioned plurality of scanning lines at intervals In the elimination mode, the above-mentioned multiple scanning lines are sequentially selected at a ratio of selecting one for every K (an integer greater than 2); the readout unit, from the above-mentioned sensor corresponding to the above-mentioned scanning line selected by the above-mentioned selection unit, Through the above-mentioned plurality of readout lines, the above-mentioned first detection signals are respectively read out; the binarization unit compares the above-mentioned first detection signals read out by the above-mentioned readout unit with threshold values, and generates binarized second detection signals respectively. A detection signal; a detection unit that detects that the object approaches the screen based on each of the second detection signals, and that the distance between the object and the screen becomes less than a certain distance; a detection unit that detects the object A position where an object touches the screen; and a control unit that manages switching between the normal mode and the thinning mode, and in the thinning mode, when the detection unit detects that the distance is below a certain distance , controlling the selection unit to switch to the normal mode, and in a predetermined situation, controlling the selection unit to switch from the normal mode to the thinning mode.

根据此结构,在检知到对象物与画面的距离成为了一定距离以下的情况时,把选择单元的动作模式从间隔剔除模式转到通常模式,因此,对象物与画面的距离成为一定距离以下之前,选择单元以间隔剔除模式动作,以每K条选择1条的比例顺序选择扫描线。而在对象物与画面的距离成为了一定距离以下时,选择单元以通常模式动作,逐一顺序选择全部的扫描线。由此,在对象物与画面的距离成为一定距离以下之前,可将读出第1检测信号的传感器的个数减少到1/K。因此,可减少第1检测信号的读出和2值化信号的生成所需要的处理负荷,从而可相应地减少电力消耗。According to this configuration, when it is detected that the distance between the object and the screen has become less than a certain distance, the operation mode of the selection unit is changed from the thinning mode to the normal mode, so that the distance between the object and the screen becomes less than a certain distance. Previously, the selection unit operates in the thinning mode, and sequentially selects one scan line for every K lines. On the other hand, when the distance between the object and the screen is equal to or less than a certain distance, the selection unit operates in the normal mode to sequentially select all the scanning lines one by one. Accordingly, the number of sensors that read out the first detection signal can be reduced to 1/K until the distance between the object and the screen becomes less than a certain distance. Therefore, the processing load required for reading out the first detection signal and generating the binarized signal can be reduced, thereby reducing power consumption accordingly.

不仅如此,由于在对象物与画面的距离成为了一定距离以下时,从被排列在画面上的全部传感器读出第1检测信号,所以可高精度进行接触判定和接触位置的检测。特别是通过把从间隔剔除模式向通常模式切换的时机,不设定在检知到了对象物与画面接触的情况时,而设定在检知到对象物与画面的距离成为了一定距离以下的情况时,能够在对象物与画面实际接触之前,提高关于接触判定和接触位置的检测的精度。Furthermore, when the distance between the object and the screen is less than a certain distance, the first detection signals are read from all the sensors arranged on the screen, so contact determination and contact position detection can be performed with high precision. In particular, by setting the timing of switching from the thinning mode to the normal mode, not when it is detected that the object is in contact with the screen, but when it is detected that the distance between the object and the screen has become less than a certain distance In some cases, before the object actually comes into contact with the screen, it is possible to improve the accuracy of contact determination and detection of the contact position.

另外,所谓“预定的情况”,如果是能够检知对象物与画面非接触的情况的结构,则是在通常模式下连续预定时间检知到对象物与画面非接触的情况,而如果是能够判定对象物是否接近了画面,并且对象物与画面的距离成为了一定距离以下的情况的结构,则是在通常模式下连续预定时间得到了对象物与画面的距离未成为一定距离以下的判断结果的情况。In addition, the so-called "predetermined situation", if it is a structure that can detect the non-contact of the object and the screen, it is the situation that the non-contact of the object and the screen is detected continuously for a predetermined time in the normal mode, and if it is possible The structure of judging whether the object is close to the screen, and the distance between the object and the screen has become less than a certain distance is to obtain the judgment result that the distance between the object and the screen is not less than a certain distance in the normal mode for a predetermined time. Case.

本发明的第4实施方式的传感装置,用于检测对象物与画面接触的位置,其中具有:多个传感器,其对应多条扫描线和多条读出线的交叉点排列在上述画面上,分别生成具有与入射的光量对应大小的第1检测信号;选择单元,其能够以通常模式和间隔剔除模式进行动作,在通常模式下,顺序选择上述多条扫描线的各个,在间隔剔除模式下,以每K(2以上的整数)条选择1条的比例,顺序选择上述多条扫描线;读出单元,其从与上述选择单元所选择的上述扫描线对应的上述传感器中通过上述多条读出线,分别读出上述第1检测信号;2值化单元,其能够使用为了判定上述对象物是否接近了上述画面,并且上述对象物与上述画面的距离成为一定距离以下而设定的第1阈值、和为了判定上述对象物是否与上述画面非接触而设定的第2阈值,把由上述读出单元读出的上述各个第1检测信号与上述第1阈值和上述第2阈值的任意一方比较,分别生成2值化的第2检测信号;检知单元,其在上述2值化单元使用上述第1阈值生成了上述各个第2检测信号的情况下,根据该各个第2检测信号,检知上述对象物接近了上述画面,并且上述对象物与上述画面的距离成为了一定距离以下的情况,在上述2值化单元使用上述第2阈值生成了上述各个第2检测信号的情况下,根据该各个第2检测信号,检知上述对象物与上述画面非接触的情况;检测单元,其在上述2值化单元使用上述第2阈值生成了上述各个第2检测信号的情况下,根据该各个第2检测信号,检测上述对象物与上述画面接触的位置;和控制单元,其管理上述通常模式与上述间隔剔除模式之间的切换,并且管理上述第1阈值与上述第2阈值之间的变更,在上述间隔剔除模式下,在上述检知单元检知到成为了一定距离以下的情况时,控制上述选择单元转到上述通常模式,并且控制上述2值化单元使用上述第2阈值生成上述各个第2检测信号,在上述通常模式下,在上述检知单元连续预定时间检知到非接触的情况时,控制上述选择单元转到上述间隔剔除模式,并且控制上述2值化单元使用上述第1阈值生成上述各个第2检测信号。A sensor device according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention is used to detect a position where an object touches a screen, wherein a plurality of sensors are arranged on the screen at intersections corresponding to a plurality of scanning lines and a plurality of readout lines , respectively generate the first detection signal with a magnitude corresponding to the amount of incident light; the selection unit can operate in a normal mode and a thinning-out mode, and in the normal mode, sequentially select each of the above-mentioned plurality of scanning lines, and in the thinning-out mode Next, sequentially select the above-mentioned multiple scanning lines at a ratio of selecting one for every K (an integer greater than 2); the readout unit passes the above-mentioned multiple scanning lines from the above-mentioned sensors corresponding to the above-mentioned scanning lines selected by the above-mentioned selection unit. A readout line for reading out the above-mentioned first detection signal respectively; a binarization unit, which can be used to determine whether the above-mentioned object is close to the above-mentioned screen, and the distance between the above-mentioned object and the above-mentioned screen is below a certain distance. The first threshold and the second threshold set in order to determine whether the object is not in contact with the screen, the first detection signal read by the readout unit and the first threshold and the second threshold Comparing either one, respectively generating a binarized second detection signal; a detecting unit, when the above-mentioned binarization unit generates the above-mentioned respective second detection signals using the above-mentioned first threshold value, based on the respective second detection signals When it is detected that the object approaches the screen and the distance between the object and the screen is less than a certain distance, when the binarization unit generates the respective second detection signals using the second threshold , based on the respective second detection signals, detect that the object is not in contact with the screen; the detection unit, when the binarization unit generates the respective second detection signals using the second threshold value, according to Each of the second detection signals detects a position where the object touches the screen; and a control unit that manages switching between the normal mode and the thinning mode, and manages between the first threshold and the second threshold. In the thinning-out mode, when the detection unit detects that the distance is below a certain distance, the selection unit is controlled to switch to the normal mode, and the binarization unit is controlled to use the second threshold to generate For each of the above-mentioned second detection signals, in the above-mentioned normal mode, when the above-mentioned detection unit detects non-contact for a predetermined time continuously, the above-mentioned selection unit is controlled to switch to the above-mentioned thinning mode, and the above-mentioned binarization unit is controlled to use the above-mentioned The first threshold generates each of the above-mentioned second detection signals.

根据此结构,在连续预定时间检知到对象物与画面非接触的情况时,把选择单元的动作模式从通常模式转到间隔剔除模式,从以每K条选择1条的比例顺序选择扫描线。而在检知到对象物与画面的距离成为了一定距离以下的情况时,把选择单元的动作模式从间隔剔除模式转到通常模式,逐一顺序选择全部的扫描线。因此,在从连续预定时间检知到对象物与画面非接触的情况到之后检知到对象物与画面的距离成为了一定距离以下的情况的期间,可将读出第1检测信号的传感器的个数减少到1/K。因此可减少第1检测信号的读出和2值化信号的生成所需要的处理负荷,从而可相应地减少电力消耗。According to this structure, when the non-contact between the object and the screen is detected continuously for a predetermined time, the operation mode of the selection unit is changed from the normal mode to the thinning mode, and the scanning lines are sequentially selected at a ratio of 1 for every K lines. . On the other hand, when it is detected that the distance between the object and the screen has become less than a certain distance, the operation mode of the selection unit is changed from the thinning mode to the normal mode, and all the scanning lines are sequentially selected one by one. Therefore, during the period from when it is detected that the object is not in contact with the screen for a predetermined period of time to when it is detected that the distance between the object and the screen has become less than a certain distance, the sensor that reads the first detection signal can be set to The number is reduced to 1/K. Therefore, the processing load required for reading out the first detection signal and generating the binarized signal can be reduced, thereby reducing power consumption accordingly.

不仅如此,在从检知到对象物与画面的距离成为了一定距离以下的情况到之后的连续预定时间检知到对象物与画面非接触情况的期间,从被排列在画面上的全部传感器读出第1检测信号,所以可高精度进行接触判定和接触位置的检测。特别是通过把从间隔剔除模式向通常模式切换的时机,不设定在检知到了对象物与画面接触的情况时,而设定在检知到对象物与画面的距离成为了一定距离以下的情况时,能够在对象物与画面实际接触之前,提高关于接触判定和接触位置的检测的精度。Furthermore, during the period from when the distance between the object and the screen is detected to be less than a certain distance to when the non-contact between the object and the screen is detected for a predetermined continuous time thereafter, all the sensors arranged on the screen read Since the first detection signal is output, contact judgment and contact position detection can be performed with high precision. In particular, by setting the timing of switching from the thinning mode to the normal mode, not when it is detected that the object is in contact with the screen, but when it is detected that the distance between the object and the screen has become less than a certain distance In some cases, before the object actually comes into contact with the screen, it is possible to improve the accuracy of contact determination and detection of the contact position.

另外,本发明的第4实施方式的传感方法,使用多个传感器检测对象物与画面接触的位置,该多个传感器对应多条扫描线和多条读出线的交叉点排列在上述画面上,分别生成具有与入射的光量对应大小的第1检测信号,其中,能够以通常模式和间隔剔除模式进行上述扫描线的选择,在通常模式下,顺序选择上述多条扫描线的各个,在间隔剔除模式下,以每K(2以上的整数)条选择1条的比例,顺序选择上述多条扫描线;以上述通常模式和上述间隔剔除模式中的任意一方选择上述扫描线,从与所选择的上述扫描线对应的上述传感器,通过上述多条读出线,分别读出上述第1检测信号;把读出的上述各个第1检测信号与阈值比较,分别生成2值化的第2检测信号;根据上述各个第2检测信号,检知上述对象物与上述画面非接触的情况;根据上述各个第2检测信号,检测上述对象物与上述画面接触的位置;管理上述通常模式与上述间隔剔除模式之间的切换,在上述通常模式下,在连续预定时间检知到上述对象物与上述画面非接触的情况时,把上述扫描线的选择转到上述间隔剔除模式,并且在预定的情况下,把上述扫描线的选择从上述间隔剔除模式转到上述通常模式。In addition, in the sensing method according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, a plurality of sensors are used to detect the contact position of the object on the screen, and the plurality of sensors are arranged on the screen corresponding to intersection points of a plurality of scanning lines and a plurality of readout lines. , respectively generate the first detection signal with a magnitude corresponding to the amount of incident light, wherein the selection of the above-mentioned scanning lines can be carried out in the normal mode and the thinning-out mode, and in the normal mode, each of the above-mentioned plurality of scanning lines is sequentially selected, at intervals In the elimination mode, the above-mentioned multiple scanning lines are selected sequentially at a ratio of selecting one for every K (integer above 2); The sensor corresponding to the above-mentioned scanning line reads out the above-mentioned first detection signal respectively through the above-mentioned plurality of readout lines; compares each of the above-mentioned first detection signals read out with a threshold value, and generates a binarized second detection signal respectively ; Detecting that the object is not in contact with the screen based on each of the second detection signals; detecting a position where the object is in contact with the screen based on the second detection signals; managing the normal mode and the thinning mode In the above-mentioned normal mode, when it is detected that the above-mentioned object is not in contact with the above-mentioned screen for a predetermined time, the selection of the above-mentioned scanning lines is transferred to the above-mentioned thinning mode, and in the predetermined case, The selection of the above-mentioned scanning lines is changed from the above-mentioned thinning mode to the above-mentioned normal mode.

另外,本发明的第4实施方式的传感方法,使用多个传感器检测对象物与画面接触的位置,该多个传感器对应多条扫描线和多条读出线的交叉点排列在上述画面上,分别生成具有与入射的光量对应大小的第1检测信号,其中,能够以通常模式和间隔剔除模式进行上述扫描线的选择,在通常模式下,顺序选择上述多条扫描线的各个,在间隔剔除模式下,以每K(2以上的整数)条选择1条的比例,顺序选择上述多条扫描线;以上述通常模式和上述间隔剔除模式中的任意一方选择上述扫描线,从与所选择的上述扫描线所对应的上述传感器,通过上述多条读出线,分别读出上述第1检测信号;把读出的上述各个第1检测信号与阈值比较,分别生成2值化的第2检测信号;根据上述各个第2检测信号,检知上述对象物接近了上述画面,并且上述对象物与上述画面的距离成为了一定距离以下的情况;管理上述通常模式与上述间隔剔除模式之间的切换,在上述间隔剔除模式下,在检知到上述对象物与上述画面的距离成为了一定距离以下的情况时,把上述扫描线的选择转到上述通常模式,并且在预定的情况下,把上述扫描线的选择从上述通常模式转到上述间隔剔除模式。In addition, in the sensing method according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, a plurality of sensors are used to detect the contact position of the object on the screen, and the plurality of sensors are arranged on the screen corresponding to intersection points of a plurality of scanning lines and a plurality of readout lines. , respectively generate the first detection signal with a magnitude corresponding to the amount of incident light, wherein the selection of the above-mentioned scanning lines can be carried out in the normal mode and the thinning-out mode, and in the normal mode, each of the above-mentioned plurality of scanning lines is sequentially selected, at intervals In the elimination mode, the above-mentioned multiple scanning lines are selected sequentially at a ratio of selecting one for every K (integer above 2); The sensors corresponding to the above-mentioned scanning lines read out the above-mentioned first detection signals respectively through the above-mentioned plurality of readout lines; signal; based on the respective second detection signals, it is detected that the object approaches the screen, and the distance between the object and the screen is equal to or less than a certain distance; switching between the normal mode and the thinning mode is managed , in the above-mentioned thinning mode, when it is detected that the distance between the above-mentioned object and the above-mentioned screen has become less than a certain distance, the selection of the above-mentioned scanning line is transferred to the above-mentioned normal mode, and in a predetermined case, the above-mentioned The selection of scanning lines is changed from the above-mentioned normal mode to the above-mentioned thinning mode.

根据以上的传感方法,也可得到与第4实施方式的传感装置相同的效果。Also according to the above sensing method, the same effect as that of the sensing device of the fourth embodiment can be obtained.

另外,在第2~第4实施方式的传感装置中,也可以构成为,上述检知单元对全部上述第2检测信号中的满足由上述阈值限定的条件的上述第2检测信号的个数进行计数,根据计数结果,检知上述对象物与上述画面非接触的情况。例如,也可以如果计数结果小于预定值,则检测为对象物与画面非接触。另外,在计数结果不是由上限值和下限值所限定的预定范围内的值的情况下,也可以检知为对象物与画面非接触。后者的情况下,可减少误判定。另外,“满足由上述阈值所限定的条件的上述第2检测信号”相当于例如与信号电平小于阈值的第1检测信号对应的第2检测信号、或与信号电平大于等于阈值的第1检测信号对应的第2检测信号。In addition, in the sensor devices according to the second to fourth embodiments, the detection means may be configured such that the number of the second detection signals satisfying the condition defined by the threshold value among all the second detection signals Counting is performed, and based on the counting result, it is detected that the object is not in contact with the screen. For example, if the count result is smaller than a predetermined value, it may be detected that the object is not in contact with the screen. In addition, when the count result is not a value within a predetermined range defined by the upper limit value and the lower limit value, it may be detected that the object is not in contact with the screen. In the latter case, misjudgment can be reduced. In addition, "the above-mentioned second detection signal satisfying the condition defined by the above-mentioned threshold value" corresponds to, for example, the second detection signal corresponding to the first detection signal whose signal level is smaller than the threshold value, or the first detection signal corresponding to the first detection signal whose signal level is greater than or equal to the threshold value. The second detection signal corresponding to the detection signal.

另外,在第2~第4实施方式的传感装置中,也可以构成为,上述检知单元对全部上述第2检测信号中的满足由上述阈值限定的条件的上述第2检测信号的个数进行计数,根据计数结果,检知上述对象物与上述画面的距离成为了一定距离以下的情况。例如,也可以如果计数结果大于等于1,则检测为对象物与画面的距离成为了一定距离以下。另外,也可以在计数结果在预定值以上的情况、和计数结果是由上限值和下限值所限定的预定范围内的值的情况下,检测为对象物与画面的距离成为了一定距离以下。后者的情况下,可减少误判定。另外,“满足由上述阈值所限定的条件的上述第2检测信号”相当于例如与信号电平小于阈值的第1检测信号对应的第2检测信号、或与信号电平大于等于阈值的第1检测信号对应的第2检测信号。In addition, in the sensor devices according to the second to fourth embodiments, the detection means may be configured such that the number of the second detection signals satisfying the condition defined by the threshold value among all the second detection signals Counting is performed, and based on the counting result, it is detected that the distance between the object and the screen is equal to or less than a certain distance. For example, if the count result is 1 or more, it may be detected that the distance between the object and the screen is equal to or less than a certain distance. Alternatively, it may be detected that the distance between the object and the screen has reached a certain distance when the count result is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, or when the count result is within a predetermined range defined by an upper limit value and a lower limit value. the following. In the latter case, misjudgment can be reduced. In addition, "the above-mentioned second detection signal satisfying the condition defined by the above-mentioned threshold value" corresponds to, for example, the second detection signal corresponding to the first detection signal whose signal level is smaller than the threshold value, or the first detection signal corresponding to the first detection signal whose signal level is greater than or equal to the threshold value. The second detection signal corresponding to the detection signal.

另外,本发明的显示装置具有:上述的任意传感装置;和显示图像的显示部。该显示装置包括使用了例如液晶元件或OLED(OrganicLight Emitting Diode:有机发光二极管)元件的显示装置。另外显示装置也可以构成为,具有生成表示由上述检测单元检测出的位置的轨迹的图像,并显示在上述显示部中的显示控制单元。In addition, a display device according to the present invention includes: any of the sensor devices described above; and a display unit that displays an image. The display device includes a display device using, for example, a liquid crystal element or an OLED (Organic Light Emitting Diode: Organic Light Emitting Diode) element. In addition, the display device may be configured to include a display control unit that generates an image representing the locus of the position detected by the detection unit and displays it on the display unit.

另外,本发明的电子设备具有上述的显示装置。该电子设备包括:例如,个人计算机、移动电话机、以及移动信息终端等。In addition, an electronic device of the present invention includes the above-mentioned display device. The electronic equipment includes, for example, a personal computer, a mobile phone, and a mobile information terminal.

附图说明 Description of drawings

图1是表示实施方式A1的液晶显示装置的结构的方框图。FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a liquid crystal display device according to Embodiment A1.

图2是用于说明1个画面数量的2值化信号的图。FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining binarized signals corresponding to one screen.

图3(a)和图3(b)是表示实施方式A1的模式切换处理1、2的流程的流程图。3( a ) and FIG. 3( b ) are flowcharts showing the flow of mode switching processing 1 and 2 in Embodiment A1.

图4(a)和图4(b)是表示实施方式A1的模式切换处理1、2的概要的流程图。4( a ) and FIG. 4( b ) are flowcharts showing the outline of mode switching processes 1 and 2 in Embodiment A1.

图5(a)和图5(b)是用于说明接触判定用阈值T1、T2和接近判定用阈值S1、S2的图。5( a ) and FIG. 5( b ) are diagrams for explaining the thresholds T1 and T2 for contact determination and the thresholds S1 and S2 for approach determination.

图6(a)和图6(b)是表示实施方式B1的模式切换处理3、4的流程的流程图。6( a ) and FIG. 6( b ) are flowcharts showing the flow of mode switching processes 3 and 4 in Embodiment B1.

图7(a)和图7(b)是表示实施方式B1的模式切换处理3、4的概要的流程图。7( a ) and FIG. 7( b ) are flowcharts showing the outline of mode switching processes 3 and 4 in Embodiment B1.

图8和图9是用于说明实施方式B2的通常模式、低耗电模式、以及实施方式C1的通常读出模式和部分读出模式的图。8 and 9 are diagrams for explaining the normal mode and the low power consumption mode of Embodiment B2, and the normal read mode and partial read mode of Embodiment C1.

图10(a)和图10(b)是表示实施方式B2的模式切换处理5、6的流程的流程图。FIG. 10( a ) and FIG. 10( b ) are flowcharts showing the flow of mode switching processes 5 and 6 in Embodiment B2.

图11是用于说明实施方式B3的通常模式、低耗电模式、以及实施方式D1的通常模式和间隔剔除模式的图。11 is a diagram for explaining the normal mode and the low power consumption mode of Embodiment B3, and the normal mode and thinning mode of Embodiment D1.

图12(a)和图12(b)是表示实施方式B3的模式切换处理7、8的流程的流程图。FIG. 12( a ) and FIG. 12( b ) are flowcharts showing the flow of mode switching processes 7 and 8 in Embodiment B3.

图13(a)和图13(b)是表示实施方式C1的模式切换处理9、10的流程的流程图。FIG. 13( a ) and FIG. 13( b ) are flowcharts showing the flow of mode switching processes 9 and 10 in Embodiment C1.

图14(a)和图14(b)是表示实施方式D1的模式切换处理11、12的流程的流程图。Fig. 14(a) and Fig. 14(b) are flowcharts showing the flow of mode switching processing 11, 12 in Embodiment D1.

图15~图17是表示本发明的电子设备的具体例子的立体图。15 to 17 are perspective views showing specific examples of the electronic device of the present invention.

具体实施方式 Detailed ways

下面,参照附图,对本发明的多个实施方式进行说明。Hereinafter, several embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

另外,在以下的各个实施方式中,说明把本发明的传感装置应用在透射型液晶显示装置中的情况。In addition, in each of the following embodiments, a case where the sensor device of the present invention is applied to a transmissive liquid crystal display device will be described.

<实施方式A1><Embodiment A1>

图1是表示实施方式A1的液晶显示装置1的结构的方框图。如该图所示,液晶显示装置1具有液晶屏AA、控制电路300、图像处理电路400、调光电路700、和背光灯800。液晶屏AA的结构是把形成了作为开关元件的薄膜晶体管(Thin Film Transistor)的元件基板与对置基板相互将电极形成面对置,并保持一定的间隙贴合,在该间隙中夹持液晶。另外,液晶屏AA在该元件基板上具有图像显示区域A、扫描线驱动电路100、数据线驱动电路200、传感器用扫描电路500、和受光信号处理电路600。在图像显示区域A中,阵列状形成m(行)×n(列)个像素电路P1,各个像素电路P1与扫描线驱动电路100和数据线驱动电路200电连接。FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a liquid crystal display device 1 according to Embodiment A1. As shown in the figure, the liquid crystal display device 1 has a liquid crystal panel AA, a control circuit 300 , an image processing circuit 400 , a dimming circuit 700 , and a backlight 800 . The structure of the liquid crystal panel AA is to form the component substrate of the thin film transistor (Thin Film Transistor) as a switching element and the opposite substrate to face each other, and keep a certain gap between them, and hold the liquid crystal in the gap . In addition, the liquid crystal panel AA has an image display area A, a scanning line driving circuit 100 , a data line driving circuit 200 , a sensor scanning circuit 500 , and a light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 on the element substrate. In the image display area A, m (row)×n (column) pixel circuits P1 are formed in an array, and each pixel circuit P1 is electrically connected to the scanning line driving circuit 100 and the data line driving circuit 200 .

控制电路300向扫描线驱动电路100和数据线驱动电路200供给时钟信号和各种控制信号。图像处理电路400对输入图像数据Din实施图像处理,生成输出图像数据Dout,并将其输出到数据线驱动电路200。扫描线驱动电路100以行单位顺序选择阵列状排列的像素电路P1。另外,数据线驱动电路200向由扫描线驱动电路100顺序选择的1行数量的(n个)像素电路P1的各个,供给数据信号。在液晶屏AA的背面上设有背光灯800,调光电路700在控制电路300的控制下,使背光灯800以与环境光的照度(液晶显示装置1周围的亮度)对应的亮度发光。来自背光灯800的光通过液晶屏AA(图像显示区域A)射出。在图像显示区域A中由于多个像素电路P1被阵列状排列,所以可根据从数据线驱动电路200供给的数据信号的电压电平按照每个像素电路P1控制透射率由此,能够实现基于光调制的灰度显示,从而能够把图像显示在图像显示区域A中。The control circuit 300 supplies clock signals and various control signals to the scanning line driving circuit 100 and the data line driving circuit 200 . The image processing circuit 400 performs image processing on the input image data Din, generates output image data Dout, and outputs it to the data line driving circuit 200 . The scanning line driving circuit 100 sequentially selects the pixel circuits P1 arranged in an array in units of rows. In addition, the data line driving circuit 200 supplies a data signal to each of the pixel circuits P1 for one row (n) sequentially selected by the scanning line driving circuit 100 . A backlight 800 is provided on the back of the liquid crystal panel AA, and the dimming circuit 700 under the control of the control circuit 300 makes the backlight 800 emit light at a brightness corresponding to the illuminance of ambient light (luminance around the liquid crystal display device 1 ). Light from the backlight 800 is emitted through the liquid crystal panel AA (image display area A). In the image display area A, since a plurality of pixel circuits P1 are arranged in an array, the transmittance can be controlled for each pixel circuit P1 according to the voltage level of the data signal supplied from the data line driving circuit 200. Modulated gray scale display, so that the image can be displayed in the image display area A.

另外,液晶显示装置1具有接触输入功能,在图像显示区域A中,按每个像素电路P1设有光检测电路O1。如果更具体地说,则是在图像显示区域A中,形成向X方向延伸的m条扫描线、和向Y方向延伸的n条读出线,对应扫描线与读出线的交叉点,排列m(行)×n(列)个光检测电路O1。各个光检测电路O1具有光传感器,输出具有对应入射光的光量的信号电平的受光信号。控制电路300向传感器用扫描电路500供给时钟信号和扫描用控制信号。另外,控制电路300向受光信号处理电路600供给时钟信号和受光信号处理用控制信号。传感器用扫描电路500使用扫描信号Y1、Y2、Y3、...、Ym顺序选择阵列状排列的光检测电路O1。受光信号处理电路600从由传感器用扫描电路500顺序选择的1行的(n个)光检测电路O1中,通过n条读出线,读出受光信号X1、X2、X3、......、Xn,并把其供给给控制电路300。In addition, the liquid crystal display device 1 has a touch input function, and in the image display area A, a photodetection circuit O1 is provided for each pixel circuit P1. More specifically, in the image display area A, m scanning lines extending in the X direction and n readout lines extending in the Y direction are formed, arranged corresponding to the intersections of the scanning lines and the readout lines There are m (rows)×n (columns) photodetection circuits O1. Each photodetection circuit O1 has a photosensor, and outputs a light reception signal having a signal level corresponding to the light quantity of incident light. The control circuit 300 supplies a clock signal and a scanning control signal to the sensor scanning circuit 500 . In addition, the control circuit 300 supplies a clock signal and a control signal for light-receiving signal processing to the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 . The sensor scanning circuit 500 sequentially selects the photodetection circuits O1 arranged in an array using the scanning signals Y1, Y2, Y3, . . . , Ym. The light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 reads out the light-receiving signals X1, X2, X3, . . . ., Xn, and supply it to the control circuit 300.

另外,例如在液晶显示装置1处于白天的自然光下的情况等,液晶显示装置1的周围明亮的情况下,在图像显示区域A(显示画面)中,手指或手写笔接触的部分形成阴影,该部分的受光量比其他部分的受光量低。即,当手指或手写笔在某种程度上接近显示画面时,在显示画面上形成淡影,随着手指或手写笔进一步接近显示画面,阴影逐渐变浓。此时,在显示画面中处于形成了阴影的部分的光检测电路O1(光传感器)的受光量,随着阴影的变浓而逐渐降低。反之,在液晶显示装置1处于夜间黑暗的环境下的情况下等,液晶显示装置1的周围暗的情况下,由于来自背光灯800的光被手指或手写笔反射,所以在显示画面中,手指或手写笔接触的部分的受光量比其他部分的受光量增加。即,当手指或手写笔在某种程度接近显示画面时,来自背光灯800的光被手指或手写笔反射,在显示画面上形成反射光的照射部分。该部分的反射光的强度随着手指或手写笔进一步接近显示画面而逐渐增大。此时,在显示画面中处于被反射光照射的部分的光检测电路O1的受光量,由于随着手指或手写笔的接近,反射光越强,所以增加。Also, for example, when the liquid crystal display device 1 is exposed to natural light in daytime, and the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are bright, in the image display area A (display screen), the portion touched by the finger or the stylus is shaded, and the The amount of light received by some parts is lower than that of other parts. That is, when the finger or the stylus approaches the display screen to some extent, a light shadow is formed on the display screen, and as the finger or the stylus gets closer to the display screen, the shadow gradually becomes thicker. At this time, the amount of light received by the photodetection circuit O1 (light sensor) in the shadowed portion of the display screen gradually decreases as the shadow becomes darker. Conversely, when the liquid crystal display device 1 is in a dark environment at night, etc., when the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are dark, since the light from the backlight 800 is reflected by the finger or the stylus, the finger or the stylus will be displayed on the display screen. Or, the amount of light received by the portion touched by the stylus is greater than that of other portions. That is, when a finger or a stylus comes close to the display screen to some extent, the light from the backlight 800 is reflected by the finger or the stylus to form an illuminated portion of the reflected light on the display screen. The intensity of the reflected light in this part gradually increases as the finger or the stylus gets closer to the display screen. At this time, the amount of light received by the photodetection circuit O1 at the portion irradiated with reflected light on the display screen increases because the reflected light becomes stronger as the finger or stylus approaches.

因此,控制电路300根据从图像显示区域A中具有的m×n个光检测电路O1读出的1个画面数量的受光信号,可判定手指或手写笔是否接触了显示画面,即,有无接触。Therefore, the control circuit 300 can determine whether a finger or a stylus touches the display screen, that is, whether there is a touch or not, based on the light reception signals of one screen read out from the m×n photodetection circuits O1 included in the image display area A. .

具体是,控制电路300首先对于读出的1个画面数量的受光信号(m×n个),按每个受光信号将其信号电平与阈值比较,并转换成2值信号(2值化处理)。另外,在该2值化处理时使用的阈值用于判定受光信号的信号电平是否达到手指或手写笔接触到显示画面时的受光量的电平。例如,在显示画面上,通过对处于手指或手写笔实际接触的部分的光检测电路O1的受光量(受光信号的信号电平)取得多个取样数据,可根据取得的取样数据设定阈值。即,在上述的2值化处理中,控制电路300判定各个受光信号的信号电平是否达到手指或手写笔接触到显示画面时的受光量的电平,输出在达到时和未达到时具有不同的信号值的值化信号。Specifically, the control circuit 300 first compares the signal level of the light-receiving signal with a threshold value for each light-receiving signal read out for one screen (m×n), and converts it into a binary signal (binary processing ). In addition, the threshold value used in this binarization process is used to determine whether the signal level of the light-receiving signal has reached the level of the light-receiving amount when a finger or a stylus touches the display screen. For example, on the display screen, by acquiring a plurality of sampling data on the amount of light received by the photodetection circuit O1 (signal level of the light receiving signal) at the portion actually touched by a finger or a stylus, the threshold can be set based on the acquired sampling data. That is, in the above-mentioned binarization process, the control circuit 300 judges whether the signal level of each received light signal has reached the level of the received light amount when the finger or the stylus touches the display screen, and the output has a difference between when it reaches and when it does not. A valued signal with a signal value of .

另外,由于1个画面数量的受光信号有m×n个,所以与其对应地也生成m×n个2值化信号。另外,实际上,在液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况和暗的情况下需要使用不同的阈值。即,需要有在液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况下使用的阈值T1、和在液晶显示装置1周围暗的情况下使用的阈值T2。In addition, since there are m×n light-receiving signals corresponding to one screen, m×n binarized signals are also generated correspondingly. In addition, actually, it is necessary to use different thresholds when the surrounding of the liquid crystal display device 1 is bright and when it is dark. That is, it is necessary to have a threshold T1 used when the surrounding of the liquid crystal display device 1 is bright, and a threshold T2 used when the surrounding of the liquid crystal display device 1 is dark.

假设例如是液晶显示装置1周围亮,在显示画面上手指或手写笔所接触的部分形成阴影的情况。各个受光信号的信号电平取“0”(暗)~“100”(亮)范围内的值,把阈值T1设定为“10”。在这种情况下,控制电路300把信号电平小于“10”的受光信号转换成2值化信号“1”,把信号电平为“10”以上的受光信号转换成2值化信号“0”。其次,假设例如是液晶显示装置1周围暗,在显示画面上手指或手写笔所接触的部分由于反射光而变亮的情况。各个受光信号的信号电平与液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况同样取“0”(暗)~“100”(亮)范围内的值,把阈值T1设定为“65”。在这种情况下,控制电路300把信号电平为“65”以上的受光信号转换成2值化信号“1”,把信号电平小于“65”的受光信号转换成2值化信号“0”。Assume, for example, that the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are bright and shadows are formed on the display screen at the portion touched by a finger or a stylus. The signal level of each received light signal takes a value in the range of "0" (dark) to "100" (bright), and the threshold T1 is set to "10". In this case, the control circuit 300 converts the received light signal whose signal level is lower than "10" into a binarized signal "1", and converts the received light signal whose signal level is "10" or more into a binarized signal "0". ". Next, suppose, for example, that the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are dark, and the part touched by a finger or a stylus on the display screen becomes bright due to reflected light. The signal level of each received light signal takes a value in the range of "0" (dark) to "100" (bright) similarly to the case where the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are bright, and the threshold T1 is set to "65". In this case, the control circuit 300 converts the received light signal whose signal level is "65" or higher into a binarized signal "1", and converts the received light signal whose signal level is lower than "65" into a binarized signal "0". ".

图2是表示通过2值化处理得到的1个画面数量的2值化信号的图。在该图所示的例子中,在图像显示区域A中,对于排列位置(X、Y)为(2、2)、(2、3)、(3、2)、(3、3)的4个光检测电路O1,2值化信号的值成为“1”。如上述那样,2值化信号的值成为“1”的部分,如果是液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况,则是受光信号的信号电平小于阈值T1“10”的阴影部分,如果是液晶显示装置1周围暗的情况,则是受光信号的信号电平在阈值T2“65”以上的反射光强的部分。即,2值化信号的值成为“1”的部分是显示画面中手指或手写笔所接触的部分。因此,控制电路300在1个画面数量的2值化信号(m×n个)中包含信号值成为“1”的2值化信号的情况下,判定为有接触,在不包含信号值成为“1”的2值化信号的情况下,可判定为没有接触。另外,控制电路300在判定为有接触的情况下,把2值化信号的值成为“1”的光检测电路O1的排列位置(X、Y)作为手指或手写笔的接触位置检测出来。例如在图2所示的例子中,作为接触位置而检测出排列位置(2、2)、(2、3)、(3、2)、(3、3)。FIG. 2 is a diagram showing binarized signals corresponding to one screen obtained by binarization processing. In the example shown in the figure, in the image display area A, for the array positions (X, Y) of (2, 2), (2, 3), (3, 2), (3, 3) 4 In the photodetection circuit O1, the value of the binarized signal becomes "1". As described above, the portion where the value of the binarized signal becomes "1" is the shaded portion where the signal level of the received light signal is lower than the threshold value T1 "10" if the surrounding of the liquid crystal display device 1 is bright. When the surroundings of the device 1 are dark, the signal level of the received light signal is a part of the reflected light intensity equal to or higher than the threshold T2 "65". That is, the portion where the value of the binarized signal becomes “1” is the portion on the display screen that is touched by the finger or the stylus. Therefore, the control circuit 300 determines that there is contact when the binarized signals (m×n) of the number of binarized signals (m×n) for one screen include a signal value of "1", and determines that there is a contact if the binarized signal value of "1" is not included. In the case of a binary signal of 1", it can be determined that there is no contact. In addition, when the control circuit 300 determines that there is a touch, the array position (X, Y) of the photodetection circuit O1 whose value of the binarized signal becomes "1" is detected as a touch position of a finger or a stylus. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 2 , arrangement positions (2, 2), (2, 3), (3, 2), and (3, 3) are detected as contact positions.

另外,有时会发生例如在显示画面上因附着灰尘等而形成小的阴影的情况。而且也会发生未意识到接触输入而用手掌整体接触了显示画面的情况。为了防止把这些情况误判定为手指或手写笔的接触,控制电路300可以对1个画面数量的2值化信号中信号值成为“1”的2值化信号的个数进行计数,根据计数值判定接触的有无。例如,控制电路300也可以在计数值为预定值以上的情况下,判定为有接触,在计数值小于预定值的情况下判定为没有接触。另外,例如,也可以根据手指或手写笔的接触面积、和光检测电路O1的排列密度,设定手指或手写笔与显示画面接触时信号值成为“1”的2值化信号的个数的上限值和下限值,并预先保存在存储器中。然后,控制电路300在上述的计数值是根据被保存在存储器中的上限值和下限值所规定的范围内的值的情况下,判定为有接触,在计数值不是上述的范围内的值的情况下,判定为无接触。并且,也可以对于信号值成为“1”的多个2值化信号,考虑与其所对应的光检测电路O1是否相邻。另外,也可以把1个画面数量的各个2值化信号的值按照对应的光检测电路O1的排列进行排列,生成“1”的部分表示黑、“0”的部分表示白的2值化图像,考虑该2值图像的黑的部分的形状是否是椭圆形或圆形(手指或手写笔与显示画面接触时的接触面的形状)。In addition, for example, small shadows may be formed on the display screen due to adhesion of dust or the like. In addition, the entire display screen may be touched with the palm of the hand without realizing the touch input. In order to prevent these situations from being misjudged as being touched by a finger or a stylus, the control circuit 300 can count the number of binarized signals whose signal value becomes "1" among the binarized signals of one screen, and according to the count value The presence or absence of contact is judged. For example, the control circuit 300 may determine that there is contact when the count value is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, and may determine that there is no contact when the count value is smaller than the predetermined value. In addition, for example, according to the contact area of the finger or the stylus and the arrangement density of the photodetection circuit O1, the upper limit of the number of binarized signals whose signal value becomes "1" when the finger or the stylus touches the display screen may be set. The limit value and the lower limit value are stored in memory in advance. Then, the control circuit 300 determines that there is contact when the above-mentioned count value is within the range defined by the upper limit value and the lower limit value stored in the memory, and if the count value is not within the above-mentioned range value, it is judged as non-contact. In addition, it may be considered whether or not the corresponding photodetection circuits O1 are adjacent to a plurality of binarized signals whose signal values are "1". In addition, the values of the binarized signals corresponding to one screen may be arranged in accordance with the arrangement of the corresponding photodetection circuit O1 to generate a binarized image in which "1" represents black and "0" represents white. , considering whether the shape of the black part of the binary image is an ellipse or a circle (the shape of the contact surface when a finger or a stylus touches the display screen).

另外,在液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况下随着手指或手写笔的接触在显示画面上产生的阴影的大小、与在液晶显示装置1周围暗的情况下随着手指或手写笔的接触在显示画面上产生的反射光照射的部分的大小不同。因此,液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况和暗的情况,与计数值比较的上限值和下限值的值不同。In addition, when the surrounding of the liquid crystal display device 1 is bright, the size of the shadow generated on the display screen with the touch of a finger or the stylus pen is different from the size of the shadow produced by the touch of the finger or the stylus pen when the surrounding of the liquid crystal display device 1 is dark. The size of the portion irradiated by the reflected light generated on the display screen varies. Therefore, the upper limit value and the lower limit value for count value comparison are different when the surrounding area of the liquid crystal display device 1 is bright and when it is dark.

另外,本实施方式的液晶显示装置1以60Hz或120Hz进行从如下[1]~[3]的关于接触输入功能的1个周期的处理,[1]从设置在图像显示区域A中的全部光检测电路O1读出受光信号;[2]根据读出的1个画面数量的受光信号判定有无接触;[3]在判定为有接触的情况下检测该接触位置。本实施方式的液晶显示装置1关于接触输入功能的动作模式,具有通常模式和高速模式,在通常模式下以60Hz,在高速模式下以120Hz进行上述的1个周期的处理。In addition, the liquid crystal display device 1 of the present embodiment performs one-cycle processing on the touch input function from the following [1] to [3] at 60 Hz or 120 Hz. The detection circuit O1 reads out the light-receiving signal; [2] determines the presence or absence of contact based on the read-out light-receiving signal for one screen; and [3] detects the contact position when it is determined that there is contact. The operation mode of the liquid crystal display device 1 of the present embodiment has a normal mode and a high-speed mode for the touch input function. In the normal mode, the above-mentioned 1-cycle processing is performed at 60 Hz and in the high-speed mode at 120 Hz.

因此,控制电路300控制传感器用扫描电路500和受光信号处理电路600,在通常模式下以1秒钟60次的比例读出1个画面数量的受光信号,在高速模式下以1秒钟120次的比例读出1个画面数量的受光信号。即,控制电路300根据动作模式在传感器用扫描电路500中变更顺序选择m条的各个扫描线的定时,在受光信号处理电路600中变更使用n条读出线读出受光信号的定时。例如,在高速模式的情况下,以通常模式情况下的一半时间读出1个画面数量的受光信号。Therefore, the control circuit 300 controls the sensor scanning circuit 500 and the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 to read the light-receiving signal of one screen at a rate of 60 times per second in the normal mode, and read out the light-receiving signal of 1 screen at a rate of 120 times per second in the high-speed mode. The ratio of the received light signal for 1 screen is read out. That is, the control circuit 300 changes the timing of sequentially selecting the m scanning lines in the sensor scanning circuit 500 and changes the timing of reading the light-receiving signal using the n readout lines in the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 according to the operation mode. For example, in the high-speed mode, light-receiving signals for one screen are read in half the time of the normal mode.

另外,在关于接触输入功能的1个周期的处理中,如上述那样包括判定有无接触的处理和检测接触位置的处理。因此,读出1个画面数量的受光信号的实际时间成为比进行1个周期的处理的1个周期的时间短的时间。例如,读出1个画面数量的受光信号的实际时间,在通常模式下成为比16.6ms短的预定时间宽度,在高速模式下成为比8.3ms短的预定时间宽度。In addition, one cycle of processing related to the touch input function includes the processing of determining the presence or absence of a touch and the processing of detecting a touched position as described above. Therefore, the actual time for reading out the light-receiving signals equal to one screen is shorter than the time for one cycle of processing for one cycle. For example, the actual time for reading the light-receiving signals of one screen is a predetermined time width shorter than 16.6 ms in normal mode, and a predetermined time width shorter than 8.3 ms in high-speed mode.

另外,控制电路300根据多个受光信号计算出环境光的照度,在计算出的照度预定值以上的情况下,判断为是液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况,另一方面,在计算出的照度小于预定值的情况下,判断为是液晶显示装置1周围暗的情况。例如,通过对1个画面数量的受光信号求出其信号电平的平均值来计算出环境光的照度。另外,也可以不使用全部的1个画面数量的受光信号,例如,使用从位于图像显示区域A四角的预定数量的光检测电路O1读出的受光信号,或使用从位于图像显示区域A中央的预定数量的光检测电路O1读出的受光信号,计算出环境光的照度。另外,控制电路300把表示计算出的环境光的照度的数据输出到调光电路700。由此,调光电路700使背光灯800以对应环境光的照度的亮度发光。In addition, the control circuit 300 calculates the illuminance of ambient light based on a plurality of received light signals, and when the calculated illuminance is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, it is determined that the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are bright. If it is less than the predetermined value, it is determined that the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are dark. For example, the illuminance of ambient light is calculated by obtaining an average value of the signal levels of the received light signals for one screen. In addition, instead of using all the light-receiving signals for one screen, for example, using light-receiving signals read from a predetermined number of photodetection circuits O1 located at the four corners of the image display area A, or using light-receiving signals read from a predetermined number of photodetection circuits O1 located at the center of the image display area A The illuminance of ambient light is calculated from the received light signals read out by a predetermined number of light detection circuits O1. In addition, the control circuit 300 outputs data indicating the calculated illuminance of ambient light to the dimming circuit 700 . Accordingly, the dimming circuit 700 causes the backlight 800 to emit light at a brightness corresponding to the illuminance of ambient light.

另外,控制电路300能够生成表示检测出的接触位置的轨迹的图像,把该图像作为利用手指或手写笔描绘的文字和图画等的手写图像显示在图像显示区域A中。在这种情况下,把控制电路300生成的手写图像的数据作为输入图像数据Din提供给图像处理电路400。Also, the control circuit 300 can generate an image showing the trajectory of the detected contact position, and display the image in the image display area A as a handwritten image such as characters and pictures drawn with a finger or a stylus. In this case, the data of the handwritten image generated by the control circuit 300 is supplied to the image processing circuit 400 as input image data Din.

图3是表示实施方式A1的模式切换处理1、2的流程的流程图。在动作模式为通常模式的情况下执行该图(a)所示的模式切换处理1。另外,在液晶显示装置1中,例如,当由用户指示了起动接触输入功能时,在开始了接触输入的受理后,把动作模式切换到通常模式。或者,如果是基本上通过基于手指或手写笔的接触输入进行所有的操作的液晶显示装置1,则在按下了电源开关结束了初始处理后,开始接触输入的受理,把动作模式切换到通常模式。如上述那样,在通常模式下,按60Hz进行关于接触输入功能的1个周期的处理。FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the flow of mode switching processes 1 and 2 in Embodiment A1. When the operation mode is the normal mode, the mode switching process 1 shown in (a) of the figure is executed. In addition, in the liquid crystal display device 1 , for example, when the user instructs to activate the touch input function, the operation mode is switched to the normal mode after the acceptance of the touch input is started. Or, if it is the liquid crystal display device 1 that basically performs all operations by touch input based on a finger or a stylus, after the initial process is completed by pressing the power switch, the acceptance of the touch input is started, and the operation mode is switched to normal. model. As described above, in the normal mode, one cycle of processing related to the touch input function is performed at 60 Hz.

控制电路300首先根据新读出的1个画面数量的受光信号(m×n个),判定有无接触,即手指或手写笔与显示画面是接触还是非接触(步骤S101)。The control circuit 300 first determines whether there is contact, that is, whether the finger or the stylus is in contact with the display screen or not (step S101 ) based on the newly read light receiving signals (m×n) for one screen.

具体是,如上所述,首先,控制电路300对于1个画面数量的各个受光信号,把其信号电平与阈值(具体是后述的阈值T160或T260)进行比较,并转换成2值信号。另外,这里使用的阈值虽然基本上是在后述的模式切换处理2的步骤S203中设定的,但在根据环境光的测定结果,在液晶显示装置1周围从亮的状态变化到暗的状态的情况下、和从暗的状态变化到亮的状态下,在阈值T160与阈值T260之间适当地进行变更。即,在液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况下使用阈值T160,在液晶显示装置1周围暗的情况下使用阈值T260。然后,控制电路300对于生成的1个画面数量的2值化信号(m×n个),例如对信号值为“1”的2值化信号的个数进行计数,在计数值是在存储器中所保存的上限值和下限值所限定的范围内的值的情况下,判定为有接触(步骤S101:是),在计数值不是上述的范围内的值的情况下,判定为无接触(步骤S101:否)。另外,如上述那样,在液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况和暗的情况下,用于与计数值比较的上限值和下限值不同。Specifically, as described above, first, the control circuit 300 compares the signal level of each light-receiving signal corresponding to one screen with a threshold value (specifically, a threshold value T1 60 or T2 60 described later), and converts them into binary values. Signal. In addition, although the threshold used here is basically set in step S203 of the mode switching process 2 described later, it changes from a bright state to a dark state around the liquid crystal display device 1 according to the measurement result of ambient light. In the case of changing from a dark state to a bright state, the threshold T1 60 and the threshold T2 60 are appropriately changed. That is, the threshold T1 60 is used when the surrounding of the liquid crystal display device 1 is bright, and the threshold T2 60 is used when the surrounding of the liquid crystal display device 1 is dark. Then, the control circuit 300 counts, for example, the number of binarized signals whose signal value is "1" for the generated binarized signals (m×n) per screen, and the counted value is stored in the memory. When the stored upper limit value and lower limit value are within the range defined by the value, it is determined that there is contact (step S101: Yes), and when the count value is not a value within the above-mentioned range, it is determined that there is no contact (Step S101: No). In addition, as described above, the upper limit value and the lower limit value for comparison with the count value are different when the surrounding of the liquid crystal display device 1 is bright and when it is dark.

在步骤S101中,在判定为无接触的情况下,结束模式切换处理1。此时,动作模式仍维持通常模式。而在步骤S101中判定为有接触的情况下,控制电路300判定连续得到有接触的判定结果的状态是否持续了预定时间(例如0.2秒)以上(步骤S102)。另外,由于在通常模式下以60Hz执行关于接触输入功能的1个周期的处理,所以以60Hz得到步骤S101的判定结果。因此,控制电路300只要对连续得到有接触的判定结果的次数进行计数,判定该计数值是否达到了与上述的预定时间相当的次数即可。另外,预定时间不限于0.2秒,例如可以设定为10秒、1分钟、5分钟等任意时间宽度。In step S101, when it is determined that there is no contact, the mode switching process 1 ends. At this time, the operation mode remains the normal mode. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S101 that there is contact, the control circuit 300 determines whether the state in which the contact determination result has been continuously obtained has continued for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) or not (step S102 ). In addition, since one cycle of processing related to the touch input function is performed at 60 Hz in the normal mode, the determination result of step S101 is obtained at 60 Hz. Therefore, the control circuit 300 only needs to count the number of times the contact determination result is continuously obtained, and determine whether or not the count value has reached the number of times corresponding to the aforementioned predetermined time. In addition, the predetermined time is not limited to 0.2 seconds, and can be set to any time width such as 10 seconds, 1 minute, or 5 minutes, for example.

在步骤S102中判定为未持续预定时间以上的情况下,结束模式切换处理1。此时动作模式也维持为通常模式。而在步骤S102中判定为持续了预定时间以上的情况下,控制电路300把动作模式从通常模式切换到高速模式(步骤S103)。When it is determined in step S102 that it has not continued for a predetermined time or longer, the mode switching process 1 is ended. At this time, the operation mode is also maintained as the normal mode. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S102 that the operation has continued for a predetermined time or longer, the control circuit 300 switches the operation mode from the normal mode to the high-speed mode (step S103 ).

另外,在把动作模式切换到高速模式的情况下,把用于指示周期的变更(→120Hz)的控制信号从控制电路300发送到传感器用扫描电路500和受光信号处理电路600。传感器用扫描电路500在接收到该控制信号后,变更顺序选择m条的各个扫描线的定时,以便能够以1秒钟120次的比例读出1个画面数量的受光信号。同样,在受光信号处理电路600中,也是响应控制信号的接收,变更使用n条读出线读出受光信号的定时,以便能够以1秒钟120次的比例读出1个画面数量的受光信号。由此,把进行关于接触输入功能的1个周期的处理的周期从60Hz变更为120Hz。Also, when the operation mode is switched to the high-speed mode, a control signal for instructing a cycle change (→120 Hz) is sent from the control circuit 300 to the sensor scanning circuit 500 and the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 . After receiving the control signal, the sensor scanning circuit 500 changes the timing of sequentially selecting the m scanning lines so that light reception signals for one screen can be read out at a rate of 120 times per second. Similarly, in the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600, also in response to the reception of the control signal, the timing of reading the light-receiving signal using n readout lines is changed so that the light-receiving signal of one screen can be read out at a ratio of 120 times per second. . As a result, the cycle for performing one cycle of processing related to the touch input function is changed from 60 Hz to 120 Hz.

另外,控制电路300在把动作模式切换到高速模式后,变更在2值化处理时使用的阈值的值(步骤S104)。当把动作模式从通常模式(60Hz)切换到高速模式(120Hz)后,各个受光信号的读出周期变短。光检测电路O1输出具有对应受光量的信号电平的受光信号,但例如当受光信号的读出周期成为一半的时间时,由于光检测电路O1内的电容所蓄积的电荷量减半,所以被输出的受光信号的信号电平也减小相应的大小。因此,控制电路300在高速模式的情况下需要把在2值化处理时使用的阈值的值降低到比通常模式的情况下的低。In addition, the control circuit 300 changes the value of the threshold value used in the binarization process after switching the operation mode to the high-speed mode (step S104 ). When the operation mode is switched from the normal mode (60 Hz) to the high-speed mode (120 Hz), the readout cycle of each received light signal becomes shorter. The photodetection circuit O1 outputs a light-receiving signal having a signal level corresponding to the amount of light received. However, when the readout period of the light-receiving signal becomes half, for example, the amount of charge accumulated in the capacitor in the photodetection circuit O1 is halved. The signal level of the output light-receiving signal is also reduced correspondingly. Therefore, the control circuit 300 needs to lower the value of the threshold value used in the binarization process in the case of the high-speed mode than in the case of the normal mode.

例如,在液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况下,而且把通常模式(60Hz)情况下使用的阈值设定为T160、在液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况下,而且把高速模式(120Hz)下使用的阈值设定为T1120、在液晶显示装置1周围暗的情况下,而且把通常模式(60Hz)下使用的阈值设定为T260、和在液晶显示装置1周围暗的情况下,而且把通常模式(120Hz)下使用的阈值设定为T2120时,把这些阈值T160、T1120、T260、T2120与关于动作模式(或周期)和周围亮度的信息对应地保存在液晶显示装置1内的存储器(未图示)中。控制电路300根据环境光的测定结果,判断液晶显示装置1周围的亮度,在液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况下,从存储器中读出阈值T1120,把该阈值T1120设定为在2值化处理时使用的阈值。另外,在液晶显示装置1周围暗的情况下,从存储器中读出阈值T2120,把该阈值T2120设定为在2值化处理时使用的阈值。即,通过步骤S104所示的处理,2值化处理时使用的阈值,在液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况下,从阈值T160被变更为阈值T1120。而且,在液晶显示装置1周围暗的情况下,从阈值T260被变更为阈值T2120For example, when the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are bright, the threshold used in the normal mode (60 Hz) is set to T1 60 , and when the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are bright, the threshold value used in the high-speed mode (120 Hz) is set to T1 60 . The threshold used is set to T1 120 , when the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are dark, and the threshold used in the normal mode (60 Hz) is set to T2 60 , and the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are dark, and When the threshold value used in the normal mode (120Hz) is set as T2 120 , these threshold values T1 60 , T1 120 , T2 60 , T2 120 are stored in the liquid crystal display corresponding to the information about the operation mode (or cycle) and the surrounding brightness. In the memory (not shown) in the device 1. The control circuit 300 judges the brightness around the liquid crystal display device 1 based on the measurement result of ambient light, and reads the threshold value T1 120 from the memory when the surrounding area of the liquid crystal display device 1 is bright, and sets the threshold value T1 120 to a binary value. Threshold to use when processing. Also, when the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are dark, the threshold T2 120 is read from the memory, and this threshold T2 120 is set as a threshold used in the binarization process. That is, by the process shown in step S104, the threshold value used in the binarization process is changed from the threshold value T1 60 to the threshold value T1 120 when the periphery of the liquid crystal display device 1 is bright. Furthermore, when the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are dark, the threshold value T2 60 is changed to the threshold value T2 120 .

另外,根据光检测电路O1的受光量的测定方法、和检测手指或手写笔与显示画面接触的情况的传感器的种类,也有无须在步骤S104中变更阈值的情况。在这种情况下,在进行了步骤S103所示的处理后,不进行步骤S104所示的处理,并结束模式切换处理。Also, depending on the method of measuring the amount of light received by the light detection circuit O1 and the type of sensor that detects contact of a finger or stylus with the display screen, there may be cases where it is not necessary to change the threshold in step S104. In this case, after the processing shown in step S103 is performed, the processing shown in step S104 is not performed, and the mode switching processing ends.

另外,在图3(a)所示的模式切换处理1中,对手指或手写笔与显示画面持续接触的时间进行计时,在计时时间达到预定时间以上的情况下(步骤S102:是)把动作模式从通常模式切换到高速模式,但也可以构成为在判定为手指或手写笔与显示画面的接触时(步骤S101:是),与接触时间无关地直接把动作模式切换到高速模式的结构。In addition, in the mode switching process 1 shown in FIG. 3 (a), the time for which the finger or the stylus is continuously in contact with the display screen is counted, and when the counted time reaches a predetermined time or more (step S102: Yes), the action is performed. The mode is switched from the normal mode to the high-speed mode, but when it is determined that a finger or a stylus touches the display screen (step S101: Yes), the operation mode is directly switched to the high-speed mode regardless of the contact time.

但是,例如,在如利用手指或手写笔接触被显示在画面上的按键的情况那样,仅用很少的时间完成了接触输入的情况下,不考虑接触时间,在响应手指或手写笔接触了显示画面的情况直接切换到高速模式(120Hz)后,又马上返回通常模式(60Hz)。因此,动作模式的切换不仅频繁,而且增加了电力消耗。另外,通过切换到高速模式,虽然可提高关于接触位置的检测的时间分辨率,实现高跟踪性,但只有在输入手写文字和图画的情况等,使手指或手写笔在显示画面上持续接触一定时间以上的情况下,才需要这样的高跟踪性。因此,如果是考虑接触时间将动作模式切换到高速模式的结构,与不考虑接触时间,响应手指或手写笔与显示画面接触的情况直接把动作模式切换到高速模式的情况相比,可进一步降低电力消耗。However, for example, in the case where the touch input is completed in a short time as in the case of using a finger or a stylus to touch a key displayed on the screen, regardless of the contact time, when the touch of the finger or the stylus is performed, After switching to the high-speed mode (120Hz) in the display screen, it returns to the normal mode (60Hz) immediately. Therefore, switching of the operation mode is not only frequent, but also increases power consumption. In addition, by switching to the high-speed mode, although it is possible to improve the time resolution of the detection of the contact position and achieve high tracking performance, it is only necessary to keep touching the display screen with a finger or a stylus for a certain period of time when inputting handwritten characters or pictures. Such high traceability is required only when the time exceeds the limit. Therefore, if it is a structure in which the operation mode is switched to the high-speed mode in consideration of the contact time, compared with the case where the operation mode is directly switched to the high-speed mode in response to the contact of the finger or the stylus with the display screen regardless of the contact time, it can be further reduced. power consumption.

另一方面,在动作模式为高速模式的情况下执行图3(b)所示的模式切换处理2。如上述那样,在高速模式下,以120Hz进行关于接触输入的1个周期的处理。控制电路300首先根据新读出的1个画面数量的受光信号(m×n个),判定有无接触(步骤S201)。另外,在步骤S201中,基本上是采用与上述的模式切换处理1的步骤S101相同的方法判定接触的有无,但不同点是,在2值化处理时使用的阈值不是T160、或T260,而是T1120、或T2120On the other hand, when the operation mode is the high-speed mode, the mode switching process 2 shown in FIG. 3( b ) is executed. As described above, in the high-speed mode, one cycle of processing related to the touch input is performed at 120 Hz. The control circuit 300 first determines the presence or absence of contact based on newly read light-receiving signals (m×n) for one screen (step S201 ). In addition, in step S201, the presence or absence of contact is basically determined in the same way as in step S101 of the above-mentioned mode switching process 1, but the difference is that the threshold value used in the binarization process is not T1 60 or T2 60 , but T1 120 , or T2 120 .

即,首先,控制电路300对于1个画面数量的各个受光信号,把其信号电平与阈值T1120或T2120进行比较,并转换成2值信号。这里使用的阈值虽然基本上是在上述的模式切换处理1的步骤S104中设定的,但在根据环境光的测定结果,在液晶显示装置1周围从亮的状态变化到暗的状态的情况下、或从暗的状态变化到亮的状态下,在阈值T1120与阈值T2120之间适当地进行变更。即,在液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况下使用阈值T1120,在液晶显示装置1周围暗的情况下使用阈值T2120。然后,控制电路300对于生成的1个画面数量的2值化信号(m×n个),例如对信号值为“1”的2值化信号的个数进行计数,在计数值是由被保存在存储器中的上限值和下限值所限定的范围内的值的情况下,判定为有接触(步骤S201:否),在计数值不是上述的范围内的值的情况下,判定为无接触(步骤S201:是)。另外,如上述那样,在液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况和暗的情况下,用于与计数值比较的上限值和下限值不同。That is, first, the control circuit 300 compares the signal level of the light-receiving signals corresponding to one screen with the threshold value T1 120 or T2 120 and converts them into binary signals. The threshold value used here is basically set in step S104 of the above-mentioned mode switching process 1, but when the ambient light measurement results change from a bright state to a dark state around the liquid crystal display device 1 , or when changing from a dark state to a bright state, the threshold T1 120 and the threshold T2 120 are appropriately changed. That is, the threshold T1 120 is used when the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are bright, and the threshold T2 120 is used when the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are dark. Then, the control circuit 300 counts, for example, the number of binarized signals whose signal value is "1" for the generated binarized signals (m×n) per screen, and the counted value is stored by In the case of a value within the range defined by the upper limit value and the lower limit value in the memory, it is determined that there is contact (step S201: No), and when the count value is not a value within the above-mentioned range, it is determined that there is no contact. Contact (step S201: Yes). In addition, as described above, the upper limit value and the lower limit value for comparison with the count value are different when the surrounding of the liquid crystal display device 1 is bright and when it is dark.

在步骤S201中判定为有接触的情况下,结束模式切换处理2。此时,动作模式仍维持高速模式。而在步骤S201中判定为无接触的情况下,控制电路300把动作模式从高速模式切换到通常模式(步骤S202)。When it is determined in step S201 that there is contact, the mode switching process 2 ends. At this time, the operation mode remains the high-speed mode. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S201 that there is no contact, the control circuit 300 switches the operation mode from the high-speed mode to the normal mode (step S202).

另外,在把动作模式切换到通常模式的情况下,把用于指示周期的变更(→60Hz)的控制信号从控制电路300发送到传感器用扫描电路500和受光信号处理电路600。传感器用扫描电路500在接收到该控制信号后,变更顺序选择m条的各个扫描线的定时,以便能够以1秒钟60次的比例读出1个画面数量的受光信号。同样,在受光信号处理电路600中,也是响应控制信号的接收,变更使用n条读出线读出受光信号的定时,以便能够以1秒钟60次的比例读出1个画面数量的受光信号。由此,把进行关于接触输入功能的1个周期的处理的周期从120Hz变更为60Hz。Also, when the operation mode is switched to the normal mode, a control signal for instructing a cycle change (→60 Hz) is sent from the control circuit 300 to the sensor scanning circuit 500 and the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 . After receiving the control signal, the sensor scanning circuit 500 changes the timing of sequentially selecting the m scanning lines so that light reception signals for one screen can be read 60 times per second. Similarly, in the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600, also in response to the reception of the control signal, the timing of reading the light-receiving signal using n readout lines is changed so that the light-receiving signal of one screen can be read out at a rate of 60 times per second. . As a result, the cycle for performing one cycle of processing related to the touch input function is changed from 120 Hz to 60 Hz.

另外,控制电路300在把动作模式切换到通常模式后,变更在2值化处理时使用的阈值的值(步骤S203)。由于如上述那样在液晶显示装置1内的存储器中保存有阈值T160、T1120、T260、T2120,所以,控制电路300根据环境光的测定结果,判断液晶显示装置1周围的亮度,在液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况下,从存储器中读出阈值T160,把该阈值T160设定为在2值化处理时使用的阈值。另外,控制电路300在液晶显示装置1周围暗的情况下,从存储器中读出阈值T260,把该阈值T260设定为2值化处理时使用的阈值。即,通过步骤S203所示的处理,2值化处理时使用的阈值,在液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况下,从阈值T1120被变更为阈值T160。而且,在液晶显示装置1周围暗的情况下,从阈值T2120被变更为阈值T260In addition, the control circuit 300 changes the value of the threshold value used in the binarization process after switching the operation mode to the normal mode (step S203 ). Since the threshold values T1 60 , T1 120 , T2 60 , and T2 120 are stored in the memory in the liquid crystal display device 1 as described above, the control circuit 300 judges the brightness around the liquid crystal display device 1 based on the measurement result of ambient light, and When the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are bright, the threshold T1 60 is read from the memory, and this threshold T1 60 is set as the threshold used in the binarization process. In addition, the control circuit 300 reads the threshold T2 60 from the memory when the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are dark, and sets the threshold T2 60 as a threshold used in the binarization process. That is, by the process shown in step S203, the threshold value used in the binarization process is changed from the threshold value T1 120 to the threshold value T1 60 when the periphery of the liquid crystal display device 1 is bright. Furthermore, when the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are dark, the threshold value T2 120 is changed to the threshold value T2 60 .

另外,根据光检测电路O1的受光量测定方法、和检测手指或手写笔与显示画面接触的情况的传感器的种类,也有无须在步骤S203中变更阈值的情况。在这种情况下,在进行了步骤S202所示的处理后,不进行步骤S203所示的处理,并结束模式切换处理2。Also, depending on the method of measuring the amount of light received by the photodetection circuit O1 and the type of sensor that detects contact of a finger or stylus with the display screen, there may be cases where it is not necessary to change the threshold in step S203. In this case, after the processing shown in step S202 is performed, the processing shown in step S203 is not performed, and the mode switching processing 2 is ended.

另外,在图3(b)所示的模式切换处理2中,在判定为非接触时(步骤S201:是),与其持续时间无关地直接把动作模式从高速模式切换到通常模式,但也可以构成为,在步骤S201进行了有无接触的判定后,判定连续得到无接触的判定结果的状态是否持续了预定时间(例如0.2秒)以上,在非接触的状态持续了预定时间以上的情况下,把动作模式切换到通常模式。由于步骤S201的判定结果是以120Hz获得,所以控制电路300只要对连续得到无接触的判定结果的次数进行计数,判定该计数值是否达到了相当于上述的预定时间的次数即可。In addition, in the mode switching process 2 shown in FIG. 3( b), when it is determined that it is non-contact (step S201: Yes), the operation mode is directly switched from the high-speed mode to the normal mode regardless of its duration, but it may also be It is configured that after the presence or absence of contact is determined in step S201, it is determined whether the state in which the non-contact determination result has been continuously obtained has continued for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds), and if the non-contact state has continued for a predetermined time or more , to switch the operation mode to normal mode. Since the determination result in step S201 is obtained at 120 Hz, the control circuit 300 only needs to count the number of consecutive non-contact determination results and determine whether the count value has reached the number of times corresponding to the aforementioned predetermined time.

例如,在利用手指或手写笔输入手写文字的情况下,在移动到下一个笔画时,手指或手写笔与显示画面会暂短分离。虽然是很少的时间,但在这种情况下如果逐一地切换动作模式,则会使动作模式的切换繁杂,反而增加电力消耗。因此,如果是考虑非接触状态持续的时间来把动作模式切换到通常模式的结构,则与不考虑持续时间而响应手指或手写笔从显示画面分离的情况立即把动作模式切换到通常模式的情况相比,可进一步降低电力消耗。另外,预定时间不限于0.2秒,可以设定为例如10秒、5分钟、10分钟等任意时间宽度。For example, when inputting handwritten characters with a finger or a stylus, the finger or the stylus is temporarily separated from the display screen when moving to the next stroke. Although it takes very little time, switching the operation modes one by one in this case will make the switching of the operation modes complicated and increase the power consumption on the contrary. Therefore, if the operation mode is switched to the normal mode in consideration of the duration of the non-contact state, the operation mode is switched to the normal mode immediately in response to the separation of the finger or the stylus from the display screen regardless of the duration. Compared with that, the power consumption can be further reduced. In addition, the predetermined time is not limited to 0.2 seconds, and may be set to any time width such as 10 seconds, 5 minutes, or 10 minutes.

另外,控制电路300在通过接触输入功能有关的1个周期的处理检测出接触位置的情况下,根据检测出的接触位置更新手写图像的显示。In addition, the control circuit 300 updates the display of the handwritten image based on the detected touch position, when the touch position is detected by one-cycle processing related to the touch input function.

图4是用于说明模式切换处理1、2的概要的图。FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the outline of mode switching processes 1 and 2 .

如图4(a)和图4(b)所示,在图像显示区域A(显示画面)的下方,显示有“书写”键和“消除”键,在利用手指或手写笔50接触了“书写”键的部分后,能够在设在其上方的手写输入区域B中手写输入文字和图画等手写图像。如图4(a)是左侧所示,在手指或手写笔50未接触到手写输入区域B的情况下,动作模式为通常模式。在这种情况下,以60Hz进行关于接触输入功能的1个周期的处理。另外,如图4(a)的右侧所示,在手指或手写笔50与手写输入区域B接触的状态持续了预定时间以上时,动作模式被切换到高速模式。在这种情况下,以120Hz进行关于接触输入功能的1个周期的处理。另外,如图4(b)所示,在切换到高速模式后,当手指或手写笔50从显示画面上分离时,动作模式被切换到通常模式。As shown in Fig. 4(a) and Fig. 4(b), below the image display area A (display screen), a "write" key and a "cancel" key are displayed, and when a finger or stylus 50 is used to touch the "write" key, " key, handwriting images such as characters and pictures can be handwritten in the handwriting input area B located above it. As shown on the left side of FIG. 4( a ), when the finger or the stylus 50 is not in contact with the handwriting input area B, the operation mode is the normal mode. In this case, one cycle of processing related to the touch input function is performed at 60 Hz. Also, as shown on the right side of FIG. 4( a ), when the finger or the stylus 50 is in contact with the handwriting input area B for a predetermined time or longer, the operation mode is switched to the high-speed mode. In this case, one cycle of processing related to the touch input function is performed at 120 Hz. Also, as shown in FIG. 4( b ), after switching to the high-speed mode, when the finger or the stylus 50 is separated from the display screen, the operation mode is switched to the normal mode.

如以上说明的那样,根据本实施方式,液晶显示装置1检测手指或手写笔50与显示画面是接触还是非接触,在非接触的情况、和虽然接触但其接触时间小于预定时间的情况下,以通常模式动作,以60Hz读出1个画面数量的受光信号。而在手指或手写笔50连续预定时间以上与画面接触的情况下,液晶显示装置1以通常模式动作,以120Hz读出1个画面数量的受光信号。As described above, according to the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 1 detects whether the finger or the stylus 50 is in contact with the display screen or not. Operates in the normal mode, and reads the received light signal of 1 screen at 60 Hz. On the other hand, when the finger or the stylus 50 is in contact with the screen continuously for a predetermined time or longer, the liquid crystal display device 1 operates in the normal mode, and reads light reception signals corresponding to one screen at 120 Hz.

因此,手指或手写笔50与画面非接触的情况、和虽然接触但其接触时间小于预定时间的情况,与手指或手写笔50连续预定时间以上与画面接触的情况相比,可将读出1个画面数量的受光信号的频度减少到1/2。因此,可将受光信号的读出和2值化处理所需要的处理负荷减少一半,从而可减少液晶显示装置1的电力消耗。另一方面,在手指或手写笔50连续预定时间以上与画面接触的情况,与非接触的情况、和虽然接触但其接触时间小于预定时间的情况相比,可将读出1个画面数量的受光信号的频度增加到2倍。因此,可提高关于接触位置检测的时间分辨率,即使在手指或手写笔50高速移动的情况下也能够充分跟踪。Therefore, when the finger or the stylus 50 is not in contact with the screen, and when it is in contact but the contact time is shorter than a predetermined time, compared with the case where the finger or the stylus 50 is continuously in contact with the screen for a predetermined time or more, the reading of 1 The frequency of the received light signal of the number of frames is reduced to 1/2. Therefore, the processing load required for reading and binarizing the light-receiving signal can be reduced by half, thereby reducing the power consumption of the liquid crystal display device 1 . On the other hand, when the finger or stylus 50 is continuously in contact with the screen for a predetermined time or more, compared with the case of non-contact and the case of contact but the contact time is shorter than the predetermined time, it is possible to read 1 screen. The frequency of the received light signal is doubled. Therefore, the temporal resolution regarding contact position detection can be improved, enabling sufficient tracking even when the finger or stylus 50 moves at high speed.

这样,根据本实施方式,由于能够变更读出1个画面数量的受光信号的周期,只有在手指或手写笔50连续预定时间以上与画面接触的情况下,才以短的周期读出1个画面数量的受光信号,所以,不仅可减少电力消耗,而且在手指或手写笔50高速移动的情况下也能够充分跟踪,顺畅地进行接触输入。In this way, according to the present embodiment, since the cycle of reading out the light-receiving signal equivalent to one screen can be changed, only when the finger or the stylus 50 is continuously in contact with the screen for a predetermined time or longer, one screen is read out in a short cycle. Therefore, not only the power consumption can be reduced, but also the finger or the stylus 50 can be sufficiently tracked even when the finger or the stylus 50 moves at a high speed, and touch input can be performed smoothly.

另外,根据本实施方式,由于能够只在实际进行了接触输入的期间以120Hz进行1个周期的处理,所以,不用说与始终以相同周期进行关于接触输入功能的1个周期的处理的情况相比,就是与例如图4所示那样只在显示手写输入用画面的期间以120Hz进行上述的1个周期的处理,在其他期间以60Hz进行上述的1个周期的处理的情况相比,也能够进一步降低电力消耗。In addition, according to this embodiment, since one cycle of processing can be performed at 120 Hz only during the period when the touch input is actually performed, it goes without saying that it is different from the case where one cycle of processing related to the touch input function is always performed at the same cycle. Compared with, for example, as shown in FIG. 4, the above-mentioned one-cycle processing is performed at 120 Hz only during the display period of the handwriting input screen, and the above-mentioned one-cycle processing is performed at 60 Hz during other periods. Further reduce power consumption.

另外,也可以把进行关于接触输入功能的1个周期的处理的周期,在通常模式的情况下设定为30Hz,在高速模式的情况下设定为100Hz。总之,只要把高速模式的情况下的周期设定为比通常模式的情况下的周期短即可。Also, the cycle for performing one cycle of processing related to the touch input function may be set to 30 Hz in the normal mode and 100 Hz in the high-speed mode. In short, it is only necessary to set the cycle in the high-speed mode to be shorter than that in the normal mode.

<实施方式B1><Embodiment B1>

下面,说明实施方式B1。Next, Embodiment B1 will be described.

另外,本实施方式的液晶显示装置的硬件结构与上述的实施方式A1的液晶显示装置1大致相同,因此,使用与实施方式A1相同的符号。而且,省略关于与实施方式A1相同部分的说明。In addition, since the hardware configuration of the liquid crystal display device of this embodiment is substantially the same as that of the liquid crystal display device 1 of Embodiment A1 described above, the same symbols as those of Embodiment A1 are used. Also, descriptions of the same parts as those in Embodiment A1 are omitted.

本实施方式的液晶显示装置1根据1个画面数量的受光信号,不仅可判定接触的有无,而且可判定手指或手写笔50是否接近到显示画面的面前(接近的有无)。另外,可判定接近的有无的距离,是可根据各个光检测电路O1的受光量检测到手指或手写笔50的阴影或反射光的距离。The liquid crystal display device 1 of this embodiment can judge not only the presence or absence of contact but also whether or not the finger or stylus 50 has approached the display screen (approach presence or absence) based on the received light signals for one screen. In addition, the distance at which the presence or absence of approach can be determined is the distance at which the shadow or reflected light of the finger or the stylus 50 can be detected based on the amount of light received by each photodetection circuit O1.

下面进行具体说明。控制电路300首先把读出的1个画面数量的受光信号按照每个受光信号把其信号电平与阈值比较,转换成2值信号(2值化处理)。在该2值化处理时使用的阈值大体分为2个。1个是接触判定用阈值T。该阈值T用于判定受光信号的信号电平是否达到手指或手写笔50与显示画面接触时的受光量的电平。另1个是接近判定用阈值S。该阈值S用于判定受光信号的信号电平是否达到把手指或手写笔50接近画面面前时的受光量的电平。例如,可通过对于在显示画面上位于手指或手写笔50实际接触的部分的光检测电路O1的受光量(受光信号的信号电平),取得多个取样数据,根据取得的取样数据设定接触判定用阈值T的值。同样,可以通过对于在显示画面上位于手指或手写笔50实际接近的部分的光检测电路O1的受光量(受光信号的信号电平),取得多个取样数据,根据取得的取样数据设定接近判定用阈值S的值。A detailed description will be given below. The control circuit 300 first compares the signal level of the read light reception signals for one screen with a threshold value for each light reception signal, and converts them into binary signals (binary processing). There are roughly two thresholds used in this binarization process. One is the threshold T for contact determination. The threshold T is used to determine whether or not the signal level of the received light signal has reached the level of the received light amount when the finger or the stylus 50 touches the display screen. The other one is the threshold S for approach determination. The threshold S is used to determine whether the signal level of the received light signal has reached the level of the received light amount when the finger or the stylus 50 is brought close to the front of the screen. For example, it is possible to obtain a plurality of sampled data for the amount of light received by the photodetection circuit O1 (signal level of the light received signal) on the display screen where the finger or the stylus 50 is actually in contact, and set the contact position based on the obtained sampled data. The value of the threshold T for judgment. Similarly, it is possible to obtain a plurality of sampling data for the amount of light received by the photodetection circuit O1 (signal level of the light receiving signal) on the display screen where the finger or the stylus 50 actually approaches, and set the approach value based on the obtained sampling data. The value of the threshold S for judgment.

即,在上述的2值化处理时使用了接触判定用的阈值T的情况下,控制电路300判定各个受光信号的信号电平是否达到手指或手写笔50与显示画面接触时的受光量的电平,输出在达到的情况下和未达到的情况下具有不同的信号值的2值化信号。另一方面,在2值化处理时使用了接近判定用阈值S的情况下,控制电路300判定各个受光信号的信号电平是否达到手指或手写笔50与显示画面接近时的受光量的电平,输出在达到的情况下和未达到的情况下具有不同的信号值的2值化信号。另外,由于1个画面数量的受光信号是m×n个,所以与其对应,也生成m×n个2值化信号。That is, when the threshold T for touch determination is used in the above-mentioned binarization processing, the control circuit 300 determines whether the signal level of each light reception signal reaches the level of the light reception amount when the finger or the stylus 50 touches the display screen. level, and output a binarized signal having different signal values when reached and not reached. On the other hand, when the proximity judgment threshold S is used in the binarization process, the control circuit 300 judges whether the signal level of each light reception signal has reached the level of the light reception amount when the finger or the stylus 50 approaches the display screen. , and output a binarized signal having different signal values when reached and not reached. In addition, since there are m×n light-receiving signals corresponding to one screen, m×n binarized signals are also generated correspondingly.

另外,实际上,在液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况下和暗的情况下需要使用不同的阈值。即,作为接触判定用阈值T,需要有在液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况下使用的阈值T1、和在液晶显示装置1周围暗的情况下使用的阈值T2。另外,关于接近判定用阈值S也是同样,需要在液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况下使用的阈值S1、和在液晶显示装置1周围暗的情况下使用的阈值S2。这些接触判定用阈值T1、T2和接近判定用阈值S1、S2被保存在液晶显示装置1内的存储器(未图示)中。In addition, actually, it is necessary to use different thresholds when the surrounding of the liquid crystal display device 1 is bright and when it is dark. That is, as the threshold T for contact determination, threshold T1 used when the surrounding of the liquid crystal display device 1 is bright, and threshold T2 used when the surrounding of the liquid crystal display device 1 is dark is necessary. The same applies to the threshold S for approach determination. The threshold S1 used when the surrounding of the liquid crystal display device 1 is bright and the threshold S2 used when the surrounding of the liquid crystal display device 1 is dark are required. These contact determination thresholds T1 , T2 and proximity determination thresholds S1 , S2 are stored in a memory (not shown) in the liquid crystal display device 1 .

例如是液晶显示装置1周围亮,在显示画面中手指或手写笔50接触的部分成为阴影的情况。如图5(a)所示,各个受光信号的信号电平取“0”(暗)~“100”(亮)范围内的值,接触判定用阈值T1被设定为“10”、接近判定用阈值S1被设定为“20”。在这种情况下,控制电路300在2值化处理时如果使用接触判定用阈值T1,则把信号电平小于“10”的受光信号转换成2值化信号“1”,把信号电平为“10”以上的受光信号转换成2值化信号的“0”。另外,控制电路300在2值化处理时如果使用接近判定用阈值S1,则把信号电平小于“20”的受光信号转换成2值化信号“1”,把信号电平为“20”以上的受光信号转换成2值化信号的“0”。For example, when the periphery of the liquid crystal display device 1 is bright, the portion touched by the finger or the stylus 50 is shaded on the display screen. As shown in Figure 5(a), the signal level of each light receiving signal takes a value in the range of "0" (dark) to "100" (bright), and the threshold T1 for contact judgment is set to "10", and the threshold for proximity judgment is set to "10". The threshold S1 is set to "20". In this case, the control circuit 300 converts the received light signal whose signal level is lower than "10" into a binary signal "1" and converts the signal level to The received light signal of "10" or more is converted into "0" of the binarized signal. In addition, if the control circuit 300 uses the proximity judgment threshold S1 in the binarization process, it converts the received light signal whose signal level is lower than "20" into a binarized signal "1", and converts the signal level to "20" or more. The received light signal is converted into "0" of the binary signal.

下面,假设是液晶显示装置1周围暗,在显示画面中手指或手写笔50接触的部分被反射光照亮的情况。如图5(b)所示,各个受光信号的信号电平,与液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况同样,取“0”(暗)~“100”(亮)范围内的值,接触判定用阈值T2被设定为“65”、接近判定用阈值S2被设定为“50”。在这种情况下,控制电路300在2值化处理时如果使用接触判定用阈值T2,则把信号电平在“65”以上的受光信号转换成2值化信号的“1”,把信号电平小于“65”的受光信号转换成2值化信号的“0”。另外,控制电路300在2值化处理时如果使用接近判定用阈值S2,则把信号电平在“50”以上的受光信号转换成2值化信号“1”,把信号电平小于“50”的受光信号转换成2值化信号的“0”。Next, assume that the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are dark, and the portion of the display screen touched by the finger or the stylus 50 is illuminated by reflected light. As shown in FIG. 5(b), the signal level of each light receiving signal takes a value in the range of "0" (dark) to "100" (bright) as in the case where the liquid crystal display device 1 is bright, and is used for contact determination. The threshold T2 is set to "65", and the threshold S2 for approach determination is set to "50". In this case, if the control circuit 300 uses the contact determination threshold T2 in the binarization process, it converts the received light signal whose signal level is "65" or higher into "1" of the binarized signal, and converts the signal level to "1" of the binarized signal. The received light signal whose level is less than "65" is converted into "0" of the binarized signal. In addition, if the control circuit 300 uses the proximity judgment threshold S2 during the binarization process, it converts the light-receiving signal with a signal level above "50" into a binarized signal "1", and converts the signal level lower than "50" into a binarized signal "1". The received light signal is converted into "0" of the binary signal.

例如,如图2所示,对于在图像显示区域A中排列位置(X、Y)为(2、2)、(2、3)、(3、2)、(3、3)的4个光检测电路O1,在2值化信号的值成为“1”的情况下,2值化信号的值为“1”的部分,如果是在2值化处理时使用了接触判定用阈值T1的情况,为受光信号的信号电平小于10的触摸部分,如果是在2值化处理时使用接近判定用的阈值S1的情况下,为受光信号的信号电平小于20的阴影部分。另外,如果是2值化处理时使用接触判定用的阈值T2的情况下,受光信号的信号电平为“65”以上的被接触的部分,如果是2值化处理时使用了接近判定用阈值S2的情况,则是受光信号的信号电平成为“50”以上的反射光强的部分。For example, as shown in FIG. 2, for the four light beams whose arrangement positions (X, Y) are (2, 2), (2, 3), (3, 2), (3, 3) in the image display area A In the detection circuit O1, when the value of the binarized signal is "1", the part where the value of the binarized signal is "1" is when the threshold value T1 for contact determination is used in the binarization process, The touched portion where the signal level of the received light signal is less than 10 is the shaded portion where the signal level of the received light signal is less than 20 when the threshold S1 for proximity determination is used in the binarization process. In addition, if the threshold value T2 for contact judgment is used in the binarization process, the touched part whose signal level of the received light signal is "65" or higher, if the threshold value for proximity judgment is used in the binarization process In the case of S2, it is a part where the signal level of the received light signal becomes "50" or more of the reflected light intensity.

因此,控制电路300如果是在2值化处理时使用了接触判定用阈值T(T1或T2)的情况,在1个画面数量的2值化信号中包含信号值成为“1”的2值化信号的情况下可判定为有接触,在不包含信号值成为“1”的2值化信号的情况下可判定为无接触。另外,控制电路300只要是在2值化处理时使用了接近判定用阈值S(S1或S2)的情况,在1个画面数量的2值化信号中包含信号值成为“1”的2值化信号的情况下可判定为接近,在不包含信号值成为“1”的2值化信号的情况下可判定为不接近。这样,控制电路300通过变更在2值化处理时使用的阈值,可进行接触判定和接近判定这两种判定。Therefore, when the control circuit 300 uses the contact determination threshold T (T1 or T2) in the binarization process, the binarized signals whose signal value becomes "1" are included in the binarized signals corresponding to one screen. In the case of a signal, it can be determined that there is contact, and in the case of not including a binarized signal whose signal value becomes "1", it can be determined that there is no contact. In addition, as long as the control circuit 300 uses the proximity determination threshold S (S1 or S2) in the binarization process, the binarized signals whose signal value becomes "1" are included in the binarized signals corresponding to one screen. In the case of a signal, it can be determined as close, and in the case of not including a binarized signal whose signal value is "1", it can be determined not to be close. In this way, the control circuit 300 can perform two kinds of judgments, namely, the contact judgment and the proximity judgment, by changing the threshold value used in the binarization process.

另外,控制电路300在判定为有接触的情况下,把2值化信号的值成为“1”的光检测电路O1的排列位置(X、Y),作为手指或手写笔50的接触位置检测出来。In addition, when the control circuit 300 determines that there is a contact, the array position (X, Y) of the photodetection circuit O1 whose value of the binarized signal becomes "1" is detected as the contact position of the finger or the stylus 50. .

另外,与实施方式A1中说明的接触判定的情况同样,关于接近判定,也可以对信号值成为“1”的2值化信号的个数进行计数,根据计数值判定接近的有无。例如,控制电路300可以在计数值在预定值以上的情况下判定为接近,在计数值小于预定值的情况下判定为未接近。另外,例如,根据手指或手写笔50接近显示画面时形成的阴影或发射光照射的部分的面积、和光检测电路O1的排列密度,设定手指或手写笔50接近了显示画面时信号值成为“1”的2值化信号的个数的上限值和下限值,并把其预先保存在存储器中。而且,控制电路300也可以在上述计数值是由保存在存储器中的上限值和下限值所限定的范围内的值的情况下,判定为接近,而在计数值不是上述的范围内的值的情况下,判定为未接近。并且,也可以对于信号值成为“1”的多个2值化信号,考虑与其对应的光检测电路O1是否相邻。另外,也可以把1个画面数量的各个2值化信号的值按照对应的光检测电路O1的排列进行排列,生成把“1”的部分设为黑、“0”的部分设为白的2值图像,考虑该2值图像的黑的部分的形状是否与手指或手写笔50接近了显示画面时形成的阴影或反射光照射的部分的形状相似。In addition, similarly to the case of contact determination described in Embodiment A1, for approach determination, the number of binarized signals whose signal value is "1" may be counted, and the presence or absence of approach may be determined based on the count value. For example, the control circuit 300 may determine that it is approaching when the count value is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, and may determine that it is not approaching when the count value is less than a predetermined value. In addition, for example, according to the shadow formed when the finger or the stylus 50 approaches the display screen or the area of the portion irradiated with emitted light and the arrangement density of the light detection circuit O1, the signal value when the finger or the stylus 50 approaches the display screen is set to be " The upper limit value and the lower limit value of the number of binarized signals of 1" are stored in the memory in advance. Furthermore, the control circuit 300 may determine that it is close when the above-mentioned count value is a value within the range defined by the upper limit value and the lower limit value stored in the memory, and may determine that the count value is not within the above-mentioned range. value, it is judged as not approaching. In addition, it may be considered whether or not the corresponding photodetection circuits O1 are adjacent to a plurality of binarized signals whose signal values are "1". In addition, it is also possible to arrange the values of the binarized signals corresponding to one screen in accordance with the arrangement of the corresponding photodetection circuit O1, and generate a 2 value image, consider whether the shape of the black portion of the binary image is similar to the shadow formed when the finger or the stylus 50 approaches the display screen or the shape of the portion irradiated by reflected light.

另外,接触判定的情况和接近判定的情况,信号值成为“1”的2值化信号的个数不同(例如,接近时形成的阴影比接触时形成的阴影(接触面积)大)。因此,在接触判定的情况和接近判定的情况下,与计数值比较的上限值和下限值的值不同。另外,在液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况下随着手指或手写笔50的接近和接触在显示画面上形成的阴影的大小、与在液晶显示装置1周围暗的情况下随着手指或手写笔50的接近和接触在显示画面上形成的反射光照射的部分的大小不同。因此,液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况和暗的情况,与计数值比较的上限值和下限值的值不同。In addition, the number of binarized signals whose signal value is "1" differs between contact determination and proximity determination (for example, the shadow formed during proximity is larger than the shadow (contact area) formed during contact). Therefore, the values of the upper limit value and the lower limit value to be compared with the count value are different between the case of the contact determination and the case of the proximity determination. In addition, when the surrounding of the liquid crystal display device 1 is bright, the size of the shadow formed on the display screen with the approach and contact of the finger or the stylus 50 is different from that of the shadow formed with the finger or the stylus 50 when the surrounding of the liquid crystal display device 1 is dark. The size of the portion irradiated with reflected light formed on the display screen by approaching and contacting 50 is different. Therefore, the upper limit value and the lower limit value for count value comparison are different when the surrounding area of the liquid crystal display device 1 is bright and when it is dark.

另外,本实施方式的液晶显示装置1,以60Hz或10Hz进行如下[1]~[3]的关于接触输入功能的1个周期的处理,[1]从设置在图像显示区域A所具备的全部光检测电路O1中读出受光信号;[2]根据读出的1个画面数量的受光信号判定有无接触和接近;[3]在判定为有接触的情况下检测该接触位置。本实施方式的液晶显示装置1关于接触输入功能的动作模式,具有通常模式和低耗电模式,在通常模式下以60Hz进行上述的1个周期的处理,在低耗电模式下以10Hz进行上述的1个周期的处理。In addition, the liquid crystal display device 1 of the present embodiment performs one-cycle processing of the following [1] to [3] related to the touch input function at 60 Hz or 10 Hz, and [1] from all the processes provided in the image display area A The light detection circuit O1 reads the light reception signal; [2] judges the presence or absence of contact and proximity based on the read light reception signal for one screen; and [3] detects the contact position when it is determined that there is contact. The operation mode of the liquid crystal display device 1 of the present embodiment has a normal mode and a low power consumption mode with respect to the operation mode of the touch input function. 1 cycle of processing.

因此,控制电路300控制传感器用扫描电路500和受光信号处理电路600,在通常模式下以1秒钟60次的比例读出1个画面数量的受光信号,在低耗电模式下以1秒钟10次的比例读出1个画面数量的受光信号。即,控制电路300根据动作模式,变更在传感器用扫描电路500中顺序选择m条的各个扫描线的定时,变更在受光信号处理电路600中使用n条读出线读出受光信号的定时。例如,在通常模式的情况下,以低耗电模式情况下的1/6时间读出1个画面数量的受光信号。Therefore, the control circuit 300 controls the sensor scanning circuit 500 and the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 to read the light-receiving signal of 1 screen at a rate of 60 times per second in the normal mode, and read out the light-receiving signal of 1 screen at a rate of 1 second in the low power consumption mode. The ratio of 10 times reads the received light signal of 1 screen. That is, the control circuit 300 changes the timing at which m scanning lines are sequentially selected in the sensor scanning circuit 500 and the timing at which light-receiving signals are read out using the n readout lines in the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 according to the operation mode. For example, in the normal mode, light-receiving signals for one screen are read in 1/6 of the time in the low power consumption mode.

另外,在关于接触输入功能的1个周期的处理中,如上述那样,不仅包括判定有无接触和有无接近的处理,而且还包括检测接触位置的处理。因此,读出1个画面数量的受光信号的实际时间成为比进行1个周期的处理的1个周期的时间短的时间。例如,读出1个画面数量的受光信号的实际时间,在通常模式下成为比16.6m短的预定时间宽度,在低耗电模式下成为比100ms短的预定时间宽度。In addition, the processing of one cycle related to the touch input function includes not only the processing of determining the presence or absence of contact and the presence or absence of approach but also the processing of detecting the contact position as described above. Therefore, the actual time for reading out the light-receiving signals equal to one screen is shorter than the time for one cycle of processing for one cycle. For example, the actual time to read the light-receiving signals of one screen is a predetermined time width shorter than 16.6 m in normal mode, and a predetermined time width shorter than 100 ms in low power consumption mode.

图6是表示实施方式B1的模式切换处理3、4的流程的流程图。在动作模式为通常模式的情况下执行该图(a)所示的模式切换处理3。另外,在液晶显示装置1中,例如,当由用户指示了起动接触输入功能时,在开始了接触输入的受理后,把动作模式切换到通常模式。或者,如果是基本上通过手指或手写笔50的接触输入进行所有操作的液晶显示装置1,则在按下了电源开关,结束了初始处理后,开始接触输入的受理,把动作模式切换到通常模式。如上述那样,在通常模式下,以60Hz进行关于接触输入功能的1个周期的处理。FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the flow of mode switching processes 3 and 4 in Embodiment B1. When the operation mode is the normal mode, the mode switching process 3 shown in (a) of the figure is executed. In addition, in the liquid crystal display device 1 , for example, when the user instructs to activate the touch input function, the operation mode is switched to the normal mode after the acceptance of the touch input is started. Or, if it is the liquid crystal display device 1 that basically performs all operations by the touch input of the finger or the stylus 50, after the power switch is pressed and the initial processing is completed, the acceptance of the touch input is started, and the operation mode is switched to normal. model. As described above, in the normal mode, one cycle of processing related to the touch input function is performed at 60 Hz.

控制电路300首先根据新读出的1个画面数量的受光信号(m×n个),判定有无接触,即手指或手写笔50与显示画面是接触还是非接触(步骤S301)。The control circuit 300 first determines whether there is contact, that is, whether the finger or the stylus 50 is in contact with the display screen or not (step S301 ) based on the newly read light receiving signals (m×n) for one screen.

具体是,如上所述,首先,控制电路300对于1个画面数量的各个受光信号,把其信号电平与接触判定用阈值T(具体是后述的阈值T1或T2)进行比较,并转换成2值信号。另外,这里使用的阈值T虽然基本上是在后述的模式切换处理4的步骤S403中设定的,但在根据环境光的测定结果,在液晶显示装置1周围从亮的状态变化到暗的状态的情况下、和从暗的状态变化到亮的状态下,在阈值T1与阈值T2之间适当地进行变更。即,在液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况下使用阈值T1,在液晶显示装置1周围暗的情况下使用阈值T2。然后,控制电路300对于生成的1个画面数量的2值化信号(m×n个),例如对信号值为“1”的2值化信号的个数进行计数,在计数值是由被保存在存储器中的上限值和下限值所限定的范围内的值的情况下,判定为有接触(步骤S301:否),在计数值不是上述的范围内的值的情况下,判定为无接触(步骤S301:是)。另外,如上述那样,在液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况和暗的情况下,或在接触判定的情况下和接近判定的情况下,用于与计数值比较的上限值和下限值不同。Specifically, as described above, first, the control circuit 300 compares the signal level of each light-receiving signal corresponding to one screen with the threshold T for contact determination (specifically, the threshold T1 or T2 described later), and converts the signal level into 2-valued signal. In addition, the threshold T used here is basically set in step S403 of the mode switching process 4 described later, but changes from a bright state to a dark state around the liquid crystal display device 1 according to the measurement result of ambient light. state, and when changing from a dark state to a bright state, the threshold value T1 and the threshold value T2 are appropriately changed. That is, the threshold T1 is used when the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are bright, and the threshold T2 is used when the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are dark. Then, the control circuit 300 counts, for example, the number of binarized signals whose signal value is "1" for the generated binarized signals (m×n) per screen, and the counted value is stored by In the case of a value within the range defined by the upper limit value and the lower limit value in the memory, it is determined that there is contact (step S301: No), and when the count value is not a value within the above-mentioned range, it is determined that there is no contact. Contact (step S301: Yes). In addition, as described above, the upper limit value and the lower limit value used for comparison with the count value are different when the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are bright and dark, or in the case of contact determination and proximity determination. .

在步骤S301中,在判定为有接触的情况下,结束模式切换处理3。此时,动作模式仍维持通常模式。另外,这样地判定为有接触的情况下,控制电路300在结束了模式切换处理3后,进行接触位置的检测。在该接触位置检测时,使用在步骤S301中判定接触的有无时生成的1个画面数量的2值化信号。另外,在检测出接触位置的情况下,控制电路300根据检测出的接触位置,根据需要更新手写图像的显示。In step S301, when it is determined that there is contact, the mode switching process 3 ends. At this time, the operation mode remains the normal mode. In addition, when it is determined that there is contact in this way, the control circuit 300 detects the contact position after completing the mode switching process 3 . In this contact position detection, the binarized signals for one screen generated when determining the presence or absence of contact in step S301 are used. In addition, when the contact position is detected, the control circuit 300 updates the display of the handwritten image as necessary based on the detected contact position.

另一方面,在步骤S301中判定为无接触的情况下,控制电路300判定连续得到无接触的判定结果的状态是否连续持续了预定时间(例如5分钟)(步骤S302)。另外,由于在通常模式下以60Hz执行关于接触输入功能的1个周期的处理,所以以60Hz频率得到步骤S301的判定结果。因此,控制电路300只要对连续得到无接触的判定结果的次数进行计数,判定该计数值是否达到了与上述的预定时间相当的次数即可。另外,预定时间可以设定为60秒、30分钟等任意时间宽度。On the other hand, when it is determined in step S301 that there is no contact, the control circuit 300 determines whether the state in which the non-contact determination result has been continuously obtained has continued for a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) (step S302 ). In addition, since one cycle of processing related to the touch input function is performed at 60 Hz in the normal mode, the determination result of step S301 is obtained at a frequency of 60 Hz. Therefore, the control circuit 300 only needs to count the number of times that non-contact determination results are continuously obtained, and determine whether or not the count value has reached the number of times corresponding to the aforementioned predetermined time. In addition, the predetermined time may be set to an arbitrary time width such as 60 seconds or 30 minutes.

在步骤S302中判定为未持续预定时间的情况下,结束模式切换处理3。此时动作模式也维持为通常模式。而在步骤S302中判定为持续了预定时间的情况下,控制电路300把动作模式从通常模式切换到低耗电模式(步骤S303)。When it is determined in step S302 that the predetermined time has not continued, the mode switching process 3 ends. At this time, the operation mode is also maintained as the normal mode. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S302 that the predetermined time has elapsed, the control circuit 300 switches the operation mode from the normal mode to the low power consumption mode (step S303 ).

另外,在把动作模式切换到低耗电模式时,把指示动作模式切换(→低耗电模式)的控制信号从控制电路300发送到传感器用扫描电路500和受光信号处理电路600。传感器用扫描电路500在接收到该控制信号后,变更顺序选择m条的各个扫描线的定时,以便能够以1秒钟10次的比例读出1个画面数量的受光信号。同样,在受光信号处理电路600中,也是响应控制信号的接收,变更使用n条读出线读出受光信号的定时,以便能够以1秒钟10次的比例读出1个画面数量的受光信号。由此,把进行关于接触输入功能的1个周期的处理的周期从60Hz变更为10Hz。Also, when switching the operation mode to the low power consumption mode, a control signal instructing switching of the operation mode (→ low power consumption mode) is sent from the control circuit 300 to the sensor scanning circuit 500 and the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 . After receiving the control signal, the sensor scanning circuit 500 changes the timing of sequentially selecting the m scanning lines so that light reception signals for one screen can be read out at a ratio of 10 times per second. Similarly, in the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600, also in response to the reception of the control signal, the timing of reading the light-receiving signal using n readout lines is changed so that the light-receiving signal of one screen can be read out at a ratio of 10 times per second. . As a result, the cycle for performing one cycle of processing related to the touch input function is changed from 60 Hz to 10 Hz.

另外,检测到手指或手写笔50连续预定时间与显示画面非接触的情况,即连续预定时间未进行接触输入的情况,基本上是手指或手写笔50处于离显示画面比较远的位置的情况。因此,在这样的手指或手写笔50处于离显示画面比较远的位置的情况下,只要之后在手指或手写笔50接近显示画面附近时把动作模式从低耗电模式切换到通常模式即可。因此,控制电路300在把动作模式切换到低耗电模式后,把2值化处理时使用的阈值从接触判定用阈值T变更为接近判定用阈值S(步骤S304)。In addition, it is detected that the finger or stylus 50 has not been in contact with the display screen for a predetermined time, that is, no contact input has been made for a predetermined time, which basically means that the finger or stylus 50 is far away from the display screen. Therefore, when the finger or the stylus 50 is relatively far from the display screen, it is only necessary to switch the operation mode from the low power consumption mode to the normal mode when the finger or the stylus 50 approaches the vicinity of the display screen. Therefore, after the control circuit 300 switches the operation mode to the low power consumption mode, the threshold used in the binarization process is changed from the contact determination threshold T to the proximity determination threshold S (step S304 ).

如上述那样,由于在液晶显示装置1内的存储器中,保存有接触判定用阈值T1、T2、和接近判定用阈值S1、S2,所以,控制电路300根据环境光的测定结果,判断液晶显示装置1周围的亮度,在液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况下,从存储器中读出接近判定用阈值S1,把该阈值S1设定为在2值化处理时使用的阈值。另外,控制电路300在液晶显示装置1周围暗的情况下,从存储器中读出接近判定用阈值S2,把该阈值S2设定为在2值化处理时使用的阈值。即,通过步骤S304的处理,在液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况下,将在2值化处理时使用的阈值从接触判定用阈值T1“10”被变更为接近判定用阈值S1“20”。另外,在液晶显示装置1周围暗的情况下,在2值化处理时使用的阈值从接触判定用阈值T2“65”被变更为接近判定用阈值S2“50”。As mentioned above, since the memory in the liquid crystal display device 1 stores the contact determination thresholds T1, T2 and the proximity determination thresholds S1, S2, the control circuit 300 determines whether the liquid crystal display device As for the brightness around 1, when the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are bright, the proximity determination threshold S1 is read from the memory, and this threshold S1 is set as the threshold used in the binarization process. Also, when the surrounding of the liquid crystal display device 1 is dark, the control circuit 300 reads the approach determination threshold S2 from the memory, and sets the threshold S2 as a threshold used in the binarization process. That is, by the process of step S304, when the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are bright, the threshold used in the binarization process is changed from the contact determination threshold T1 "10" to the approach determination threshold S1 "20". In addition, when the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are dark, the threshold used in the binarization process is changed from the contact determination threshold T2 "65" to the proximity determination threshold S2 "50".

另外,在动作模式为低耗电模式的情况下进行图6(b)所示的模式切换处理4。如上述那样,在低耗电模式下,以10Hz进行关于接触输入功能的1个周期的处理。控制电路300首先根据新读出的1个画面数量的受光信号(m×n个),判定有无接近,即手指或手写笔50是否接近了显示画面(步骤S401)。In addition, when the operation mode is the low power consumption mode, the mode switching process 4 shown in FIG. 6( b ) is performed. As described above, in the low power consumption mode, one cycle of processing related to the touch input function is performed at 10 Hz. The control circuit 300 first judges whether there is approach, that is, whether the finger or the stylus 50 has approached the display screen based on the newly read light receiving signals (m×n) for one screen (step S401 ).

具体是,如上述那样,首先,控制电路300对于1个画面的各个受光信号,把其信号电平与接近判定用阈值S2(具体是阈值S1或S2)进行比较,并转换成2值信号。这里使用的阈值S虽然基本上是在上述的模式切换处理3的步骤S304中设定的,但在根据环境光的测定结果,在液晶显示装置1周围从亮的状态变化到暗的状态的情况下、和从暗的状态变化到亮的状态下,在阈值S1与阈值S2之间适宜地变更。即,在液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况下使用阈值S1,在液晶显示装置1周围暗的情况下使用阈值S2。然后,控制电路300对于生成的1个画面数量的2值化信号(m×n个),例如对信号值为“1”的2值化信号的个数进行计数,在计数值是由被保存在存储器中的上限值和下限值所限定的范围内的值的情况下,判定为接近(步骤S401:是),在计数值不是上述的范围内的值的情况下,判定为非接近(步骤S401:否)。另外,如上述那样,在液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况和暗的情况下或接触判定的情况下和接近判定的情况下,用于与计数值比较的上限值和下限值不同。Specifically, as described above, first, the control circuit 300 compares the signal level of each received light signal of one screen with the proximity determination threshold S2 (specifically, the threshold S1 or S2), and converts it into a binary signal. The threshold S used here is basically set in step S304 of the above-mentioned mode switching process 3, but in the case of changing from a bright state to a dark state around the liquid crystal display device 1 based on the measurement result of ambient light Down, and when changing from a dark state to a bright state, it is appropriately changed between the threshold S1 and the threshold S2. That is, the threshold S1 is used when the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are bright, and the threshold S2 is used when the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are dark. Then, the control circuit 300 counts, for example, the number of binarized signals whose signal value is "1" for the generated binarized signals (m×n) per screen, and the counted value is stored by In the case of a value within the range defined by the upper limit value and the lower limit value in the memory, it is determined to be close (step S401: Yes), and when the count value is not a value within the above-mentioned range, it is determined to be non-close (Step S401: No). In addition, as described above, the upper limit value and the lower limit value for comparison with the count value are different between bright and dark surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 , or between contact determination and proximity determination.

在步骤S401中判定为未接近的情况下,结束模式切换处理4。此时,动作模式仍维持低耗电模式。而在步骤S401中判定为接近的情况下,控制电路300把动作模式从低耗电模式切换到通常模式(步骤S402)。When it is determined in step S401 that there is no proximity, the mode switching process 4 ends. At this time, the operation mode remains the low power consumption mode. On the other hand, when it is judged to be close in step S401, the control circuit 300 switches the operation mode from the low power consumption mode to the normal mode (step S402).

另外,在把动作模式切换到通常模式的情况下,把用于指示切换动作模式(→通常模式)的控制信号从控制电路300发送到传感器用扫描电路500和受光信号处理电路600。传感器用扫描电路500在接收到该控制信号后,变更顺序选择m条的各个扫描线的定时,以便能够以1秒钟60次的比例读出1个画面数量的受光信号。同样,在受光信号处理电路600中,也是响应控制信号的接收,变更使用n条读出线读出受光信号的定时,以便能够以1秒钟60次的比例读出1个画面数量的受光信号。由此,把进行关于接触输入功能的1个周期的处理的周期从10Hz变更为60Hz。Also, when switching the operation mode to the normal mode, a control signal for instructing to switch the operation mode (→normal mode) is sent from the control circuit 300 to the sensor scanning circuit 500 and the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 . After receiving the control signal, the sensor scanning circuit 500 changes the timing of sequentially selecting the m scanning lines so that light reception signals for one screen can be read 60 times per second. Similarly, in the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600, also in response to the reception of the control signal, the timing of reading the light-receiving signal using n readout lines is changed so that the light-receiving signal of one screen can be read out at a rate of 60 times per second. . As a result, the cycle for performing one cycle of processing related to the touch input function is changed from 10 Hz to 60 Hz.

另外,这样检测到手指或手写笔50接近了显示画面附近的情况是用户正要从此进行接触输入的情况。因此,由于手指或手写笔50接触显示画面的可能性极高,所以,需要进行接触判定和接触位置的检测。因此,控制电路300在把动作模式切换到通常模式后,把2值化处理时使用的阈值从接近判定用阈值S变更为接触判定用阈值T(步骤S403)。In addition, it is detected that the finger or the stylus 50 has approached the vicinity of the display screen in this way, which means that the user is about to perform a touch input from there. Therefore, since there is a high possibility that the finger or the stylus 50 touches the display screen, it is necessary to perform touch determination and detection of the touch position. Therefore, after switching the operation mode to the normal mode, the control circuit 300 changes the threshold value used in the binarization process from the proximity determination threshold S to the contact determination threshold T (step S403 ).

由于如上述那样在液晶显示装置1内的存储器中保存有接触判定用阈值T1、T2、和接近判定用阈值S1、S2,所以,控制电路300根据环境光的测定结果,判断液晶显示装置1周围的亮度,在液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况下,从存储器中读出接触判定用阈值T1,把该阈值T1设定为在2值化处理时使用的阈值。另外,控制电路300在液晶显示装置1周围暗的情况下,从存储器中读出阈值T2,把该阈值T2设定为2值化处理时使用的阈值。即,通过步骤S403所示的处理,把2值化处理时使用的阈值,在液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况下,从接近判定用阈值S1的“20”变更为接触判定用阈值T1“10”。另外,在液晶显示装置1周围暗的情况下,从接近判定用阈值S2“50”变更为接触判定用阈值T2“65”。Since the thresholds T1 and T2 for contact determination and the thresholds S1 and S2 for approach determination are stored in the memory in the liquid crystal display device 1 as described above, the control circuit 300 judges the surrounding area of the liquid crystal display device 1 based on the measurement result of ambient light. When the brightness around the liquid crystal display device 1 is bright, the threshold value T1 for contact determination is read from the memory, and this threshold value T1 is set as the threshold value used in the binarization process. Also, when the surrounding of the liquid crystal display device 1 is dark, the control circuit 300 reads the threshold T2 from the memory, and sets the threshold T2 as a threshold used in the binarization process. That is, by the processing shown in step S403, the threshold value used in the binarization process is changed from "20" of the proximity determination threshold S1 to the contact determination threshold T1 "10" when the surrounding area of the liquid crystal display device 1 is bright. ". In addition, when the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are dark, the approach determination threshold S2 "50" is changed to the contact determination threshold T2 "65".

图7是用于说明模式切换处理3、4的概要的图。FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the outline of mode switching processes 3 and 4 .

如图7(a)和图7(b)所示,在图像显示区域A(显示画面),显示有“图画”键和“照片”键。例如,在利用手指或手写笔50接触了“图画”键的部分后,能够通过接触输入来输入手写画图。另外,在利用手指或手写笔50接触了“照片”键的部分后,能够在显示画面上幻灯显示被保存在存储器中的多个照片图像。如图7(a)的左侧所示,在手指或手写笔50与显示画面接触的情况下,动作模式成为通常模式。在这种情况下,以60Hz进行关于接触输入功能的1个周期的处理。另外,如图7(a)的右侧所示,在手指或手写笔50与显示画面非接触的状态持续了预定时间后,动作模式被切换到低耗电模式。在这种情况下,以10Hz进行关于接触输入功能的1个周期的处理。另外,如图7(b)所示,在切换到低耗电模式后,当检测到手指或手写笔50接近了显示画面附近时,动作模式被切换到通常模式。As shown in FIG. 7( a ) and FIG. 7( b ), in the image display area A (display screen), a "picture" key and a "photograph" key are displayed. For example, after touching a portion of the “Drawing” key with a finger or the stylus 50 , it is possible to input a handwritten drawing by touch input. In addition, when the portion of the "Photo" key is touched with a finger or the stylus 50, a slideshow of a plurality of photo images stored in the memory can be displayed on the display screen. As shown on the left side of FIG. 7( a ), when the finger or the stylus 50 is in contact with the display screen, the operation mode becomes the normal mode. In this case, one cycle of processing related to the touch input function is performed at 60 Hz. In addition, as shown on the right side of FIG. 7( a ), when the finger or the stylus 50 is not in contact with the display screen for a predetermined time, the operation mode is switched to the low power consumption mode. In this case, one cycle of processing related to the touch input function is performed at 10 Hz. In addition, as shown in FIG. 7( b ), after switching to the low power consumption mode, when it is detected that the finger or the stylus 50 approaches the vicinity of the display screen, the operation mode is switched to the normal mode.

如以上说明的那样,根据本实施方式,液晶显示装置1在检测到手指或手写笔50持续预定时间与显示画面非接触的情况时,把动作模式从通常模式切换到低耗电模式,以10Hz读出1个画面数量的受光信号。而且,液晶显示装置1在检测到手指或手写笔50接近了显示画面附近的情况时,把动作模式从低耗电模式切换到通常模式,以60Hz读出1个画面数量的受光信号。因此,在从检测到手指或手写笔50持续预定时间与显示画面非接触的情况、到下一次检测到手指或手写笔50接近了显示画面的情况的期间,以低耗电模式动作,与通常模式的情况相比,可将1个画面数量的受光信号的读出频度减少到1/6。由此可减少受光信号的取出和2值化处理所需要的处理负荷,从而可降低液晶显示装置1的电力消耗。As described above, according to this embodiment, when the liquid crystal display device 1 detects that the finger or the stylus 50 is not in contact with the display screen for a predetermined time, the operation mode is switched from the normal mode to the low power consumption mode, and the operation mode is switched at 10 Hz. Read out the received light signal for 1 screen. Then, when the liquid crystal display device 1 detects that a finger or the stylus 50 has approached the vicinity of the display screen, the operation mode is switched from the low power consumption mode to the normal mode, and light reception signals corresponding to one screen are read out at 60 Hz. Therefore, during the period from when the finger or the stylus 50 is not in contact with the display screen for a predetermined period of time is detected until the next time when the finger or the stylus 50 approaches the display screen is detected, the low power consumption mode operates, which is different from the normal Compared with the case of the mode, the readout frequency of the received light signal for 1 screen can be reduced to 1/6. This can reduce the processing load required for the extraction of the light-receiving signal and the binarization process, thereby reducing the power consumption of the liquid crystal display device 1 .

除此之外,在从检测到手指或手写笔50接近了显示画面附近的情况到检测到之后手指或手写笔50持续预定时间与显示画面非接触的情况的期间,以通常模式动作,与低耗电模式的情况相比,可增加1个画面数量的受光信号的读出频度。因此,可提高关于接触判定和接触位置检测在时间上的分辨率,从而能够以高精度进行接触判定和接触位置的检测。特别是通过把从低耗电模式向通常模式切换的时间不是设定在检测到接触时,而是设定在检测到接近时,可以在手指或手写笔50实际接触画面之前,预先提高关于接触判定和接触位置检测的精度。In addition, during the period from when the finger or the stylus 50 approaches the vicinity of the display screen is detected to when the finger or the stylus 50 is not in contact with the display screen for a predetermined time after detection, the normal mode operates, and the low Compared with the case of the power consumption mode, the readout frequency of the received light signal can be increased by 1 screen. Therefore, the temporal resolution regarding contact determination and contact position detection can be improved, so that contact determination and contact position detection can be performed with high accuracy. In particular, by setting the time for switching from the low power consumption mode to the normal mode not when a contact is detected, but when an approach is detected, it is possible to advance the contact information before the finger or stylus 50 actually touches the screen. Accuracy of judgment and detection of contact position.

另外,也可以把关于接触输入功能的1个周期的处理所执行的周期,在通常模式下设定为120Hz,在低耗电模式下设定为60Hz。总之,只要把通常模式下的周期设定为比低耗电模式下的周期短即可。In addition, the cycle for executing one-cycle processing of the touch input function may be set to 120 Hz in the normal mode and 60 Hz in the low power consumption mode. In short, it is sufficient to set the period in the normal mode to be shorter than that in the low power consumption mode.

<实施方式B2><Embodiment B2>

在上述的实施方式B1中,说明了在通常模式下以60Hz,在低耗电模式下以10Hz读出1个画面数量的受光信号的情况。在本实施方式中,进一步对在低耗电模式下只从设在图像显示区域A中的一部分光检测电路O1中读出受光信号的情况进行说明。In the above-mentioned Embodiment B1, a case was described in which light-receiving signals corresponding to one screen are read out at 60 Hz in the normal mode and at 10 Hz in the low power consumption mode. In this embodiment, the case where the light reception signal is read out only from a part of the photodetection circuits O1 provided in the image display area A in the low power consumption mode will be further described.

本实施方式的液晶显示装置1与实施方式B1的情况同样,具有通常模式和低耗电模式。在通常模式下,传感器用扫描电路500和受光信号处理电路600以60Hz从设置在图像显示区域A中的全部光检测电路O1读出受光信号。而在低耗电模式下,传感器用扫描电路500和受光信号处理电路600以10Hz只从图像显示区域A中的一部分光检测电路O1读出受光信号。The liquid crystal display device 1 of this embodiment has a normal mode and a low power consumption mode as in the case of Embodiment B1. In the normal mode, the sensor scanning circuit 500 and the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 read out light-receiving signals from all the photodetection circuits O1 provided in the image display area A at 60 Hz. On the other hand, in the low power consumption mode, the sensor scanning circuit 500 and the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 read out the light-receiving signal from only a part of the photodetection circuit O1 in the image display area A at 10 Hz.

因此,在通常模式下以60Hz读出的受光信号的个数是m×n个,而在低耗电模式下以10Hz读出的受光信号的个数小于m×n个。例如,在把低耗电模式下读出受光信号的区域设定在图像显示区域A的下半部的情况下,在低耗电模式下以10Hz读出m×n/2个受光信号。这样,由于在通常模式下是以60Hz读出m×n个受光信号,所以与此对应,也是以60Hz生成m×n个2值化信号。与之相反,在低耗电模式下,例如在把读出受光信号的区域设定在图像显示区域A的下半部的情况下,由于以10Hz读出m×n/2个受光信号,所以与此对应,也是以10Hz生成m×n/2个2值化信号。Therefore, the number of light-receiving signals read at 60 Hz in the normal mode is m×n, while the number of light-receiving signals read at 10 Hz in the low power consumption mode is less than m×n. For example, when the region for reading out light-receiving signals in the low power consumption mode is set to the lower half of the image display region A, m×n/2 light-receiving signals are read out at 10 Hz in the low power consumption mode. As described above, since m×n light-receiving signals are read at 60 Hz in the normal mode, m×n binary signals are also generated at 60 Hz corresponding to this. On the contrary, in the low power consumption mode, for example, when the region for reading out the light-receiving signal is set in the lower half of the image display region A, m×n/2 light-receiving signals are read out at 10 Hz, so Corresponding to this, m×n/2 binarized signals are also generated at 10 Hz.

图8是用于说明实施方式B2的通常模式和低耗电模式的图。另外,该图所示的画面显示例是用于通过例如手指或手写笔50的接触输入生成手写图画的图像编辑软件的编辑画面。在显示画面的上侧设有手写输入区域B。在该手写输入区域B可以利用手指或手写笔50进行手写图画的输入。另外,在手写输入区域B的下方,设有图中用虚线表示的操作键显示区域C。在该操作键显示区域C中,在图像编辑软件被刚启动的阶段,显示有如该图所示的“黑白”、“彩色”、“打开”3个操作键。用户在启动了图像编辑软件后,首先接触被显示在操作键显示区域C中的操作键的部分,选择开始以黑白模式输入图画、开始以彩色模式输入图画、或读出所保存的手写图像开始编辑等。在操作键显示区域C中进行了这样的选择操作后,能够在手写区域B进行画图。FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining a normal mode and a low power consumption mode in Embodiment B2. In addition, the screen display example shown in the figure is an editing screen of an image editing software for creating a handwritten picture by contact input with, for example, a finger or the stylus 50 . A handwriting input area B is provided on the upper side of the display screen. In this handwriting input area B, a handwritten picture can be input using a finger or a stylus 50 . In addition, below the handwriting input area B, an operation key display area C indicated by a dotted line in the figure is provided. In this operation key display area C, three operation keys of "black and white", "color", and "open" as shown in the figure are displayed immediately after the image editing software is started. After starting the image editing software, the user first touches the part of the operation key displayed in the operation key display area C, and selects to start inputting a picture in black and white mode, start inputting a picture in color mode, or start reading a saved handwritten image. edit etc. After such a selection operation is performed in the operation key display area C, drawing can be performed in the handwriting area B. FIG.

另外,在图像编辑软件的执行过程中,如果例如5分钟期间未进行接触输入,则液晶显示装置1为了削减电力消耗,停止手写区域B的部分的显示。由此,手写区域B的部分全面成为黑色(或白色)。此时,在操作键显示区域C中,取代上述的3个操作键,而显示例如“再编辑”、“保存”、“结束”的3个操作键。用户在再次进行手写图像的输入的情况下,接触“再编辑”键。另外,在保存所输入的手写图像的情况下,接触“保存”键。另外,在不保存所输入的手写图像并结束图像编辑软件的情况下,接触“结束”键。这样,一旦停止了手写区域B的部分的显示,则以后在进行任何操作时,用户必须接触操作键显示区域C的部分。因此,在停止手写输入区域B的部分的显示的期间中,只对操作键显示区域C的部分进行接触判定和接近判定即可。因此,在本实施方式的液晶显示装置1中,在未停止手写输入区域B的部分的显示的情况下,把动作模式切换到通常模式,在停止了手写输入区域B的部分的显示的情况下,把动作模式切换到低耗电模式。Also, if there is no touch input for, for example, 5 minutes during the execution of the image editing software, the liquid crystal display device 1 stops the display of the handwriting area B in order to reduce power consumption. As a result, the entire part of the handwriting area B becomes black (or white). At this time, in the operation key display area C, instead of the above-mentioned three operation keys, three operation keys such as "reedit", "save", and "end" are displayed. When the user performs input of the handwritten image again, the user touches the "re-edit" key. In addition, to save the input handwritten image, touch the "Save" key. In addition, the "END" key is touched to end the image editing software without saving the input handwritten image. In this way, once the display of the part of the handwriting area B is stopped, the user must touch the part of the operation key display area C when performing any operation in the future. Therefore, while the display of the portion of the handwriting input area B is stopped, only the contact determination and proximity determination of the portion of the operation key display area C may be performed. Therefore, in the liquid crystal display device 1 of the present embodiment, when the display of the part of the handwriting input area B is not stopped, the operation mode is switched to the normal mode, and when the display of the part of the handwriting input area B is stopped , to switch the action mode to low power consumption mode.

另外,在图8所示的例子的情况下,图像显示区域A(显示画面)中设有240条扫描线和180条读出线。传感器用扫描电路500在通常模式下顺序逐一选择240条扫描线。即,传感器用扫描电路500按照扫描线1、扫描线2、扫描线3、...、扫描线238、扫描线239、扫描线240的顺序,逐一顺序选择全部的扫描线。与此相反,在低耗电模式下,传感器用扫描电路500只逐一顺序选择与操作键显示区域C的部分对应的从扫描线210到扫描线240的共计40条扫描线。即,传感器用扫描电路500顺序选择扫描线201、扫描线202、扫描线203、...、扫描线238、扫描线239、扫描线240,不选择从扫描线1到扫描线200的其他200条扫描线。另外,在图8所示的例子的情况下,受光信号处理电路600无论是在通常模式下还是在低耗电模式下,都全部使用180条读出线进行受光信号的读出。In addition, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 8 , 240 scanning lines and 180 readout lines are provided in the image display area A (display screen). The sensor scanning circuit 500 sequentially selects 240 scanning lines one by one in the normal mode. That is, the scanning circuit 500 for a sensor sequentially selects all scanning lines one by one in the order of scanning line 1 , scanning line 2 , scanning line 3 , . . . , scanning line 238 , scanning line 239 , and scanning line 240 . In contrast, in the low power consumption mode, sensor scanning circuit 500 sequentially selects only 40 scanning lines from scanning line 210 to scanning line 240 corresponding to the portion of operation key display area C one by one. That is, the sensor scanning circuit 500 sequentially selects the scanning line 201, the scanning line 202, the scanning line 203, ..., the scanning line 238, the scanning line 239, and the scanning line 240, and does not select the other 200 lines from the scanning line 1 to the scanning line 200. scan lines. In addition, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 8 , the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 reads out the light-receiving signal using all 180 readout lines regardless of whether it is in the normal mode or the low power consumption mode.

其结果,在图8所示的例子的情况下,在通常模式下,以60Hz,从与240条扫描线和180条读出线对应的共计43200个光检测电路O1(设置在图像显示区域A中的全部光检测电路O1)读出受光信号。另一方面,在低耗电模式下,以10Hz,只从与扫描线201至扫描线240的40条扫描线和180条读出线对应的共计7200个光检测电路O1(排列在操作键显示区域C内的光检测电路O1)读出受光信号。因此,在低耗电模式下,读出受光信号的光检测电路O1的个数是通常模式下的1/6。As a result, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 8 , in the normal mode, at 60 Hz, a total of 43200 photodetection circuits O1 (installed in the image display area A) corresponding to 240 scanning lines and 180 readout lines All the photodetection circuits O1) read out the received light signal. On the other hand, in the low power consumption mode, at 10 Hz, only from a total of 7200 photodetection circuits O1 corresponding to 40 scanning lines from scanning line 201 to scanning line 240 and 180 reading lines (arranged on the operation key display The photodetection circuit (O1) in the region C reads out the received light signal. Therefore, in the low power consumption mode, the number of photodetection circuits O1 that read out the received light signal is 1/6 of that in the normal mode.

另外,图9是表示图8所示的手写输入区域B和操作键显示区域C的排列从上到下置换成从左到右的图。在该图9所示的例子的情况下,也是在通常模式下,以60Hz从设置在图像显示区域A中的全部光检测电路O1读出受光信号。而在低耗电模式下,以10Hz,只从被排列在操作键显示区域C内的光检测电路O1读出受光信号。即,在图9所示的例子中,在低耗电模式下,传感器用扫描电路500与通常模式同样逐一顺序选择240条的全部扫描线,但受光信号处理电路600只使用180条读出线中的与操作键显示区域C的部分对应的读出线1至读出线50的共计50条读出线进行受光信号的读出。其结果,在图9所示的例子中,在低耗电模式下,以10Hz,只从与240条扫描线和50条读出线对应的共计12000个光检测电路O1读出受光信号。因此,读出受光信号的光检测电路O1的个数成为通常模式下的1/3.6。In addition, FIG. 9 is a diagram showing that the arrangement of the handwriting input area B and the operation key display area C shown in FIG. 8 is replaced from top to bottom to left to right. In the case of the example shown in FIG. 9 , also in the normal mode, light reception signals are read out from all the photodetection circuits O1 provided in the image display area A at 60 Hz. On the other hand, in the low power consumption mode, the light reception signal is read out only from the light detection circuit O1 arranged in the operation key display area C at 10 Hz. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 9 , in the low power consumption mode, the sensor scanning circuit 500 sequentially selects all 240 scanning lines in the same manner as in the normal mode, but the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 uses only 180 readout lines. A total of 50 readout lines from the readout line 1 to the readout line 50 corresponding to the portion of the operation key display area C in the display read out the light-receiving signal. As a result, in the example shown in FIG. 9 , in the low power consumption mode, light reception signals are read out only from a total of 12000 photodetection circuits O1 corresponding to 240 scanning lines and 50 readout lines at 10 Hz. Therefore, the number of photodetection circuits O1 that read out the light-receiving signal becomes 1/3.6 of that in the normal mode.

另外,除了图8和图9所示的例子以外,也可以构成为,例如在低耗电模式下,以10Hz,只从与扫描线1至扫描线60的60条扫描线、和读出线1至读出线90的90条读出线对应的共计5400个光检测电路O1读出受光信号。在这种情况下,在低耗电模式下,传感器用扫描电路500只逐一顺序选择从扫描线1至扫描线60的60条扫描线,受光信号处理电路600只使用从读出线1至读出线90的共计90条读出线来读出受光信号。In addition to the examples shown in FIGS. 8 and 9 , for example, in the low power consumption mode, at 10 Hz, only 60 scan lines from scan line 1 to scan line 60 and the readout line A total of 5400 photodetection circuits O1 corresponding to 90 readout lines from 1 to readout line 90 read out received light signals. In this case, in the low power consumption mode, the sensor scanning circuit 500 only sequentially selects the 60 scanning lines from scanning line 1 to scanning line 60 one by one, and the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 uses only the scanning lines from the reading line 1 to the reading line 60. A total of 90 readout lines out of the line 90 are used to read out the received light signal.

这样,传感器用扫描电路500,在通常模式下逐一顺序选择全部的扫描线,但在低耗电模式的情况下,只逐一顺序选择与操作键显示区域C的部分对应的多个扫描线(例如,在图8所示的例子中是扫描线201~扫描线240)。而且,受光信号处理电路600在通常模式下使用全部读出线进行受光信号的读出,但在低耗电模式下,只使用与操作键显示区域C的部分对应的多个读出线(例如在图9所示的例子中,是读出线1~读出线50)进行受光信号的读出。In this way, the sensor scanning circuit 500 sequentially selects all the scanning lines one by one in the normal mode, but in the case of the low power consumption mode, only sequentially selects a plurality of scanning lines corresponding to the part of the operation key display area C (for example, , in the example shown in FIG. 8 are the scanning line 201 to the scanning line 240). Moreover, the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 uses all the readout lines to read out the light-receiving signal in the normal mode, but in the low power consumption mode, only a plurality of readout lines corresponding to the part of the operation key display area C (such as In the example shown in FIG. 9, the readout line 1 to the readout line 50) read out the received light signal.

图10是表示实施方式B2的模式切换处理5、6的流程的流程图。在动作模式是通常模式的情况下,执行该图(a)所示的模式切换处理5。另外,在液晶显示装置1中,例如,当用户启动了上述的图像编辑软件时,在开始了接触输入的受理后,把动作模式切换到通常模式。另外,如上述那样,在通常模式下,以60Hz进行关于接触输入功能的1个周期的处理,而且从设置在图像显示区域A中的全部光检测电路O1读出受光信号。FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of mode switching processes 5 and 6 in Embodiment B2. When the operation mode is the normal mode, the mode switching process 5 shown in (a) of the figure is executed. In addition, in the liquid crystal display device 1 , for example, when the user starts the above-mentioned image editing software, the operation mode is switched to the normal mode after the acceptance of the touch input is started. Also, as described above, in the normal mode, one cycle of processing related to the touch input function is performed at 60 Hz, and light reception signals are read out from all photodetection circuits O1 provided in the image display area A.

另外,关于图10(a)所示的模式切换处理5的流程中的步骤S501、S502、S504,由于进行与实施方式B1中说明的模式切换处理3(参照图6(a))的步骤S301、S302、S304基本同样的处理,所以在此简化说明。In addition, steps S501, S502, and S504 in the flow of the mode switching process 5 shown in FIG. , S302, and S304 are basically the same processing, so the description will be simplified here.

控制电路300首先根据新读出的1个画面数量的受光信号(m×n个),判定有无接触(步骤S501)。另外,在步骤S501中判定为无接触的情况下,控制电路300判定连续得到无接触的判定结果的状态是否持续了预定时间(例如5分钟)(步骤S502)。另外,在步骤S502中判定为持续了预定时间的情况下,控制电路300把动作模式从通常模式切换到低耗电模式(步骤S503)。The control circuit 300 first determines the presence or absence of contact based on newly read light-receiving signals (m×n) for one screen (step S501 ). In addition, when it is determined in step S501 that there is no contact, the control circuit 300 determines whether the state in which the non-contact determination result has been continuously obtained has continued for a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) (step S502 ). In addition, when it is determined in step S502 that the predetermined time has continued, the control circuit 300 switches the operation mode from the normal mode to the low power consumption mode (step S503 ).

另外,在把动作模式切换到低耗电模式时,把用于指示动作模式切换(→低耗电模式)的控制信号从控制电路300发送到传感器用扫描电路500和受光信号处理电路600。传感器用扫描电路500和受光信号处理电路600在接收到该控制信号后,把动作模式变更为低耗电模式。例如,在图8所示的例子的情况下,在低耗电模式下被选择的扫描线只有扫描线201至扫描线240的40条。因此,传感器用扫描电路500为了使选择40条扫描线的周期成为10Hz,变更选择各个扫描线的定时,并且按照所变更的定时逐一顺序选择扫描线201至扫描线240的40条扫描线。另外,受光信号处理电路600对应传感器用扫描电路500选择扫描线的定时,变更使用180条读出线读出受光信号的定时,并按照变更的定时进行受光信号的读出。Also, when switching the operation mode to the low power consumption mode, a control signal for instructing switching of the operation mode (→ low power consumption mode) is sent from the control circuit 300 to the sensor scanning circuit 500 and the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 . The sensor scanning circuit 500 and the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 change the operation mode to the low power consumption mode after receiving the control signal. For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 8 , only 40 scan lines from scan line 201 to scan line 240 are selected in the low power consumption mode. Therefore, the sensor scanning circuit 500 changes the timing of selecting each scanning line so that the cycle of selecting 40 scanning lines is 10 Hz, and sequentially selects the 40 scanning lines from scanning line 201 to scanning line 240 at the changed timing. In addition, the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 changes the timing at which the light-receiving signal is read out using the 180 readout lines in accordance with the timing at which the sensor scanning circuit 500 selects a scanning line, and reads out the light-receiving signal at the changed timing.

另外,在图9所示的例子的情况下,低耗电模式的情况下被选择的扫描线是全部的240条扫描线。因此,传感器用扫描电路500变更选择各个扫描线的定时,以便能够使选择240条扫描线的周期成为10Hz,并且按照变更的定时逐一顺序选择240条扫描线。另外,受光信号处理电路600,根据传感器用扫描电路500选择扫描线的定时,变更只使用共计180条读出线中的读出线1至读出线50的50条读出线读出受光信号的定时,并按照变更的定时,只使用50条扫描线进行受光信号的读出。In addition, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 9 , the selected scanning lines in the low power consumption mode are all 240 scanning lines. Therefore, the sensor scanning circuit 500 changes the timing of selecting each scanning line so that the cycle of selecting 240 scanning lines can be 10 Hz, and sequentially selects the 240 scanning lines one by one at the changed timing. In addition, the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 changes and reads the light-receiving signal using only the 50 readout lines from the readout line 1 to the readout line 50 among the total 180 readout lines according to the timing at which the scanning line is selected by the sensor scanning circuit 500 . According to the changed timing, only 50 scanning lines are used to read out the received light signal.

在这样地把动作模式从通常模式切换到低耗电模式后,传感器用扫描电路500和受光信号处理电路600以10Hz只从被排列在操作键显示区域C内的光检测电路O1读出受光信号。另外,在把动作模式从通常模式切换到低耗电模式后,控制电路300把在2值化处理时使用的阈值从接触判定用阈值T变更为接近判定用阈值S(步骤S504)。After switching the operation mode from the normal mode to the low power consumption mode in this way, the sensor scanning circuit 500 and the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 read the light-receiving signal at 10 Hz only from the photodetection circuit O1 arranged in the operation key display area C. . In addition, after switching the operation mode from the normal mode to the low power consumption mode, the control circuit 300 changes the threshold used in the binarization process from the contact determination threshold T to the proximity determination threshold S (step S504 ).

另一方面,在动作模式是低耗电模式的情况下执行图10(b)所示的模式切换处理6。如上述那样,在低耗电模式下,以10Hz进行关于接触输入功能的1个周期的处理,而且只从被排列在操作键显示区域C内的光检测电路O1读出受光信号。另外,关于图10(b)所示的模式切换处理6的流程中的步骤S601、S603,由于进行与实施方式B1中说明过的模式切换处理4(参照图6(b))的步骤S401、S403基本相同的处理,所以在此简化说明。On the other hand, when the operation mode is the low power consumption mode, the mode switching process 6 shown in FIG. 10( b ) is executed. As described above, in the low power consumption mode, one cycle of processing related to the touch input function is performed at 10 Hz, and light reception signals are read only from the photodetection circuit O1 arranged in the operation key display area C. In addition, steps S601 and S603 in the flow of the mode switching process 6 shown in FIG. The processing in S403 is basically the same, so the description will be simplified here.

控制电路300首先根据从操作键显示区域C内的各个光检测电路O1读出的受光信号,判定接近的有无,即手指或手写笔50是否接近了操作键显示区域C(步骤S601)附近。具体地进行说明,首先,控制电路300对于读出的各个受光信号,把其信号电平与接近判定用阈值S(具体是阈值S1或S2)进行比较,并转换成2值信号。然后,控制电路300对于生成的2值化信号,例如对信号值为“1”的2值化信号的个数进行计数,在计数值是由被保存在存储器中的上限值和下限值所限定的范围内的值的情况下,判定为接近(步骤S601:是),在计数值不是上述的范围内的值的情况下,判定为非接近(步骤S601:否)。The control circuit 300 first judges whether the finger or the stylus 50 has approached the vicinity of the operation key display area C (step S601) based on the light receiving signals read out from the light detection circuits O1 in the operation key display area C. To describe it specifically, first, the control circuit 300 compares the signal level of each read-out received light signal with the approach judgment threshold S (specifically, the threshold S1 or S2 ), and converts it into a binary signal. Then, the control circuit 300 counts the generated binarized signal, for example, the number of binarized signals whose signal value is "1". When the value is within the limited range, it is determined to be close (step S601: Yes), and when the count value is not a value within the above-mentioned range, it is determined to be non-close (step S601: No).

在步骤S601中判定为未接近的情况下,结束模式切换处理6。而在步骤S601中判定为接近的情况下,控制电路300把动作模式从低耗电模式切换到通常模式(步骤S602)。另外,在把动作模式切换到通常模式时,把指示切换动作模式(→通常模式)的控制信号从控制电路300发送到传感器用扫描电路500和受光信号处理电路600。When it is determined in step S601 that there is no proximity, the mode switching process 6 ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S601 that it is approaching, the control circuit 300 switches the operation mode from the low power consumption mode to the normal mode (step S602 ). Also, when switching the operation mode to the normal mode, a control signal instructing to switch the operation mode (→normal mode) is sent from the control circuit 300 to the sensor scanning circuit 500 and the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 .

传感器用扫描电路500和受光信号处理电路600在接收到该控制信号后,把动作模式变更为通常模式。例如,在图8和图9所示的任意例子中,都是在通常模式的情况下使用全部240条扫描线和全部180条读出线。因此,传感器用扫描电路500变更选择各个扫描线的定时,以便使选择240条扫描线的周期成为60Hz,并且按照变更的定时逐一顺序选择240条扫描线。另外,受光信号处理电路600对应传感器用扫描电路500选择扫描线的定时,变更使用180条读出线读出受光信号的定时,并按照变更的定时进行受光信号的读出。The sensor scanning circuit 500 and the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 change the operation mode to the normal mode after receiving the control signal. For example, in any of the examples shown in FIGS. 8 and 9 , all 240 scanning lines and all 180 readout lines are used in the normal mode. Therefore, the scanning circuit 500 for a sensor changes the timing of selecting each scanning line so that the cycle of selecting 240 scanning lines becomes 60 Hz, and sequentially selects the 240 scanning lines one by one at the changed timing. In addition, the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 changes the timing at which the light-receiving signal is read out using the 180 readout lines in accordance with the timing at which the sensor scanning circuit 500 selects a scanning line, and reads out the light-receiving signal at the changed timing.

在这样地把动作模式从低耗电模式切换到通常模式后,传感器用扫描电路500和受光信号处理电路600以60Hz从设置在图像显示区域A中的全部光检测电路O1读出受光信号。另外,在把动作模式从低耗电模式切换到通常模式后,控制电路300把2值化处理时使用的阈值从接近判定用阈值S变更为接触判定用阈值T(步骤S603)。After switching the operation mode from the low power consumption mode to the normal mode in this way, the sensor scanning circuit 500 and the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 read out light-receiving signals from all photodetection circuits O1 provided in the image display area A at 60 Hz. In addition, after the operation mode is switched from the low power consumption mode to the normal mode, the control circuit 300 changes the threshold used in the binarization process from the proximity determination threshold S to the contact determination threshold T (step S603).

如上述说明的那样,根据本实施方式,液晶显示装置1在低耗电模式下只从被排列在操作键显示区域C内的光检测电路O1读出受光信号。因此,在低耗电模式的情况下,与通常模式的情况相比,可将1个画面数量的受光信号的读出频度减少到1/6(60Hz→10Hz),而且,能够把读出受光信号的光检测电路O1的个数,在图8所示的例子的情况下,减少到1/6,在图9所示的例子的情况下,减少到1/3.6。由此,可进一步降低电力消耗。As described above, according to the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 1 reads the light reception signal only from the light detection circuit O1 arranged in the operation key display area C in the low power consumption mode. Therefore, in the case of the low power consumption mode, compared with the case of the normal mode, the frequency of reading out the light-receiving signal of 1 screen can be reduced to 1/6 (60Hz→10Hz), and the readout frequency can be reduced to 1/6. The number of photodetection circuits O1 for receiving light signals is reduced to 1/6 in the case of the example shown in FIG. 8 and to 1/3.6 in the case of the example shown in FIG. 9 . Accordingly, power consumption can be further reduced.

另外,低耗电模式的情况下选择的扫描线的数量M只要是2以上m以下的整数即可。同样,在低耗电模式下使用的读出线的数量N只要是2以上n以下的整数即可。In addition, the number M of scanning lines to be selected in the low power consumption mode may be an integer of 2 or more and m or less. Likewise, the number N of readout lines used in the low power consumption mode may be an integer of 2 or more and n or less.

<实施方式B3><Embodiment B3>

在上述的实施方式B1中,说明了在通常模式下以60Hz读出1个画面数量的受光信号,在低耗电模式下以10Hz读出1个画面数量的受光信号的情况。在本实施方式中,进一步对在低耗电模式下以每10条选择1条的比例来选择扫描线的情况进行说明。In the above-mentioned embodiment B1, the case where the received light signals for one screen are read at 60 Hz in the normal mode, and the received light signals for one screen are read at 10 Hz in the low power consumption mode. In this embodiment, a case where one scanning line is selected for every ten scanning lines in the low power consumption mode will be further described.

本实施方式的液晶显示装置1与实施方式B1的情况同样,具有通常模式和低耗电模式。传感器用扫描电路500在通常模式下,逐一顺序选择设在图像显示区域A中的全部扫描线(m条),而在低耗电模式下,以每10条选择1条的比例顺序选择m条扫描线。由此,在通常模式的情况下,以60Hz从设置在图像显示区域A中的全部光检测电路O1(m×n个)中读出受光信号。而在低耗电模式的情况下,以10Hz只从m×n/10个光检测电路O1中读出受光信号。The liquid crystal display device 1 of this embodiment has a normal mode and a low power consumption mode as in the case of Embodiment B1. The sensor scanning circuit 500 sequentially selects all the scanning lines (m lines) provided in the image display area A one by one in the normal mode, and sequentially selects m lines at a rate of 1 for every 10 lines in the low power consumption mode. scan line. Thus, in the normal mode, light reception signals are read out at 60 Hz from all the photodetection circuits O1 (m×n) provided in the image display area A. FIG. On the other hand, in the case of the low power consumption mode, light reception signals are read out only from m×n/10 photodetection circuits O1 at 10 Hz.

这样,在通常模式下,由于1个画面数量的受光信号为m×n个,所以在2值化处理时生成的1个画面数量的2值化信号的个数也为m×n个。另一方面,在低耗电模式下,由于1个画面数量的受光信号为m×n/10个,所以,在2值化处理时生成的1个画面数量的2值化信号的个数也为m×n/10个。另外,在低耗电模式下,是通过对扫描线的间隔剔除使1个画面数量的2值化信号的个数为通常模式下的1/10。因此,在判定接触的有无和接近的有无时用于与计数值比较的上限值和下限值的值,在动作模式为通常模式的情况下和低耗电模式的情况下不同。In this way, in the normal mode, since there are m×n light-receiving signals for one screen, the number of binarized signals for one screen generated during the binarization process is also m×n. On the other hand, in the low power consumption mode, since the number of received light signals for one screen is m×n/10, the number of binarized signals for one screen generated during the binarization process is also It is m×n/10 pieces. In addition, in the low power consumption mode, the number of binarized signals corresponding to one screen is reduced to 1/10 of that in the normal mode by thinning out the scanning lines. Therefore, the values of the upper limit value and the lower limit value used for comparison with the count value when determining the presence or absence of contact and the presence or absence of approach are different when the operation mode is the normal mode and when the low power consumption mode is used.

图11是用于说明实施方式B3的通常模式和低耗电模式的图。另外,在该图中,在显示画面(图像显示区域A)中,显示有4行×3列的阵列状排列的共计12个显示键“1”“2”、“3”、...、“*”、“0”、“#”。另外,在图像显示区域A中,设有扫描线1至扫描线240共计240条扫描线。传感器用扫描电路500,在通常模式下,顺序逐一选择扫描线1、扫描线2、扫描线3、...、扫描线238、扫描线239、扫描线240。另外,在通常模式下,把选择240条扫描线的周期设定为60Hz。FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a normal mode and a low power consumption mode in Embodiment B3. In addition, in this figure, on the display screen (image display area A), a total of 12 display keys "1", "2", "3", . . . "*", "0", "#". In addition, in the image display area A, a total of 240 scanning lines from scanning line 1 to scanning line 240 are provided. The sensor scanning circuit 500 selects the scanning line 1, the scanning line 2, the scanning line 3, . In addition, in the normal mode, the period for selecting 240 scanning lines is set to 60 Hz.

而在低耗电模式下,传感器用扫描电路500以每10条选择1条的比例顺序选择240条扫描线。即,在低耗电模式下,传感器用扫描电路500例如逐一顺序选择扫描线10、扫描线20、扫描线30、...、扫描线220、扫描线230、扫描线240。因此,只选择240条扫描线中的24条,间隔剔除剩余的216条扫描线,不进行选择。另外在低耗电模式的情况下,把选择上述24条扫描线的周期设定为10Hz。On the other hand, in the low power consumption mode, the sensor scanning circuit 500 sequentially selects 240 scanning lines at a ratio of 1 out of 10 scanning lines. That is, in the low power consumption mode, the sensor scanning circuit 500 sequentially selects, for example, the scanning line 10 , the scanning line 20 , the scanning line 30 , . . . , the scanning line 220 , the scanning line 230 , and the scanning line 240 . Therefore, only 24 of the 240 scan lines are selected, and the remaining 216 scan lines are thinned out without selection. In addition, in the case of the low power consumption mode, the cycle for selecting the above-mentioned 24 scanning lines is set to 10 Hz.

图12是表示实施方式B3的模式切换处理7、8的流程的流程图。在动作模式是通常模式的情况下,执行该图(a)所示的模式切换处理7。另外,如上述那样,在通常模式下,以60Hz进行关于接触输入功能的1个周期的处理,而且从设置在图像显示区域A中的全部光检测电路O1读出受光信号。另外,关于图12(a)所示的模式切换处理7的流程中的步骤S701、S702、S704,由于进行与实施方式B1中说明的模式切换处理3(参照图6(a))的步骤S301、S302、S304基本同样的处理,所以在此简化说明。FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the flow of mode switching processes 7 and 8 in Embodiment B3. When the operation mode is the normal mode, the mode switching process 7 shown in (a) of the figure is executed. Also, as described above, in the normal mode, one cycle of processing related to the touch input function is performed at 60 Hz, and light reception signals are read out from all photodetection circuits O1 provided in the image display area A. In addition, steps S701, S702, and S704 in the flow of the mode switching process 7 shown in FIG. , S302, and S304 are basically the same processing, so the description will be simplified here.

控制电路300首先根据新读出的1个画面数量的受光信号(m×n个),判定有无接触(步骤S701)。另外,在步骤S701中判定为无接触的情况下,控制电路300判定连续得到无接触的判定结果的状态是否持续了预定时间(例如5分钟)(步骤S702)。另外,在步骤S702中判定为持续了预定时间的情况下,控制电路300把动作模式从通常模式切换到低耗电模式(步骤S703)。The control circuit 300 first determines the presence or absence of contact based on newly read light-receiving signals (m×n) for one screen (step S701 ). Also, when it is determined in step S701 that there is no contact, the control circuit 300 determines whether the state in which the non-contact determination result has been continuously obtained has continued for a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) (step S702 ). In addition, when it is determined in step S702 that the predetermined time has continued, the control circuit 300 switches the operation mode from the normal mode to the low power consumption mode (step S703 ).

另外,在把动作模式切换到低耗电模式时,把指示动作模式切换(→低耗电模式)的控制信号从控制电路300发送到传感器用扫描电路500和受光信号处理电路600。传感器用扫描电路500和受光信号处理电路600在接收到该控制信号后,把动作模式变更为低耗电模式。例如,在图11所示的例子的情况下,在低耗电模式下被选择的扫描线只有通常模式的情况下的1/10即24条。因此,传感器用扫描电路500为了使选择24条扫描线的周期成为10Hz,变更选择各个扫描线的定时,并且按照所变更的定时以每10条选择1条的比例,顺序选择扫描线。另外,受光信号处理电路600对应传感器用扫描电路500选择扫描线的定时,变更使用全部读出线(n条)读出受光信号的定时,并按照变更的定时进行受光信号的读出。Also, when switching the operation mode to the low power consumption mode, a control signal instructing switching of the operation mode (→ low power consumption mode) is sent from the control circuit 300 to the sensor scanning circuit 500 and the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 . The sensor scanning circuit 500 and the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 change the operation mode to the low power consumption mode after receiving the control signal. For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 11 , the number of scanning lines selected in the low power consumption mode is 1/10 of that in the normal mode, that is, 24 lines. Therefore, the scanning circuit 500 for a sensor changes the timing of selecting each scanning line so that the cycle of selecting 24 scanning lines becomes 10 Hz, and sequentially selects the scanning lines at a ratio of 1 every 10 scanning lines at the changed timing. In addition, the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 changes the timing at which the light-receiving signal is read using all the readout lines (n lines) according to the timing at which the sensor scanning circuit 500 selects the scanning line, and reads the light-receiving signal at the changed timing.

这样,在把动作模式从通常模式切换到低耗电模式后,传感器用扫描电路500和受光信号处理电路600以10Hz作为1个画面数量的受光信号从m×n/10个光检测电路O1中读出受光信号。另外,在把动作模式从通常模式切换到低耗电模式后,控制电路300把在2值化处理时使用的阈值从接触判定用阈值T变更为接近判定用阈值S(步骤S704)。In this way, after switching the operation mode from the normal mode to the low power consumption mode, the sensor scanning circuit 500 and the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 use 10 Hz as the light-receiving signal of 1 screen from the m×n/10 photodetection circuits O1 Read out the light signal. In addition, after switching the operation mode from the normal mode to the low power consumption mode, the control circuit 300 changes the threshold used in the binarization process from the contact determination threshold T to the proximity determination threshold S (step S704 ).

另一方面,在动作模式是低耗电模式的情况下执行图12(b)所示的模式切换处理8。如上述那样,在低耗电模式下,以10Hz进行关于接触输入功能的1个周期的处理,而且,作为1个画面数量的受光信号从m×n/10个光检测电路O1中读出受光信号。另外,关于图12(b)所示的模式切换处理8的流程中的步骤S801、S803,由于进行与实施方式B1中说明的模式切换处理4(参照图6(b))的步骤S401、S403基本相同的处理,所以在此简化说明。On the other hand, when the operation mode is the low power consumption mode, the mode switching process 8 shown in FIG. 12( b ) is executed. As described above, in the low power consumption mode, one cycle of processing related to the touch input function is performed at 10 Hz, and the received light signal is read out from the m×n/10 photodetection circuits O1 as light received signals for one screen. Signal. In addition, steps S801 and S803 in the flow of the mode switching process 8 shown in FIG. Basically the same processing, so the explanation is simplified here.

控制电路300首先根据新读出的1个画面数量的受光信号(m×n/10个),判定接近的有无,即手指或手写笔50是否接近了显示画面(步骤S801)。具体是,首先,控制电路300对于1个画面的各个受光信号,把其信号电平与接近判定用阈值S(具体是阈值S1或S2)进行比较,并转换成2值信号。然后,控制电路300对于生成的1个画面数量的2值化信号,例如对信号值为“1”的2值化信号的个数进行计数,在计数值是由被保存在存储器中的上限值和下限值所限定的范围内的值的情况下,判定为接近(步骤S801:是),在计数值不是上述的范围内的值的情况下,判定为非接近(步骤S801:否)。另外,与计数值比较的上限值和下限值的值不仅在接触判定的情况和接近判定的情况、液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况和暗的情况下不同,而且在动作模式为通常模式的情况和低耗电模式的情况下也不同。The control circuit 300 first determines the presence or absence of approach, that is, whether the finger or the stylus 50 has approached the display screen based on newly read light-receiving signals for one screen (m×n/10) (step S801). Specifically, first, the control circuit 300 compares the signal level of each received light signal of one screen with the threshold S for approach determination (specifically, the threshold S1 or S2), and converts it into a binary signal. Then, the control circuit 300 counts, for example, the number of binarized signals whose signal value is "1" with respect to the generated binarized signals for one screen. In the case of a value within the range defined by the count value and the lower limit value, it is determined to be close (step S801: Yes), and when the count value is not a value within the above-mentioned range, it is determined to be non-close (step S801: No). . In addition, the values of the upper limit value and the lower limit value compared with the count value are not only different in the case of contact determination and approach determination, and in the case of bright and dark around the liquid crystal display device 1, but also when the operation mode is the normal mode. The case of and the case of low power mode are also different.

在步骤S801中判定为未接近的情况下,结束模式切换处理8。而在步骤S801中判定为接近的情况下,控制电路300把动作模式从低耗电模式切换到通常模式(步骤S802)。另外,在把动作模式切换到通常模式时,把指示切换动作模式(→通常模式)的控制信号从控制电路300发送到传感器用扫描电路500和受光信号处理电路600。When it is determined in step S801 that it is not approaching, the mode switching process 8 is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S801 that it is approaching, the control circuit 300 switches the operation mode from the low power consumption mode to the normal mode (step S802 ). Also, when switching the operation mode to the normal mode, a control signal instructing to switch the operation mode (→normal mode) is sent from the control circuit 300 to the sensor scanning circuit 500 and the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 .

传感器用扫描电路500和受光信号处理电路600在接收到该控制信号后,把动作模式变更为通常模式。例如,在图11所示的例子中,在通常模式的情况下使用全部240条扫描线。因此,传感器用扫描电路500变更选择各个扫描线的定时,以便使选择240条扫描线的周期成为60Hz,并且按照变更的定时逐一顺序选择240条扫描线。另外,受光信号处理电路600对应传感器用扫描电路500选择扫描线的定时,变更使用全部读出线(n条)读出受光信号的定时,并按照变更的定时进行受光信号的读出。The sensor scanning circuit 500 and the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 change the operation mode to the normal mode after receiving the control signal. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 11 , all 240 scanning lines are used in the normal mode. Therefore, the scanning circuit 500 for a sensor changes the timing of selecting each scanning line so that the cycle of selecting 240 scanning lines becomes 60 Hz, and sequentially selects the 240 scanning lines one by one at the changed timing. In addition, the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 changes the timing at which the light-receiving signal is read using all the readout lines (n lines) according to the timing at which the sensor scanning circuit 500 selects the scanning line, and reads the light-receiving signal at the changed timing.

这样,在把动作模式从低耗电模式切换到通常模式后,传感器用扫描电路500和受光信号处理电路600以60Hz从设置在图像显示区域A中的全部光检测电路O1读出受光信号。另外,在把动作模式从低耗电模式切换到通常模式后,控制电路300把2值化处理时使用的阈值从接近判定用阈值S变更为接触判定用阈值T(步骤S803)。In this way, after switching the operation mode from the low power consumption mode to the normal mode, the sensor scanning circuit 500 and the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 read out light-receiving signals from all photodetection circuits O1 provided in the image display area A at 60 Hz. In addition, after the operation mode is switched from the low power consumption mode to the normal mode, the control circuit 300 changes the threshold used in the binarization process from the proximity determination threshold S to the contact determination threshold T (step S803 ).

如上述那样,根据本实施方式,液晶显示装置1在低耗电模式下,以每10条选择1条的比例顺序选择扫描线。因此,在低耗电模式下,与通常模式的情况相比,可将读出1个画面数量的受光信号的频度减少到1/6(60Hz→10Hz),而且,能够把读出受光信号的光检测电路O1的个数减少到1/10。由此,可进一步降低电力消耗。As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the low power consumption mode, the liquid crystal display device 1 sequentially selects one scanning line every ten scanning lines. Therefore, in the low power consumption mode, compared with the case of the normal mode, the frequency of reading out the received light signal for one screen can be reduced to 1/6 (60Hz→10Hz), and the readout of the received light signal can be The number of light detection circuits O1 is reduced to 1/10. Accordingly, power consumption can be further reduced.

另外,传感器用扫描电路500也可以构成为,在低耗电模式下,以每2条选择1条的比例、或每15条选择1条的比例,顺序选择扫描线。同样,传感器用扫描电路500只要在低耗电模式下,以每L(2以上m以下的整数)条选择1条的比例顺序选择扫描线即可。In addition, the sensor scanning circuit 500 may be configured to sequentially select scanning lines at a rate of selecting one line out of every two lines or one line out of fifteen lines in the low power consumption mode. Similarly, the scanning circuit 500 for a sensor only needs to sequentially select one scanning line at a ratio of one line per L (integer of 2 to m) in the low power consumption mode.

<实施方式C1><Embodiment C1>

下面,说明实施方式C1。Next, Embodiment C1 will be described.

另外,本实施方式的液晶显示装置的硬件结构由于与上述的实施方式B1的液晶显示装置1大致相同,所以使用与实施方式B1中相同的符号。另外,对于与实施方式B1相同的部分省略其说明。In addition, since the hardware configuration of the liquid crystal display device of the present embodiment is substantially the same as that of the liquid crystal display device 1 of the above-mentioned embodiment B1, the same symbols as in the embodiment B1 are used. In addition, the description of the same part as Embodiment B1 is abbreviate|omitted.

在上述的实施方式B1中,说明了具有通常模式(60Hz)、和低耗电模式(10Hz),变更读出1个画面数量的受光信号的周期的情况。而在本实施方式中,说明取代通常模式和低耗电模式,而具有通常读出模式和部分读出模式,变更读出受光信号的光检测电路O1的个数的情况。In the above-mentioned Embodiment B1, a case was described in which there is a normal mode (60 Hz) and a low power consumption mode (10 Hz), and the cycle for reading out light-receiving signals equal to one screen is changed. In this embodiment, instead of the normal mode and the low power consumption mode, a normal read mode and a partial read mode are provided, and a case where the number of photodetection circuits O1 for reading out received light signals is changed will be described.

本实施方式的液晶显示装置1作为受光信号的读出模式而具有通常读出模式和部分读出模式。在通常读出模式的情况下,传感器用扫描电路500和受光信号处理电路600以预定周期(例如60Hz),从设置在图像显示区域A中的全部光检测电路O1(m×n)读出受光信号。而在部分读出模式的情况下,传感器用扫描电路500和受光信号处理电路600以预定周期(例如60Hz),只从图像显示区域A中的一部分光检测电路O1读出受光信号。The liquid crystal display device 1 of the present embodiment has a normal read mode and a partial read mode as a read mode of a light-receiving signal. In the normal readout mode, the sensor scanning circuit 500 and the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 read out the received light from all the photodetection circuits O1 (m×n) provided in the image display area A at a predetermined cycle (for example, 60 Hz). Signal. On the other hand, in the partial readout mode, the sensor scanning circuit 500 and the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 read out light-receiving signals from only a part of the photodetection circuits O1 in the image display area A at a predetermined cycle (for example, 60 Hz).

因此,在通常读出模式下以60Hz读出的受光信号的个数是m×n个,而在部分读出模式的情况下以60Hz读出的受光信号的个数小于m×n个。例如,在把部分读出模式下读出受光信号的区域设定在图像显示区域A的下半部的情况下,在部分读出模式下以60Hz读出m×n/2个受光信号。这样,由于在通常读出模式的情况下是以60Hz读出m×n个受光信号,所以与此对应,也是以60Hz生成m×n个2值化信号。而在部分读出模式下,例如在把读出受光信号的区域设定在图像显示区域A的下半部的情况下,由于以60Hz读出m×n/2个受光信号,所以与此对应,也是以60Hz生成m×n/2个2值化信号。Therefore, the number of light-receiving signals read at 60 Hz in the normal read mode is m×n, while the number of light-receiving signals read at 60 Hz in the partial read mode is less than m×n. For example, in the case where the region from which light-receiving signals are read in the partial readout mode is set to the lower half of the image display region A, m×n/2 light-reception signals are read out at 60 Hz in the partial readout mode. In this way, in the normal read mode, m×n light-receiving signals are read out at 60 Hz, and accordingly, m×n binarized signals are also generated at 60 Hz. On the other hand, in the partial readout mode, for example, if the area for reading out the light-receiving signal is set in the lower half of the image display area A, since m×n/2 light-receiving signals are read out at 60 Hz, it corresponds to this , also generates m×n/2 binary signals at 60 Hz.

下面,结合图8和图9,对本实施方式的通常读出模式和部分读出模式进行说明。如也在上述的实施方式B2中说明的那样,在图8所示的画面显示例子中,在操作键显示区域C中,如果在刚启动了图像编辑软件后的阶段,则如该图所示,显示有“黑白”、“彩色”、“打开”3个操作键。用户在启动了图像编辑软件后,首先接触被显示在操作键显示区域C中的操作键的部分,选择开始以黑白模式的图画输入、以彩色模式的图画输入、或读出所保存的手写图像开始编辑等。在操作键显示区域C中进行了这样的选择操作后,能够在手写区域B进行画图。Next, the normal read mode and the partial read mode of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9 . As also described in the above-mentioned embodiment B2, in the screen display example shown in FIG. 8 , in the operation key display area C, if the image editing software is started immediately after the image editing software is started, it will be displayed as shown in the figure. , displaying 3 operation keys of "black and white", "color" and "open". After starting the image editing software, the user first touches the part of the operation key displayed in the operation key display area C, and selects to start picture input in black and white mode, picture input in color mode, or read out the saved handwritten image. Start editing etc. After such a selection operation is performed in the operation key display area C, drawing can be performed in the handwriting area B. FIG.

另外,在图像编辑软件的执行过程中,如果例如5分钟期间未进行接触输入,则液晶显示装置1为了削减电力消耗,停止手写区域B的部分的显示。由此,手写区域B的部分全部成为黑色(或白色)。此时,在操作键显示区域C中,取代上述的3个操作键,而显示例如“再编辑”、“保存”、“结束”这3个操作键。用户在再次进行手写图像的输入的情况下,接触“再编辑”键。另外,在保存所输入的手写图像的情况下,接触“保存”键。另外,在不保存所输入的手写图像并结束图像编辑软件的情况下,接触“结束”键。这样,一旦停止了手写区域B的部分的显示,则以后在进行任何操作时,用户必须接触操作键显示区域C的部分。因此,在停止手写输入区域B的部分的显示的期间中,只对操作键显示区域C的部分进行接触判定和接近判定即可。因此,在本实施方式的液晶显示装置1中,在未停止手写输入区域B的部分的显示的情况下,把受光信号的动作模式切换到通常模式,在停止了手写输入区域B的部分的显示的情况下,把受光信号的动作模式切换到部分读出模式。Also, if there is no touch input for, for example, 5 minutes during the execution of the image editing software, the liquid crystal display device 1 stops the display of the handwriting area B in order to reduce power consumption. As a result, the entire part of the handwriting area B becomes black (or white). At this time, in the operation key display area C, instead of the above three operation keys, for example, three operation keys "reedit", "save", and "end" are displayed. When the user performs input of the handwritten image again, the user touches the "re-edit" key. In addition, to save the input handwritten image, touch the "Save" key. In addition, the "END" key is touched to end the image editing software without saving the input handwritten image. In this way, once the display of the part of the handwriting area B is stopped, the user must touch the part of the operation key display area C when performing any operation in the future. Therefore, while the display of the portion of the handwriting input area B is stopped, only the contact determination and proximity determination of the portion of the operation key display area C may be performed. Therefore, in the liquid crystal display device 1 of the present embodiment, when the display of the part of the handwriting input area B is not stopped, the operation mode of the light receiving signal is switched to the normal mode, and the display of the part of the handwriting input area B is stopped. In this case, switch the operation mode of the light-receiving signal to the partial readout mode.

另外,在图8所示的例子情况下,图像显示区域A(显示画面)中设有240条扫描线和180条读出线。传感器用扫描电路500在通常读出模式的情况下顺序逐一选择240条扫描线。即,传感器用扫描电路500按照扫描线1、扫描线2、扫描线3、...、扫描线238、扫描线239、扫描线240的顺序,逐一顺序选择全部的扫描线。而在部分读出模式下,传感器用扫描电路500只逐一顺序选择与操作键显示区域C的部分对应的从扫描线201到扫描线240的共计40条扫描线。即,传感器用扫描电路500顺序选择扫描线201、扫描线202、扫描线203、...、扫描线238、扫描线239、扫描线240,不选择从扫描线1到扫描线200的剩余其他200条扫描线。另外,在图8所示的例子的情况下,受光信号处理电路600无论是在通常读出模式下还是在部分读出模式下,都使用全部180条读出线进行受光信号的读出。In addition, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 8 , 240 scanning lines and 180 readout lines are provided in the image display area A (display screen). The sensor scanning circuit 500 sequentially selects 240 scanning lines one by one in the normal read mode. That is, the scanning circuit 500 for a sensor sequentially selects all scanning lines one by one in the order of scanning line 1 , scanning line 2 , scanning line 3 , . . . , scanning line 238 , scanning line 239 , and scanning line 240 . On the other hand, in the partial readout mode, the sensor scanning circuit 500 sequentially selects only a total of 40 scanning lines from the scanning line 201 to the scanning line 240 corresponding to the part of the operation key display area C. That is, the scanning circuit 500 for a sensor sequentially selects the scanning line 201, the scanning line 202, the scanning line 203, ..., the scanning line 238, the scanning line 239, and the scanning line 240, and does not select the remaining lines from the scanning line 1 to the scanning line 200. 200 scan lines. In addition, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 8 , the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 reads out the light-receiving signal using all 180 readout lines regardless of whether it is in the normal readout mode or the partial readout mode.

其结果,在图8所示的例子的情况下,在通常读出模式下,从与240条扫描线和180条读出线对应的共计43200个光检测电路O1(从设置在图像显示区域A中的全部光检测电路O1)读出受光信号。另一方面,在部分读出模式下,只从与扫描线201至扫描线240的40条扫描线和180条读出线对应的共计7200个光检测电路O1(排列在操作键显示区域C内的光检测电路O1)读出受光信号。因此,在部分读出模式下,读出受光信号的光检测电路O1的个数是通常读出模式下的1/6。As a result, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 8 , in the normal readout mode, a total of 43200 photodetection circuits O1 corresponding to 240 scanning lines and 180 readout lines (provided in the image display area A All the photodetection circuits O1) read out the received light signal. On the other hand, in the partial readout mode, only 7200 photodetection circuits O1 (arranged in the operation key display area C) corresponding to 40 scan lines from scan line 201 to scan line 240 and 180 readout lines in total The light detection circuit O1) reads out the light signal. Therefore, in the partial read mode, the number of photodetection circuits O1 that read out the received light signal is 1/6 of that in the normal read mode.

另外,在图9所示的例子的情况下,也是在通常读出模式下,从设置在图像显示区域A中的全部光检测电路O1读出受光信号。而在部分读出模式下,只从被排列在操作键显示区域C内的光检测电路O1读出受光信号。即,在图9所示的例子中,在部分读出模式下,传感器用扫描电路500与通常读出模式同样逐一顺序选择全部240条扫描线,但受光信号处理电路600只使用180条读出线中与操作键显示区域C的部分对应的读出线1至读出线50的共计50条读出线进行受光信号的读出。其结果,在图9所示的例子中,在部分读出模式的情况下,只从与240条扫描线和50条读出线对应的共计12000个光检测电路O1中读出受光信号。因此,读出受光信号的光检测电路O1的个数为通常读出模式下的1/3.6。Also in the case of the example shown in FIG. 9 , light reception signals are read from all the photodetection circuits O1 provided in the image display area A in the normal readout mode. On the other hand, in the partial readout mode, only light-receiving signals are read out from the photodetection circuits O1 arranged in the operation key display area C. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 9 , in the partial readout mode, the sensor scanning circuit 500 sequentially selects all 240 scanning lines as in the normal readout mode, but the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 uses only 180 readout lines. A total of 50 readout lines from the readout line 1 to the readout line 50 corresponding to the portion of the operation key display area C among the lines read out the received light signal. As a result, in the example shown in FIG. 9 , in the partial readout mode, only light reception signals are read out from a total of 12000 photodetection circuits O1 corresponding to 240 scanning lines and 50 readout lines. Therefore, the number of photodetection circuits O1 that read out the light-receiving signal is 1/3.6 of that in the normal readout mode.

另外,除了图8和图9所示的例以外,也可以构成为,在部分读出模式下,只从与扫描线1至扫描线60的60条扫描线、和读出线1至读出线90的90条读出线对应的共计5400个光检测电路O1读出受光信号。在这种情况下,在部分读出模式下,传感器用扫描电路500只逐一顺序选择扫描线1至扫描线60的60条扫描线,受光信号处理电路600只使用读出线1至读出线90的共计90条读出线读出受光信号。In addition, in addition to the examples shown in FIGS. 8 and 9 , in the partial readout mode, only 60 scan lines from scan line 1 to scan line 60 and readout lines 1 to 60 can be configured. A total of 5400 photodetection circuits O1 corresponding to the 90 readout lines of the line 90 read out the received light signals. In this case, in the partial read mode, the sensor scanning circuit 500 sequentially selects only the 60 scanning lines from scanning line 1 to scanning line 60 one by one, and the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 uses only the reading lines 1 to 60. A total of 90 readout lines of 90 read out received light signals.

这样,传感器用扫描电路500和受光信号处理电路600在通常读出模式下和部分读出模式下的动作不同。传感器用扫描电路500在通常读出模式下逐一顺序选择全部的扫描线,但在部分读出模式的情况下,只逐一顺序选择与操作键显示区域C的部分对应的多条扫描线(例如,在图8所示的例子中是扫描线201~扫描线240)。另外,受光信号处理电路600在通常读出模式的情况下,使用全部读出线进行受光信号的读出,但在部分读出模式的情况下,只使用与操作键显示区域C的部分对应的多个读出线(例如在图9所示的例子中,是读出线1~读出线50)进行受光信号的读出。因此,控制电路300把指示切换读出模式的控制信号输出给传感器用扫描电路500和受光信号处理电路600,控制两电路500、600的动作。Thus, the operation of the sensor scanning circuit 500 and the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 differs between the normal read mode and the partial read mode. The sensor scanning circuit 500 sequentially selects all the scanning lines one by one in the normal read mode, but in the case of the partial read mode, only a plurality of scanning lines corresponding to the part of the operation key display area C (for example, In the example shown in FIG. 8 , the scan lines 201 to 240). In addition, the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 reads out the light-receiving signal using all the readout lines in the normal readout mode, but only uses the line corresponding to the part of the operation key display area C in the partial readout mode. A plurality of readout lines (eg, readout line 1 to readout line 50 in the example shown in FIG. 9 ) read out received light signals. Therefore, the control circuit 300 outputs a control signal instructing switching of the reading mode to the sensor scanning circuit 500 and the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 to control the operations of the two circuits 500 , 600 .

另外,本实施方式液晶显示装置1,以预定周期(例如120Hz或60Hz)进行关于接触输入功能的1个周期的处理,即:从设置在图像显示区域A中的全部光检测电路O1或排列在操作键显示区域C内的光检测电路O1读出受光信号,根据读出的受光信号,判定接触的有无和接近的有无,在判定为有接触的情况下检测其接触位置。另外,在本实施方式中,以60Hz进行上述的1个周期的处理。In addition, the liquid crystal display device 1 of the present embodiment performs one cycle of processing related to the touch input function at a predetermined cycle (for example, 120 Hz or 60 Hz), that is, from all the photodetection circuits O1 provided in the image display area A or arranged in the The light detection circuit O1 in the operation key display area C reads out the light receiving signal, judges the presence or absence of contact and the presence or absence of approach based on the read out light receiving signal, and detects the contact position if it is judged to be in contact. In addition, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned one-cycle processing is performed at 60 Hz.

图13是表示实施方式C1的模式切换处理9、10的流程的流程图。在受光信号的读出模式是通常读出模式的情况下,执行该图(a)所示的模式切换处理9。另外,在液晶显示装置1中,例如,当用户启动了上述的图像编辑软件时,在开始了接触输入的受理后,把受光信号的读出模式切换到通常读出模式。另外,如上述那样,在通常读出模式下,从设置在图像显示区域A中的全部光检测电路O1读出受光信号。FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of mode switching processes 9 and 10 in Embodiment C1. When the readout mode of the light-receiving signal is the normal readout mode, the mode switching process 9 shown in (a) of the figure is executed. In addition, in the liquid crystal display device 1 , for example, when the user starts the above-mentioned image editing software and starts accepting the touch input, the readout mode of the received light signal is switched to the normal readout mode. In addition, as described above, in the normal readout mode, light reception signals are read out from all the photodetection circuits O1 provided in the image display area A. FIG.

控制电路300首先根据新读出的1个画面数量的受光信号(m×n个)判定有无接触,即手指或手写笔与显示画面是接触还是非接触(步骤S901)。The control circuit 300 first judges the presence or absence of contact, that is, whether the finger or the stylus is in contact with the display screen or not (step S901 ) based on the newly read light receiving signals for one screen (m×n).

具体的是,首先,控制电路300对于1个画面数量的各个受光信号,把其信号电平与接触判定用阈值T(具体是T1或T2)进行比较,并转换成2值化信号。另外,这里使用的阈值T基本上是通过后述的模式切换处理10中的步骤S1003设定的,但在根据环境光的测定结果,在液晶显示装置1周围从亮的状态变化到暗的状态的情况下、和从暗的状态变化到亮的状态的情况下,在阈值T1和阈值T2之间适当变更。即,在液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况下使用阈值T1,在液晶显示装置1周围暗的情况下使用阈值T2。然后,控制电路300对于生成的1个画面数量的2值化信号(m×n个),例如对信号值为“1”的2值化信号的个数进行计数,在计数值是由被保存在存储器中的上限值和下限值所限定的范围内的值的情况下,判定为有接触(步骤S901:否),在计数值不是上述的范围内的值的情况下,判定为无接触(步骤S901:是)。另外,如上述那样,在液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况和暗的情况下,或在接触判定的情况下和接近判定的情况下,用于与计数值比较的上限值和下限值不同。Specifically, first, the control circuit 300 compares the signal level of each received light signal corresponding to one screen with the threshold T (specifically, T1 or T2 ) for contact determination, and converts them into binarized signals. In addition, the threshold value T used here is basically set in step S1003 in the mode switching process 10 described later, but changes from a bright state to a dark state around the liquid crystal display device 1 based on the measurement result of ambient light. In the case of , and in the case of changing from a dark state to a bright state, the threshold T1 and the threshold T2 are appropriately changed. That is, the threshold T1 is used when the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are bright, and the threshold T2 is used when the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are dark. Then, the control circuit 300 counts, for example, the number of binarized signals whose signal value is "1" for the generated binarized signals (m×n) per screen, and the counted value is stored by In the case of a value within the range defined by the upper limit value and the lower limit value in the memory, it is determined that there is contact (step S901: No), and when the count value is not a value within the above-mentioned range, it is determined that there is no contact. Contact (step S901: Yes). In addition, as described above, the upper limit value and the lower limit value used for comparison with the count value are different when the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are bright and dark, or in the case of contact determination and proximity determination. .

在步骤S901中,在判定为有接触的情况下,结束模式切换处理9。此时,受光信号的读出模式仍维持通常读出模式。另外,在这样判定为有接触的情况下,控制电路300在结束了模式切换处理9后,进行接触位置的检测。在该接触位置的检测时,使用在步骤S901中判定接触的有无时所生成的1个画面数量的2值化信号。另外,在检测出接触位置的情况下,如果检测出的接触位置位于手写输入区域B内,则控制电路300根据检测出的接触位置,更新手写图像的显示。In step S901, when it is determined that there is contact, the mode switching process 9 ends. At this time, the readout mode of the light-receiving signal remains the normal readout mode. In addition, when it is determined that there is contact in this way, the control circuit 300 detects the contact position after completing the mode switching process 9 . When detecting the contact position, binarized signals for one screen generated when determining the presence or absence of contact in step S901 are used. In addition, when the contact position is detected, if the detected contact position is within the handwriting input area B, the control circuit 300 updates the display of the handwriting image according to the detected contact position.

另一方面,在步骤S901中判定为无接触的情况下,控制电路300判定连续得到无接触的判定结果的状态是否持续了预定时间(例如5分钟)(步骤S902)。另外,由于以60Hz执行关于接触输入功能的1个周期的处理,所以以60Hz得到步骤S901的判定结果。因此,控制电路300只要对连续得到无接触的判定结果的次数进行计数,判定该计数值是否达到了与上述的预定时间相当的次数即可。另外,预定时间可以设定为60秒、30分钟等任意时间宽度。On the other hand, when it is determined in step S901 that there is no contact, the control circuit 300 determines whether the state in which the non-contact determination result has been continuously obtained has continued for a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) (step S902 ). In addition, since one cycle of processing related to the touch input function is performed at 60 Hz, the determination result of step S901 is obtained at 60 Hz. Therefore, the control circuit 300 only needs to count the number of times that non-contact determination results are continuously obtained, and determine whether or not the count value has reached the number of times corresponding to the aforementioned predetermined time. In addition, the predetermined time may be set to an arbitrary time width such as 60 seconds or 30 minutes.

在步骤S902中判定为未持续预定时间的情况下,结束模式切换处理9。此时受光信号的读出模式也维持为通常读出模式。而在步骤S902中判定为持续了预定时间的情况下,控制电路300把受光信号的读出模式从通常读出模式切换到部分读出模式(步骤S903)。另外,在把读出模式切换到部分读出模式时,把指示读出模式的切换(→部分读出模式)的控制信号从控制电路300发送到传感器用扫描电路500和受光信号处理电路600。When it is determined in step S902 that the predetermined time has not continued, the mode switching process 9 ends. At this time, the readout mode of the received light signal is also maintained as the normal readout mode. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S902 that the predetermined time has elapsed, the control circuit 300 switches the readout mode of the light-receiving signal from the normal readout mode to the partial readout mode (step S903 ). Also, when switching the readout mode to the partial readout mode, a control signal instructing the switchover of the readout mode (→partial readout mode) is sent from the control circuit 300 to the sensor scanning circuit 500 and the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 .

传感器用扫描电路500和受光信号处理电路600在接收到该控制信号后,把读出模式变更为部分读出模式。例如,在图8所示的例子的情况下,传感器用扫描电路500,在切换到部分读出模式后,只逐一顺序选择扫描线201至扫描线240的40条扫描线。另外,在图9所示的例子的情况下,受光信号处理电路600,在切换到部分读出模式后,只使用读出线1至读出线读出线50的50条读出线进行受光信号的读出。这样在把受光信号的读出模式从通常读出模式切换到部分读出模式后,读出受光信号的光检测电路O1,从设置在图像显示区域A中的全部光检测电路O1被变更为只被排列在操作键显示区域C内的光检测电路O1。The sensor scanning circuit 500 and the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 change the readout mode to the partial readout mode after receiving the control signal. For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 8 , the sensor scanning circuit 500 sequentially selects only 40 scanning lines from scanning line 201 to scanning line 240 one by one after switching to the partial readout mode. In addition, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 9, the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600, after switching to the partial readout mode, uses only 50 readout lines from the readout line 1 to the readout line 50 to receive light. signal readout. In this way, after switching the readout mode of the light-receiving signal from the normal readout mode to the partial readout mode, the photodetection circuit O1 for reading the light-reception signal is changed from all the photodetection circuits O1 arranged in the image display area A to only The light detection circuit O1 is arranged in the operation key display area C.

另外,这样持续预定时间连续检测到手指或手写笔50处于与显示画面非接触状态的情况,是在上述的图像编辑软件的执行过程中将要停止手写输入区域B的部分的显示的情况。因此,控制电路300在把受光信号的读出模式切换到部分读出模式后,把在2值化处理时使用的阈值从接触判定用阈值T变更为接近判定用阈值S(步骤S904)。由于如上述那样在液晶显示装置1内的储存器中保存有接触判定用阈值T1、T2和接近判定用阈值S1、S2,所以,控制电路300根据环境光的测定结果,判别液晶显示装置1周围的亮度,在液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况下,从存储器中读出接近判定用阈值S1,把该阈值S1设定为在2值化处理时使用的阈值。另外,控制电路300在液晶显示装置1周围暗的情况下,从存储器中读出接近判定用阈值S2,把该阈值S2设定为在2值化处理时使用的阈值。In addition, if the finger or the stylus 50 is detected continuously for a predetermined time without contact with the display screen, it means that the display of the handwriting input area B will be stopped during the execution of the above-mentioned image editing software. Therefore, after the control circuit 300 switches the readout mode of the light-receiving signal to the partial readout mode, the threshold used in the binarization process is changed from the contact determination threshold T to the approach determination threshold S (step S904 ). Since the contact determination thresholds T1 and T2 and the proximity determination thresholds S1 and S2 are stored in the memory in the liquid crystal display device 1 as described above, the control circuit 300 judges the surrounding area of the liquid crystal display device 1 based on the measurement result of ambient light. When the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are bright, the proximity determination threshold S1 is read from the memory, and this threshold S1 is set as the threshold used in the binarization process. Also, when the surrounding of the liquid crystal display device 1 is dark, the control circuit 300 reads the approach determination threshold S2 from the memory, and sets the threshold S2 as a threshold used in the binarization process.

另一方面,在受光信号的读出模式是部分读出模式的情况下执行图13(b)所示的模式切换处理10。如上述那样,在部分读出模式下,只从被排列在操作键显示区域C内的光检测电路O1读出受光信号。控制电路300,首先根据从操作键显示区域C内的各个光检测电路O1读出的受光信号判定接近的有无,即手指或手写笔50是否接近了操作键显示区域C(步骤S1001)。On the other hand, when the readout mode of the light-receiving signal is the partial readout mode, the mode switching process 10 shown in FIG. 13( b ) is executed. As described above, in the partial readout mode, only light-receiving signals are read out from the photodetection circuits O1 arranged in the operation key display region C. FIG. The control circuit 300 firstly judges the presence or absence of proximity, that is, whether the finger or the stylus 50 has approached the operation key display area C according to the light-receiving signal read from each light detection circuit O1 in the operation key display area C (step S1001).

具体是,首先,控制电路300,对读出的各个受光信号,把其信号电平与接近判定用阈值S(具体是阈值S1或S2)进行比较,并转换成2值信号。另外,这里使用的阈值S虽然基本上是在上述的模式切换处理9的步骤S904中设定的,但在根据环境光的测定结果,在液晶显示装置1周围从亮的状态变化到暗的状态的情况下、和从暗的状态变化到亮的状态下,在阈值S1与阈值S2之间适当地进行变更。即,在液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况下使用阈值S1,在液晶显示装置1周围暗的情况下使用阈值S2。然后,控制电路300对于生成的2值化信号,例如对信号值为“1”的2值化信号的个数进行计数,在计数值是由被保存在存储器中的上限值和下限值所限定的范围内的值的情况下,判定为有接近(步骤S1001:是),在计数值不是上述的范围内的值的情况下,判定为无接近(步骤S1001:否)。另外,如上述那样,在液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况和暗的情况下,或接触判定的情况下和接近判定的情况下,用于与计数值比较的上限值和下限值不同。Specifically, first, the control circuit 300 compares the signal level of each read-out received light signal with the approach judgment threshold S (specifically, the threshold S1 or S2 ), and converts it into a binary signal. In addition, although the threshold S used here is basically set in step S904 of the above-mentioned mode switching process 9, it changes from a bright state to a dark state around the liquid crystal display device 1 according to the measurement result of ambient light. In the case of changing from a dark state to a bright state, the threshold S1 and the threshold S2 are appropriately changed. That is, the threshold S1 is used when the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are bright, and the threshold S2 is used when the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are dark. Then, the control circuit 300 counts the generated binarized signal, for example, the number of binarized signals whose signal value is "1". When the value is within the limited range, it is determined that there is proximity (step S1001: Yes), and when the count value is not a value within the above-mentioned range, it is determined that there is no proximity (step S1001: No). Also, as described above, the upper limit value and the lower limit value for comparison with the count value differ between bright and dark surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 , or between contact determination and proximity determination.

在步骤S1001中,在判定为未接近的情况下,结束模式切换处理10。此时,受光信号的读出模式仍维持部分读出模式。而在步骤S1001中判定为接近的情况下,控制电路300把受光信号的读出模式从部分读出模式切换到通常读出模式(步骤S1002)。另外,在把读出模式切换到通常读出模式时,把指示切换读出模式(→通常读出模式)的控制信号从控制电路300发送到传感器用扫描电路500和受光信号处理电路600。In step S1001, when it is determined that it is not approaching, the mode switching process 10 is ended. At this time, the readout mode of the light-receiving signal still maintains the partial readout mode. On the other hand, when it is judged to be close in step S1001, the control circuit 300 switches the readout mode of the light-receiving signal from the partial readout mode to the normal readout mode (step S1002). Also, when switching the readout mode to the normal readout mode, a control signal instructing to switch the readout mode (→normal readout mode) is sent from the control circuit 300 to the sensor scanning circuit 500 and the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 .

传感器用扫描电路500和受光信号处理电路600在接收到该控制信号后,把读出模式变更为通常读出模式。其结果,传感器用扫描电路500逐一顺序选择全部的扫描线,受光信号处理电路600使用全部的读出线进行受光信号的读出。因此,在把受光信号的读出模式从部分读出模式切换到通常读出模式后,成为从设置在图像显示区域A中的全部光检测电路O1读出受光信号的状态。The sensor scanning circuit 500 and the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 change the readout mode to the normal readout mode after receiving the control signal. As a result, the sensor scanning circuit 500 sequentially selects all the scanning lines one by one, and the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 reads out the light-receiving signal using all the readout lines. Therefore, when the readout mode of the light-receiving signal is switched from the partial readout mode to the normal readout mode, the light-receiving signal is read from all the photodetection circuits O1 provided in the image display area A.

另外,这样,检测到手指或手写笔50接近了显示画面(操作键显示区域C)附近的情况,是在上述的图像编辑软件的执行过程中停止了手写输入区域B的部分的显示后,用户为了进行任意操作而将要接触操作键显示区域C的部分的情况。因此,控制电路300在把受光信号的读出模式切换到通常读出模式后,把在2值化处理时使用的阈值从接近判定用阈值S变更为接触判定用阈值T(步骤S1003)。In addition, in this way, when it is detected that the finger or the stylus 50 has approached the vicinity of the display screen (operation key display area C), after the display of the part of the handwriting input area B is stopped during the execution of the above-mentioned image editing software, the user When the part of the operation key display area C is about to be touched in order to perform an arbitrary operation. Therefore, the control circuit 300 changes the threshold value used in the binarization process from the proximity determination threshold S to the contact determination threshold T after switching the light-receiving signal readout mode to the normal readout mode (step S1003).

如上述那样,由于在液晶显示装置1内的存储器中保存有接触判定用阈值T1、T2和接近判定用阈值S1、S2,所以,控制电路300根据环境光的测定结果,判断液晶显示装置1周围的亮度,在液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况下,从存储器中读出接触判定用阈值T1,把该阈值T1设定为在2值化处理时使用的阈值。另外,控制电路300在液晶显示装置1周围暗的情况下,从存储器中读出阈值T2,把该阈值T2设定为2值化处理时使用的阈值。As described above, since the contact determination thresholds T1 and T2 and the proximity determination thresholds S1 and S2 are stored in the memory in the liquid crystal display device 1, the control circuit 300 judges the surrounding area of the liquid crystal display device 1 based on the measurement result of ambient light. When the brightness around the liquid crystal display device 1 is bright, the threshold value T1 for contact determination is read from the memory, and this threshold value T1 is set as the threshold value used in the binarization process. Also, when the surrounding of the liquid crystal display device 1 is dark, the control circuit 300 reads the threshold T2 from the memory, and sets the threshold T2 as a threshold used in the binarization process.

如以上说明的那样,根据本实施方式,液晶显示装置1在检测到手指或手写笔50持续预定时间与显示画面非接触的情况时,把受光信号的读出模式从通常读出模式切换到部分读出模式,从被排列在操作键显示区域C内的光检测电路O1读出受光信号。另外,液晶显示装置1在检测到手指或手写笔50接近了显示画面(操作键显示区域C)的附近的情况时,把受光信号的读出模式从部分读出模式切换到通常读出模式,从显示画面中所具备的全部光检测电路O1读出受光信号。因此,在从检测到手指或手写笔50持续预定时间与显示画面非接触的情况开始之后到检测到手指或手写笔50接近了显示画面(操作键显示区域C)附近的情况的期间,只从被排列在操作键显示区域C内的光检测电路O1读出受光信号,因此,可减少读出受光信号的光检测电路O1的个数。因此,可减轻受光信号的读出和2值化处理所需要的处理负荷,降低液晶显示装置1的电力消耗。As described above, according to the present embodiment, when the liquid crystal display device 1 detects that the finger or the stylus 50 is not in contact with the display screen for a predetermined period of time, the readout mode of the light-receiving signal is switched from the normal readout mode to the partial readout mode. In the read mode, a light reception signal is read from the light detection circuit O1 arranged in the operation key display area C. In addition, when the liquid crystal display device 1 detects that the finger or the stylus 50 has approached the vicinity of the display screen (operation key display area C), the readout mode of the light-receiving signal is switched from the partial readout mode to the normal readout mode, Light-receiving signals are read out from all the photodetection circuits O1 included in the display screen. Therefore, during the period from when the finger or the stylus 50 is not in contact with the display screen for a predetermined period of time is detected to when the finger or the stylus 50 approaches the vicinity of the display screen (operation key display area C) is detected, only from The photodetection circuits O1 arranged in the operation key display area C read out the received light signals, so that the number of photodetector circuits O1 for reading out the received light signals can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load required for reading out and binarizing the received light signal can be reduced, and the power consumption of the liquid crystal display device 1 can be reduced.

而且,在从检测到手指或手写笔50接近了显示画面(操作键显示区域C)的附近的情况到之后检测到手指或手写笔50持续预定时间与显示画面非接触的情况的期间,从显示画面中所具备的全部光检测电路O1读出受光信号。因此,可进行把显示画面整体作为对象的接触判定和接触位置的检测。Furthermore, during the period from when the finger or the stylus 50 approaches the vicinity of the display screen (the operation key display area C) is detected to when the finger or the stylus 50 is not in contact with the display screen for a predetermined period of time is detected thereafter, from the display All the photodetection circuits O1 included in the screen read out received light signals. Therefore, it is possible to perform touch determination and touch position detection targeting the entire display screen.

另外,关于在部分读出模式的情况下所选择的扫描线的数量M,只要是2以上m以下的整数即可。同样,关于在部分读出模式下使用的读出线的数量N,只要是2以上n以下的整数即可。In addition, the number M of scanning lines to be selected in the case of the partial read mode may be any integer not less than 2 and not more than m. Likewise, the number N of readout lines used in the partial readout mode may be any integer not less than 2 and not more than n.

<实施方式C2><Embodiment C2>

在上述的实施方式C1中,传感器用扫描电路500也可以构成为,在受光信号的读出模式是部分读出模式的情况下,以每L(2≤L≤M)条选择1条的比例顺序选择成为选择对象的M(2≤M≤m)条扫描线。In the above-mentioned Embodiment C1, the scanning circuit 500 for a sensor may be configured so that, when the readout mode of the light-receiving signal is the partial readout mode, one is selected for every L (2≤L≤M) lines. M (2≤M≤m) scanning lines to be selected are sequentially selected.

例如,在图8所示的例子中,传感器用扫描电路500,在部分读出模式下,以每2条选择1条的比例顺序选择扫描线201至扫描线240的40条扫描线。在这种情况下,传感器用扫描电路500,例如按照扫描线201、扫描线203、扫描线205、...、扫描线235、扫描线237、扫描线239的顺序,逐一选择扫描线。因此,只选择成为选择对象的40条扫描线中的20条,间隔剔除剩余的20条扫描线不进行选择。另外,如果是图9所示的例,则传感器用扫描电路500在部分读出模式的情况下,以每10条选择1条的比例顺序选择扫描线1至扫描线240的240条扫描线。在这种情况下,传感器用扫描电路500例如顺序选择扫描线10、扫描线20、扫描线30、...、扫描线220、扫描线230、扫描线240。因此,只选择成为选择对象的240条扫描线中的24条,间隔剔除剩余的216条扫描线不进行选择。For example, in the example shown in FIG. 8 , the sensor scanning circuit 500 sequentially selects 40 scanning lines from scanning line 201 to scanning line 240 at a ratio of one for every two in the partial readout mode. In this case, the sensor scanning circuit 500 selects scanning lines one by one, for example, in the order of scanning line 201 , scanning line 203 , scanning line 205 , . . . , scanning line 235 , scanning line 237 , and scanning line 239 . Therefore, only 20 of the 40 scanning lines to be selected are selected, and the remaining 20 scanning lines are thinned out and not selected. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 9 , the sensor scanning circuit 500 sequentially selects 240 scanning lines from scanning line 1 to scanning line 240 at a rate of selecting one for every 10 in the partial readout mode. In this case, the sensor scanning circuit 500 selects, for example, the scanning line 10 , the scanning line 20 , the scanning line 30 , . . . , the scanning line 220 , the scanning line 230 , and the scanning line 240 . Therefore, only 24 of the 240 scanning lines to be selected are selected, and the remaining 216 scanning lines are thinned out and not selected.

上述的结构由于在部分读出模式的情况下,能够把读出受光信号的光检测电路O1的个数,相比实施方式C1的情况进一步减少到1/L,所以可进一步减少电力消耗。The above-mentioned configuration can further reduce the number of photodetection circuits O1 for reading out light-receiving signals to 1/L in the case of the partial readout mode, so that power consumption can be further reduced.

<实施方式D1><Embodiment D1>

下面说明实施方式D1。另外,由于本实施方式的液晶显示装置的硬件结构与上述实施方式B1的液晶显示装置1大致相同,所以,使用与实施方式B1相同的符号。另外,对于与实施方式B1相同的部分省略其说明。Embodiment D1 will be described below. In addition, since the hardware configuration of the liquid crystal display device of the present embodiment is substantially the same as that of the liquid crystal display device 1 of the above-mentioned embodiment B1, the same symbols as those of the embodiment B1 are used. In addition, the description of the same part as Embodiment B1 is abbreviate|omitted.

在上述的实施方式B1中,说明了具有通常模式(60Hz)和低耗电模式(10Hz),变更读出1个画面数量的受光信号的周期的情况。而在本实施方式中,说明取代通常模式和低耗电模式,而具有通常模式和间隔剔除模式,变更读出受光信号的光检测电路O1的个数的情况。In the above-mentioned embodiment B1, a case was described in which there is a normal mode (60 Hz) and a low power consumption mode (10 Hz), and the cycle for reading out light-receiving signals equal to one screen is changed. In this embodiment, instead of the normal mode and the low power consumption mode, there will be described a case where a normal mode and a thinning mode are provided, and the number of photodetection circuits O1 that read out received light signals is changed.

在本实施方式中,传感器用扫描电路500具有逐一顺序选择m条扫描线的通常模式、和以每10条选择1条的比例顺序选择m条扫描线的间隔剔除模式,按照来自控制电路300的指示,以任意一方的动作模式动作。另外,受光信号处理电路600,在由传感器用扫描电路500选择了扫描线时,从与被选择的扫描线连接的n个光检测电路O1,通过n条读出线读出受光信号X1、X2、X3、X4、...、Xn,并把其提供给控制电路300。In the present embodiment, the sensor scanning circuit 500 has a normal mode for sequentially selecting m scanning lines one by one, and a thinning mode for sequentially selecting m scanning lines at a rate of one out of ten. Instruct and operate in either operation mode. In addition, the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600, when a scanning line is selected by the sensor scanning circuit 500, reads out the light-receiving signals X1 and X2 from the n photodetection circuits O1 connected to the selected scanning line through n readout lines. , X3, X4, . . . , Xn, and provide them to the control circuit 300.

控制电路300控制传感器用扫描电路500和受光信号处理电路600,以预定周期(例如60Hz)读出1个画面数量的受光信号。另外,传感器用扫描电路500在通常模式的情况下,由于1个画面数量的受光信号为m×n个,所以,与此对应也生成m×n个2值化信号。另一方面,传感器用扫描电路500在间隔剔除模式下,由于1个画面数量的受光信号成为m×n/10,所以,与此对应,也生成m×n/10个2值化信号。The control circuit 300 controls the sensor scanning circuit 500 and the light-receiving signal processing circuit 600 to read light-receiving signals for one screen at a predetermined cycle (for example, 60 Hz). In addition, since the sensor scanning circuit 500 has m×n light-receiving signals corresponding to one screen in the normal mode, m×n binarized signals are also generated accordingly. On the other hand, in the thinning mode, the sensor scanning circuit 500 generates m×n/10 binarized signals correspondingly to m×n/10 received light signals for one screen.

下面,结合图11,对本实施方式的通常模式和间隔剔除模式进行说明。如在上述的实施方式B3中说明的那样,在图11中,在显示画面(图像显示区域A)中,显示有4行×3列的阵列状排列的共计12个显示键。另外,在图像显示区域A中,设有扫描线1至扫描线240共计240条扫描线。传感器用扫描电路500,在通常模式下,顺序逐一选择240条扫描线。即,传感器用扫描电路500逐一顺序选择扫描线1、扫描线2、扫描线3、...、扫描线238、扫描线239、扫描线240的全部的扫描线。而在间隔剔除模式下,传感器用扫描电路500以每10条选择1条的比例顺序选择240条扫描线。即,在间隔剔除模式下,传感器用扫描电路500例如逐一顺序选择扫描线10、扫描线20、扫描线30、...、扫描线220、扫描线230、扫描线240。因此,在间隔剔除模式下,只选择240条扫描线中的24条,剔除剩余的216条扫描线不进行选择。这样,传感器用扫描电路500能够在通常模式和间隔剔除模式下动作,在从控制电路300接收到指示切换动作模式的控制信号时,切换到该控制信号所指示的动作模式。Next, the normal mode and the thinning mode of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 11 . As described in Embodiment B3 above, in FIG. 11 , a total of 12 display keys arranged in an array of 4 rows×3 columns are displayed on the display screen (image display area A). In addition, in the image display area A, a total of 240 scanning lines from scanning line 1 to scanning line 240 are provided. The sensor scanning circuit 500 sequentially selects 240 scanning lines one by one in the normal mode. That is, the sensor scanning circuit 500 sequentially selects all the scanning lines of the scanning line 1 , the scanning line 2 , the scanning line 3 , . . . , the scanning line 238 , the scanning line 239 , and the scanning line 240 . On the other hand, in the thinning mode, the scanning circuit 500 for a sensor sequentially selects 240 scanning lines at a ratio of 1 for every 10 lines. That is, in the thinning mode, the sensor scanning circuit 500 sequentially selects, for example, the scanning line 10 , the scanning line 20 , the scanning line 30 , . . . , the scanning line 220 , the scanning line 230 , and the scanning line 240 . Therefore, in the thinning mode, only 24 of the 240 scan lines are selected, and the remaining 216 scan lines are eliminated without selection. In this way, the sensor scanning circuit 500 can operate in the normal mode and the thinning mode, and upon receiving a control signal instructing to switch the operation mode from the control circuit 300 , switches to the operation mode indicated by the control signal.

另外,本实施方式的液晶显示装置1,以预定周期(例如120Hz或60Hz)进行关于接触输入功能的1个周期的处理,即读出1个画面数量的受光信号,根据读出的1个画面数量的受光信号,判定接触的有无和接近的有无,在判定为有接触的情况下检测该接触位置。另外,在本实施方式中设定为以60Hz进行上述的1个周期的处理。In addition, the liquid crystal display device 1 of this embodiment performs one-cycle processing on the touch input function at a predetermined cycle (for example, 120 Hz or 60 Hz), that is, reads out light-receiving signals for one screen, and reads out one screen based on The presence or absence of contact and the presence or absence of approach are judged by the number of received light signals, and the contact position is detected when it is judged that there is contact. In addition, in the present embodiment, it is set to perform the above-mentioned one-cycle processing at 60 Hz.

图14是表示本实施方式的模式切换处理11、12的流程的流程图。在使传感器用扫描电路500以通常模式动作的情况下,执行该图(a)所示的模式切换处理11。另外,液晶显示装置1例如在用户指示起动接触输入功能时,在开始了接触输入的受理后,使传感器用扫描电路500以通常模式动作。或者如果是基本上通过利用手指或手写笔50的接触输入进行全部的操作的液晶显示装置1,则在按下开关并结束了初始处理后,开始接触输入的受理,使传感器用扫描电路500以通常模式动作。FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the flow of the mode switching processes 11 and 12 in this embodiment. When the sensor scanning circuit 500 is operated in the normal mode, the mode switching process 11 shown in (a) of the figure is executed. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 1 operates the sensor scanning circuit 500 in the normal mode after starting to accept the touch input, for example, when the user instructs to activate the touch input function. Alternatively, in the case of the liquid crystal display device 1 in which all operations are basically performed by touch input with a finger or a stylus 50, after the switch is pressed and the initial processing is completed, the acceptance of the touch input is started, and the sensor scanning circuit 500 starts to accept the touch input. Normal mode operation.

如上述那样,在通常模式下,逐一顺序选择扫描线,从设置在图像显示区域A中的全部光检测电路O1读出受光信号。控制电路300,首先根据新读出的1个画面数量的受光信号(m×n个),判定有无接触,即判定手指或手写笔50与显示画面是接触还是非接触(步骤S1101)。As described above, in the normal mode, scanning lines are sequentially selected one by one, and light reception signals are read out from all the photodetection circuits O1 provided in the image display area A. FIG. The control circuit 300 firstly determines whether there is contact, that is, whether the finger or the stylus 50 is in contact with the display screen or not (step S1101 ) based on the newly read light receiving signals (m×n) for one screen.

具体是,首先,控制电路300对于1个画面数量的各个受光信号,把其信号电平与接触判定用阈值T(具体是后述的阈值T1或T2)进行比较,并转换成2值信号。另外,这里使用的阈值T虽然基本上是在后述的模式切换处理12的步骤S1203中设定的,但在根据环境光的测定结果,在液晶显示装置1周围从亮的状态变化到暗的状态的情况下、和从暗的状态变化到亮的状态下,在阈值T1与阈值T2之间适当地进行变更。即,在液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况下使用阈值T1,在液晶显示装置1周围暗的情况下使用阈值T2。然后,控制电路300对于生成的1个画面数量的2值化信号(m×n个),例如对信号值为“1”的2值化信号的个数进行计数,在计数值是由被保存在存储器中的上限值和下限值所限定的范围内的值的情况下,判定为有接触(步骤S1101:否),在计数值不是上述的范围内的值的情况下,判定为无接触(步骤S1101:是)。Specifically, first, the control circuit 300 compares the signal level of each received light signal corresponding to one screen with a touch determination threshold T (specifically, a threshold T1 or T2 described later), and converts them into binary signals. In addition, the threshold T used here is basically set in step S1203 of the mode switching process 12 described later, but changes from a bright state to a dark state around the liquid crystal display device 1 based on the measurement result of ambient light. state, and when changing from a dark state to a bright state, the threshold value T1 and the threshold value T2 are appropriately changed. That is, the threshold T1 is used when the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are bright, and the threshold T2 is used when the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are dark. Then, the control circuit 300 counts, for example, the number of binarized signals whose signal value is "1" for the generated binarized signals (m×n) per screen, and the counted value is stored by In the case of a value within the range defined by the upper limit value and the lower limit value in the memory, it is determined that there is contact (step S1101: No), and when the count value is not a value within the above-mentioned range, it is determined that there is no contact. Contact (step S1101: Yes).

另外,如上述那样,在液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况和暗的情况下,或在接触判定的情况下和接近判定的情况下,用于与计数值比较的上限值和下限值不同。而且在传感器用扫描电路500是间隔剔除模式的情况下,扫描线被间隔剔除,1个画面数量的2值化信号的个数成为通常模式时的1/10。因此,在传感器用扫描电路500的动作模式是通常模式和间隔剔除模式时的用于与计数值比较的上限值和下限值不同。In addition, as described above, the upper limit value and the lower limit value used for comparison with the count value are different when the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are bright and dark, or in the case of contact determination and proximity determination. . Furthermore, when the sensor scanning circuit 500 is in the thinning mode, the scanning lines are thinned out, and the number of binarized signals for one screen becomes 1/10 of that in the normal mode. Therefore, when the operation mode of the sensor scanning circuit 500 is the normal mode and the thinning mode, the upper limit value and the lower limit value for comparison with the count value are different.

在步骤S1101中,在判定为有接触的情况下,结束模式切换处理11。此时,传感器用扫描电路500继续以通常模式动作。另外,这样地判定为有接触的情况下,控制电路300在结束了模式切换处理11后,进行接触位置的检测。在该接触位置检测时,使用在步骤S1101中判定接触的有无时生成的1个画面数量的2值化信号。In step S1101, when it is determined that there is contact, the mode switching process 11 ends. At this time, the sensor scanning circuit 500 continues to operate in the normal mode. In addition, when it is determined that there is contact in this way, the control circuit 300 detects the contact position after completing the mode switching process 11 . In this contact position detection, the binarized signals for one screen generated when the presence or absence of contact is determined in step S1101 are used.

另一方面,在步骤S1101中判定为无接触的情况下,控制电路300判定连续得到无接触的判定结果的状态是否持续了预定时间(例如5分钟)(步骤S1102)。另外,由于在通常模式下以60Hz执行关于接触输入功能的1个周期的处理,所以以60Hz频率得到步骤S1101的判定结果。因此,控制电路300只要对连续得到无接触的判定结果的次数进行计数,判定该计数值是否达到了与上述的预定时间相当的次数即可。另外,预定时间可以设定为60秒、30分钟等任意时间宽度。On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1101 that there is no contact, the control circuit 300 determines whether the state in which the determination result of no contact has been continuously obtained has continued for a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) (step S1102 ). In addition, in the normal mode, since one cycle of processing related to the touch input function is performed at 60 Hz, the determination result of step S1101 is obtained at a frequency of 60 Hz. Therefore, the control circuit 300 only needs to count the number of times that non-contact determination results are continuously obtained, and determine whether or not the count value has reached the number of times corresponding to the aforementioned predetermined time. In addition, the predetermined time may be set to an arbitrary time width such as 60 seconds or 30 minutes.

在步骤S1102中判定为未持续预定时间的情况下,结束模式切换处理11。此时,传感器用扫描电路500仍继续以通常模式动作。而在步骤S1102中判定为持续了预定时间的情况下,控制电路300把传感器用扫描电路500的动作模式从通常模式切换到间隔剔除模式(步骤S1103)。另外,在把动作模式切换到间隔剔除模式时,把指示动作模式切换(→间隔剔除模式)的控制信号从控制电路300发送到传感器用扫描电路500。传感器用扫描电路500在接收到该控制信号后,把动作模式变更为间隔剔除模式。由此,传感器用扫描电路500以每10条选择1条的比例顺序选择扫描线。When it is determined in step S1102 that the predetermined time has not continued, the mode switching process 11 ends. At this time, the sensor scanning circuit 500 continues to operate in the normal mode. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1102 that the predetermined time has elapsed, the control circuit 300 switches the operation mode of the sensor scanning circuit 500 from the normal mode to the thinning mode (step S1103 ). Also, when switching the operation mode to the thinning mode, a control signal instructing switching of the operation mode (→ thinning mode) is sent from the control circuit 300 to the sensor scanning circuit 500 . The sensor scanning circuit 500 changes the operation mode to the thinning mode after receiving the control signal. As a result, the sensor scanning circuit 500 sequentially selects scanning lines at a rate of selecting one out of ten.

而且,在把传感器用扫描电路500的动作模式切换到间隔剔除模式后,控制电路300把在2值化处理时使用的阈值从接触判定用阈值T变更为接近判定用阈值S(步骤S1104)。如上所述,由于在液晶显示装置1内的存储器中,保存有接触判定用阈值T1、T2、和接近判定用阈值S1、S2,所以,控制电路300根据环境光的测定结果,判断液晶显示装置1周围的亮度,在液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况下,从存储器中读出接近判定用阈值S1,把该阈值S1设定为在2值化处理时使用的阈值。另外,控制电路300在液晶显示装置1周围暗的情况下,从存储器中读出接近判定用阈值S2,把该阈值S2设定为在2值化处理时使用的阈值。Then, after switching the operation mode of the sensor scanning circuit 500 to the thinning mode, the control circuit 300 changes the threshold used in the binarization process from the contact determination threshold T to the proximity determination threshold S (step S1104). As described above, since the memory in the liquid crystal display device 1 stores the thresholds T1, T2 for contact determination and the thresholds S1, S2 for proximity determination, the control circuit 300 determines whether the liquid crystal display device As for the brightness around 1, when the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are bright, the proximity determination threshold S1 is read from the memory, and this threshold S1 is set as the threshold used in the binarization process. Also, when the surrounding of the liquid crystal display device 1 is dark, the control circuit 300 reads the approach determination threshold S2 from the memory, and sets the threshold S2 as a threshold used in the binarization process.

另外,在使传感器用扫描电路500以间隔剔除模式动作的情况下,进行图14(b)所示的模式切换处理12。如上述那样,在间隔剔除模式下,以每10条选择1条的比例顺序选择扫描线。因此,1个画面数量的受光信号个数成为通常模式下的1/10。控制电路300首先根据新读出的1个画面数量的受光信号(m×n/10),判定接近的有无,即手指或手写笔50是否接近了显示画面(步骤S1201)。In addition, when the scanning circuit 500 for sensors is operated in the thinning mode, the mode switching process 12 shown in FIG.14(b) is performed. As described above, in the thinning mode, scanning lines are sequentially selected at a rate of one out of ten. Therefore, the number of received light signals for one screen becomes 1/10 of that in the normal mode. The control circuit 300 first determines the presence or absence of approach, that is, whether the finger or the stylus 50 has approached the display screen based on the newly read light receiving signals (m×n/10) for one screen (step S1201).

具体是,首先,控制电路300对于1个画面数量的各个受光信号,把其信号电平与接近判定用阈值S2(具体是阈值S1或S2)进行比较,并转换成2值信号。这里使用的阈值S虽然基本上是在上述的模式切换处理11的步骤S1104中设定的,但在根据环境光的测定结果,在液晶显示装置1的周围从亮的状态变化到暗的状态的情况下、和从暗的状态变化到亮的状态下,在阈值S1与阈值S2之间适当地进行变更。即,在液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况下使用阈值S1,在液晶显示装置1周围暗的情况下使用阈值S2。然后,控制电路300对于生成的1个画面数量的2值化信号(m×n个),例如对信号值为“1”的2值化信号的个数进行计数,在计数值是由被保存在存储器中的上限值和下限值所限定的范围内的值的情况下,判定为接近,在计数值不是上述的范围内的值的情况下,判定为非接近。另外,如上述那样,在液晶显示装置1周围亮的情况和暗的情况下,或接触判定的情况下和接近判定的情况下,或者传感器用扫描电路500的动作模式是通常模式和间隔剔除模式的情况下,用于与计数值比较的上限值和下限值的值不同。Specifically, first, the control circuit 300 compares the signal level of each received light signal corresponding to one screen with the proximity determination threshold S2 (specifically, the threshold S1 or S2), and converts them into binary signals. The threshold S used here is basically set in step S1104 of the above-mentioned mode switching process 11, but when the surrounding of the liquid crystal display device 1 changes from a bright state to a dark state based on the measurement result of ambient light, In this case, and when changing from a dark state to a bright state, the threshold S1 and the threshold S2 are appropriately changed. That is, the threshold S1 is used when the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are bright, and the threshold S2 is used when the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are dark. Then, the control circuit 300 counts, for example, the number of binarized signals whose signal value is "1" for the generated binarized signals (m×n) per screen, and the counted value is stored by When the value is within the range defined by the upper limit value and the lower limit value in the memory, it is determined as close, and when the count value is not a value within the above-mentioned range, it is determined as non-close. In addition, as described above, the operation mode of the sensor scanning circuit 500 is the normal mode and the thinning mode when the periphery of the liquid crystal display device 1 is bright or dark, or when contact determination is performed or when proximity determination is performed. In the case of , the values of the upper limit value and lower limit value used for comparison with the count value are different.

在步骤S1201中判定为未接近的情况下,结束模式切换处理12。此时,传感器用扫描电路500继续以间隔剔除模式动作。而在步骤S1201中判定为接近的情况下,控制电路300把传感器用扫描电路500的动作模式从间隔剔除模式切换到通常模式(步骤S1202)。另外,在把动作模式切换到通常模式时,把指示切换动作模式(→通常模式)的控制信号从控制电路300发送到传感器用扫描电路500。传感器用扫描电路500在接收到该控制信号后,把动作模式变更为通常模式。由此,传感器用扫描电路500逐一顺序选择全部的扫描线。When it is determined in step S1201 that it is not approaching, the mode switching process 12 ends. At this time, the sensor scanning circuit 500 continues to operate in the thinning mode. On the other hand, when it is judged to be close in step S1201, the control circuit 300 switches the operation mode of the sensor scanning circuit 500 from the thinning mode to the normal mode (step S1202). Also, when switching the operation mode to the normal mode, a control signal instructing to switch the operation mode (→normal mode) is sent from the control circuit 300 to the sensor scanning circuit 500 . The sensor scanning circuit 500 changes the operation mode to the normal mode after receiving the control signal. As a result, the sensor scanning circuit 500 sequentially selects all the scanning lines one by one.

另外,控制电路300在把传感器用扫描电路500的动作模式切换到通常模式后,把2值化处理时使用的阈值从接近判定用阈值S变更为接触判定用阈值T(步骤S1203)。如上述那样由于在液晶显示装置1内的存储器中保存有接触判定用阈值T1、T2、和接近判定用阈值S1、S2,所以控制电路300根据环境光的测定结果,判断液晶显示装置1的周围的亮度,在液晶显示装置1的周围亮的情况下,从存储器中读出接触判定用阈值T1,把该阈值T1设定为在2值化处理时使用的阈值。另外,控制电路300在液晶显示装置1周围暗的情况下,从存储器中读出接触判断用阈值T2,把该阈值T2设定为2值化处理时使用的阈值。In addition, after the control circuit 300 switches the operation mode of the sensor scanning circuit 500 to the normal mode, the threshold used in the binarization process is changed from the proximity determination threshold S to the contact determination threshold T (step S1203). As mentioned above, since the contact determination thresholds T1, T2 and the proximity determination thresholds S1, S2 are stored in the memory in the liquid crystal display device 1, the control circuit 300 determines the surrounding area of the liquid crystal display device 1 based on the measurement result of ambient light. When the surrounding of the liquid crystal display device 1 is bright, the threshold value T1 for contact determination is read from the memory, and this threshold value T1 is set as the threshold value used in the binarization process. In addition, the control circuit 300 reads the threshold value T2 for contact determination from the memory when the surrounding of the liquid crystal display device 1 is dark, and sets the threshold value T2 as a threshold value used in the binarization process.

如以上说明的那样,根据本实施方式,液晶显示装置1在检测到手指或手写笔50连续预定时间与显示画面非接触的状态的情况时,把传感器用扫描电路500的动作模式从通常模式切换到间隔剔除模式,以每10条选择1条的比例顺序选择扫描线。另外,液晶显示装置1在检测到手指或手写笔50接近了显示画面的附近的情况时,把传感器用扫描电路500的动作模式从间隔剔除模式切换到通常模式,逐一顺序选择全部的扫描线。因此,在从检测到手指或手写笔50持续预定时间与显示画面非接触的情况到之后检测到手指或手写笔50接近了显示画面的附近的情况的期间,使传感器用扫描电路500以间隔剔除模式动作,可将读出受光信号的光检测电路O1的个数减少到通常模式的情况的1/10。As described above, according to the present embodiment, when the liquid crystal display device 1 detects that the finger or the stylus 50 is not in contact with the display screen for a predetermined time, the operation mode of the sensor scanning circuit 500 is switched from the normal mode. To Thinning mode, scanlines are selected sequentially in a ratio of 1 in 10. Also, when the liquid crystal display device 1 detects that the finger or the stylus 50 has approached the vicinity of the display screen, the operation mode of the sensor scanning circuit 500 is switched from the thinning mode to the normal mode, and all the scanning lines are sequentially selected. Therefore, the scan circuit 500 for sensors thins out the period from the detection that the finger or the stylus 50 is not in contact with the display screen for a predetermined time period to the subsequent detection that the finger or the stylus 50 approaches the vicinity of the display screen. Mode operation can reduce the number of photodetection circuits O1 to read out the received light signal to 1/10 of that in the normal mode.

而且,在从检测到手指或手写笔50接近了显示画面的附近的情况到之后检测到手指或手写笔50持续预定时间与显示画面非接触的情况的期间,通过使传感器用扫描电路500以通常模式动作,能够从显示画面中所具备的全部光检测电路O1读出受光信号,能够高精度进行接触判定和接触位置的检测。特别是通过把从间隔剔除模式向通常模式切换的时机不设定在检测到接触时而设定在检测到了接近时,能够在手指或手写笔50实际接触显示画面之前提高关于接触判定和接触位置检测的精度。Furthermore, during the period from when the finger or the stylus 50 approaches the vicinity of the display screen is detected to when the finger or the stylus 50 is not in contact with the display screen for a predetermined period of time is detected thereafter, the sensor scanning circuit 500 normally In the mode operation, light reception signals can be read out from all the photodetection circuits O1 included in the display screen, and contact determination and contact position detection can be performed with high precision. In particular, by setting the timing of switching from the thinning mode to the normal mode not when contact is detected but when approach is detected, it is possible to improve contact determination and contact position detection before the finger or stylus 50 actually touches the display screen. accuracy.

另外,也可以构成为,在间隔剔除模式下,以每2条选择1条的比例或每15条选择1条的比例顺序选择扫描线。这样,在间隔剔除模式下,只要以每K(2以上m以下的整数)条选择1条的比例顺序选择扫描线即可。另外,在本实施方式中,说明了在开始接触输入的受理时切换到通常模式的情况,但也可以构成为,在开始接触输入的受理时切换到间隔剔除模式。In addition, in the thinning mode, the scanning lines may be sequentially selected at a rate of selecting 1 for every 2 lines or a rate of selecting 1 for every 15 lines. In this way, in the thinning mode, it is only necessary to sequentially select one scan line for every K (integer of 2 to m) lines. In addition, in this embodiment, the case where switching to the normal mode is described when starting to accept a touch input is described, but it may be configured to switch to the thinning mode when starting to accept a touch input.

<电子设备><electronic device>

下面,对应用了上述任意实施方式的液晶显示装置1的电子设备进行说明。图15表示应用了液晶显示装置1的移动型个人计算机的结构。个人计算机2000具有作为显示单元和接触输入单元的液晶显示装置1、和主体部2010。另外,在主体部2010上设有电源开关2001和键盘2002。Next, an electronic device to which the liquid crystal display device 1 of any of the above-described embodiments is applied will be described. FIG. 15 shows the configuration of a mobile personal computer to which the liquid crystal display device 1 is applied. The personal computer 2000 has a liquid crystal display device 1 as a display unit and a touch input unit, and a main body 2010 . In addition, a power switch 2001 and a keyboard 2002 are provided on the main body 2010 .

图16表示应用了液晶显示装置1的移动电话机的结构。移动电话机3000具有作为显示单元和接触输入单元的液晶显示装置1、多个操作键3001和滚动键3002。通过操作滚动键3002使显示在液晶显示装置1上的画面滚动显示。FIG. 16 shows the structure of a mobile phone to which the liquid crystal display device 1 is applied. A mobile phone 3000 has a liquid crystal display device 1 as a display unit and a touch input unit, a plurality of operation keys 3001 and a scroll key 3002 . The screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1 is scrolled by operating the scroll key 3002 .

图17表示应用了液晶显示装置1的移动信息终端(PDA:PersonalDigital Assistants)的结构。移动信息终端4000具有作为显示单元和接触输入单元的液晶显示装置1、多个操作键4001和电源开关4002。通过对操作键4001进行操作,例如地址薄和日程表等各种信息被显示在液晶显示装置1中。FIG. 17 shows the structure of a mobile information terminal (PDA: Personal Digital Assistants) to which the liquid crystal display device 1 is applied. The mobile information terminal 4000 has a liquid crystal display device 1 as a display unit and a touch input unit, a plurality of operation keys 4001 , and a power switch 4002 . By operating the operation keys 4001 , various information such as an address book and a schedule are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1 .

另外,作为可应用液晶显示装置1的电子设备,除了图15~图17所示的设备以外,还有数码相机、汽车导航装置、电子记事本、文字处理机、工作站、可视电话、POS终端、ATM(Automated Teller Machine:现金自动存取款机)、自动售货机等。另外,特别是在移动设备的情况下,应用本发明,可抑制不必要的电力消耗,从而可延长一次充电(更换一次电池)可工作的时间。In addition, as electronic equipment to which the liquid crystal display device 1 can be applied, in addition to the equipment shown in FIGS. , ATM (Automated Teller Machine: automatic cash deposit machine), automatic vending machine, etc. In addition, especially in the case of a mobile device, by applying the present invention, unnecessary power consumption can be suppressed, thereby prolonging the operable time for one charge (one battery replacement).

<变形例><Modification>

例如,可进行如下所述的各种变形。而且能够把下述的2个以上的变形例适当地进行组合。For example, various modifications as described below are possible. Furthermore, two or more modified examples described below can be appropriately combined.

(1)在实施方式A1中,说明了具有通常模式(60Hz)和高速模式(120Hz),在开始受理接触输入时切换到通常模式,在手指或手写笔50接触到显示画面时、和手指或手写笔50连续地接触显示画面的时间达到预定时间以上时,切换到高速模式的情况。但是,在实施方式A1中,也可以构成为在开始受理接触输入时,不切换到通常模式而切换到高速模式。另外,在实施方式A1中,也可以构成为具有通常模式(120Hz)和低速模式(60Hz),在开始受理接触输入时切换到通常模式(120Hz),在手指或手写笔50未接触显示画面时、和对这样的非接触状态的持续时间进行计时,计时时间达到预定时间以上时,切换到低速模式(60Hz)。(1) In Embodiment A1, it is described that there are normal mode (60 Hz) and high-speed mode (120 Hz), and switching to the normal mode when the touch input starts to be accepted, and when the finger or the stylus 50 touches the display screen, and the finger or When the stylus 50 is continuously touching the display screen for a predetermined time or longer, the mode is switched to the high-speed mode. However, in Embodiment A1, it may be configured to switch to the high-speed mode instead of the normal mode when the touch input starts to be accepted. In addition, in Embodiment A1, it may be configured to have a normal mode (120 Hz) and a low-speed mode (60 Hz), and switch to the normal mode (120 Hz) when the touch input is started to be accepted, and when the finger or the stylus 50 is not in contact with the display screen, , and timing the duration of such a non-contact state, and switching to the low-speed mode (60 Hz) when the timing time reaches a predetermined time or more.

(2)在实施方式B1~B3中,说明了在检测到手指或手写笔50接近了显示画面附近的情况时,从低耗电模式切换到通常模式的情况,但也可以构成为在检测到手指或手写笔50接触到显示画面时从低耗电模式切换到通常模式。另外,在实施方式B1~B3中,说明了在检测到手指或手写笔50连续预定时间处于与显示画面非接触的状态时,从通常模式切换到低耗电模式的情况,但也可以构成为,在检测到手指或手写笔50连续预定时间未接近显示画面的情况时,从通常模式切换到低耗电模式。(2) In Embodiments B1 to B3, it was described that the low power consumption mode is switched to the normal mode when it is detected that the finger or the stylus 50 approaches the vicinity of the display screen. The low power consumption mode is switched to the normal mode when the finger or the stylus 50 touches the display screen. In addition, in Embodiments B1 to B3, the case where the normal mode is switched to the low power consumption mode when it is detected that the finger or the stylus 50 is not in contact with the display screen for a predetermined period of time is described, but the configuration may be such that , when it is detected that the finger or the stylus 50 has not approached the display screen for a predetermined time, the normal mode is switched to the low power consumption mode.

(3)在实施方式C1、C2中,说明了在检测到手指或手写笔50接近了显示画面的附近的情况时,从部分读出模式切换到通常读出模式的情况,但也可以构成为,在检测到手指或手写笔50接触到显示画面的情况时,从部分读出模式切换到通常读出模式。另外,在实施方式C1、C2中,说明了在检测到手指或手写笔50连续预定时间与显示画面呈非接触状态时,从通常读出模式切换到部分读出模式的情况,但也可以构成为在检测到手指或手写笔50连续预定时间未接近显示画面的附近时,从通常读出模式切换到部分读出模式。(3) In Embodiments C1 and C2, the case where the partial reading mode is switched to the normal reading mode when it is detected that the finger or the stylus 50 approaches the vicinity of the display screen is described, but the configuration may be such that , when it is detected that the finger or the stylus 50 touches the display screen, the partial reading mode is switched to the normal reading mode. In addition, in Embodiments C1 and C2, the case where the normal reading mode is switched to the partial reading mode when it is detected that the finger or the stylus 50 is in a non-contact state with the display screen for a predetermined period of time is described, but it is also possible to configure This is to switch from the normal reading mode to the partial reading mode when it is detected that the finger or the stylus 50 has not approached the vicinity of the display screen for a predetermined time.

(4)在实施方式D1中,说明了在检测到手指或手写笔50接近了显示画面的附近时,从间隔剔除模式切换到通常模式的情况,但也可以构成为,在检测到手指或手写笔50接触到显示画面时从间隔剔除模式切换到通常模式。另外,在实施方式D1中,说明了在检测到手指或手写笔50连续预定时间与显示画面呈非接触状态时,从通常模式切换到间隔剔除模式的情况,但也可以构成为,在检测到手指或手写笔50连续预定时间未接近显示画面的附近时,从通常模式切换到间隔剔除模式。(4) In Embodiment D1, the case where the thinning mode is switched to the normal mode when a finger or the stylus 50 is detected approaching the vicinity of the display screen is described, but it may be configured such that when a finger or handwriting is detected The thinning mode is switched to the normal mode when the pen 50 touches the display screen. Furthermore, in Embodiment D1, a case was described in which the normal mode is switched to the thinning mode when it is detected that the finger or the stylus 50 is not in contact with the display screen for a predetermined period of time. When the finger or the stylus 50 does not come close to the vicinity of the display screen for a predetermined time, the normal mode is switched to the thinning mode.

(5)在液晶显示装置1的周围暗的情况下,利用由手指或手写笔50反射的背光灯800的光,检测手指或手写笔50接近了显示画面的情况。因此,在液晶显示装置1的周围暗的情况下,如果背光灯800的发光亮度弱,则不容易检测到接近的情况。因此,在上述的实施方式B2中,作为背光灯800采用了所谓扫描背光灯,在液晶显示装置1的周围暗、且动作模式是低耗电模式的情况下,也可以只对照射操作键显示区域C的部分的光源,增加比其他光源多的出射光的光量。(5) When the surrounding of the liquid crystal display device 1 is dark, the light of the backlight 800 reflected by the finger or the stylus 50 is used to detect that the finger or the stylus 50 has approached the display screen. Therefore, when the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are dark, if the light emission luminance of the backlight 800 is weak, it is difficult to detect approaching. Therefore, in the above-mentioned embodiment B2, a so-called scanning backlight is used as the backlight 800, and when the surrounding of the liquid crystal display device 1 is dark and the operation mode is the low power consumption mode, only the operation keys may be illuminated. Part of the light source in the region C increases the amount of emitted light more than other light sources.

具体是,首先,扫描背光灯具有多个可调整出射光的光量的光源。例如,扫描背光灯具有第1光源、第2光源、第3光源这3个光源。这些第1~第3光源在显示画面上照明的区域各不同。如果举例说明图8所示的显示画面,则例如在把该显示画面区分为在X方向上延伸的3个带状区域(上段区域[扫描线1~扫描线80]、中段区域[扫描线81~扫描线160]、和下段区域[扫描线161~扫描线240])时,来自第1光源的出射光照射上段区域,来自第2光源的出射光照射中段区域,来自第3光源的出射光照射下段区域。控制电路300根据多个受光信号计算出环境光的照度,在计算出的照度小于预定值的情况下,判定为液晶显示装置1周围暗。这样在判定为液晶显示装置1周围暗、且是低耗电模式的情况下,控制电路300在把表示计算出的环境光的照度的数据输出给调光电路700时,指示调光电路700只对第3光源增加预定量的出射光。调光电路700按照该指示,对第1光源和第2光源,调整为与环境光的照度对应的出射光的光量,而对第3光源,相对第1光源和第2光源,增加控制电路300所指示的预定量的出射光的光量。Specifically, first, the scanning backlight has a plurality of light sources capable of adjusting the light quantity of emitted light. For example, a scanning backlight has three light sources of a first light source, a second light source, and a third light source. These first to third light sources illuminate different areas on the display screen. If the display screen shown in FIG. 8 is illustrated, for example, the display screen is divided into three strip-shaped regions extending in the X direction (the upper region [scanning line 1 to scanning line 80], the middle region [scanning line 81 ~scanning line 160], and the lower region [scanning line 161 to scanning line 240]), the outgoing light from the first light source illuminates the upper region, the outgoing light from the second light source illuminates the middle region, and the outgoing light from the third light source Irradiate the lower area. The control circuit 300 calculates the illuminance of ambient light based on the plurality of received light signals, and determines that the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are dark when the calculated illuminance is smaller than a predetermined value. In this way, when it is determined that the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are dark and it is in the low power consumption mode, the control circuit 300 instructs the dimming circuit 700 to A predetermined amount of outgoing light is added to the third light source. According to the instruction, the dimming circuit 700 adjusts the light quantity of the emitted light corresponding to the illuminance of the ambient light for the first light source and the second light source, and for the third light source, the control circuit 300 is added to the first light source and the second light source. Indicates the light quantity of the predetermined amount of outgoing light.

根据上述的结构,在图8所示的显示画面上,在液晶显示装置1周围暗,且是低耗电模式的情况下,只对包含操作键显示区域C的部分的下段区域,增强来自扫描背光灯的光。因此,即使在液晶显示装置1周围暗的情况下,也能够更容易检测出手指或手写笔50接近了显示画面的附近(操作键显示区域C)的情况。而且,由于只对照明操作键显示区域C的部分的第3光源增加出射光的光量即可,所以,不需要增加显示画面整体的亮度。从而可抑制不必要的电力消耗。另外,关于扫描背光灯,可以采用边缘发光方式,也可以采用下方发光方式。According to the above configuration, on the display screen shown in FIG. 8 , when the periphery of the liquid crystal display device 1 is dark and the power consumption mode is low, only the lower region including the operation key display region C is enhanced from the scanning. Backlight light. Therefore, even when the surroundings of the liquid crystal display device 1 are dark, it is possible to more easily detect that the finger or the stylus 50 has approached the vicinity of the display screen (operation key display area C). Furthermore, since it is only necessary to increase the light intensity of the emitted light from the third light source that illuminates the portion of the operation key display area C, it is not necessary to increase the brightness of the entire display screen. Unnecessary power consumption can thereby be suppressed. In addition, as for the scanning backlight, either an edge-emitting method or a bottom-emitting method may be used.

另外,本变形例(5)的内容也可应用在上述的实施方式C1、C2中。即,在实施方式C1、C2的液晶显示装置1中,在作为背光灯800而采用了扫描背光灯,液晶显示装置1周围暗,且受光信号的读出模式是部分读出模式的情况下,也可以只对照明操作键显示区域C的部分的光源,相比其他光源而增加出射光的光量。In addition, the contents of this modified example (5) can also be applied to the above-mentioned embodiments C1 and C2. That is, in the liquid crystal display device 1 of Embodiments C1 and C2, when a scanning backlight is used as the backlight 800, the surrounding of the liquid crystal display device 1 is dark, and the readout mode of the received light signal is the partial readout mode, It is also possible to increase the amount of emitted light for only the light source that illuminates the portion of the operation key display area C, compared to other light sources.

(6)在上述的各个实施方式中,采用了在每1个像素(像素电路P1)中具有光检测电路O1的结构,但也可以构成为,例如对应上下左右的每4个像素(像素电路P1)具有1个光检测电路O1。另外,光检测电路O1的排列图形不限于阵列状。例如,也可以在图像显示区域A中,如方格图案(国际象棋棋盘图案)中的黑(或白)的排列图形那样,形成各个光检测电路O1。另外,设在图像显示区域A中的扫描线的总数m和读出线的总数n,只要都是2以上的整数即可。(6) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the configuration in which the photodetection circuit O1 is provided for each pixel (pixel circuit P1) may be configured such that, for example, each of four pixels (pixel circuit P1) corresponding to up, down, left, and right P1) has one photodetection circuit O1. In addition, the arrangement pattern of the photodetection circuit O1 is not limited to the array form. For example, in the image display area A, each photodetection circuit O1 may be formed like a black (or white) array pattern in a checkerboard pattern (chess board pattern). In addition, the total number m of scanning lines and the total number n of readout lines in the image display area A need only be an integer of 2 or more.

(7)本发明的显示装置也可以是半透射型或反射型的液晶显示装置,或者是使用了OLED元件的显示装置。OLED元件不同于使光的透射量变化的液晶元件,是自体发光的电流驱动型发光元件。另外,本发明的显示装置也可以是使用了液晶元件和OLED元件以外的光电元件的显示装置。另外,所谓光电元件是指通过供给电信号(电流或电压),其透射率和亮度等光学特性发生变化的元件。本发明可以应用在具备了例如使用了无机EL(ElectroLuminescence)或发光聚合物等发光元件的显示屏、把包含着色的液体和被分散在该液体中的白色颗粒的微胶囊作为光电物质使用的电泳显示屏、把在每个极性相反的区域中分别涂敷不同颜色的旋转球作为光电物质使用的旋转球显示屏、把黑色调色剂作为光电物质使用的调色剂显示屏、或把氦或氖等高压气体作为光电物质使用等离子显示屏等的显示装置中。另外,本发明也可以应用在具备了电阻膜方式或静电电容方式的触摸面板的显示装置中。(7) The display device of the present invention may be a transflective or reflective liquid crystal display device, or a display device using an OLED element. The OLED element is a current-driven light-emitting element that emits light by itself, unlike a liquid crystal element that changes the amount of light transmitted. In addition, the display device of the present invention may be a display device using photoelectric elements other than liquid crystal elements and OLED elements. In addition, the term "photoelectric element" refers to an element whose optical characteristics such as transmittance and luminance are changed by supplying an electric signal (current or voltage). The present invention can be applied to display screens equipped with light-emitting elements such as inorganic EL (ElectroLuminescence) or light-emitting polymers, and electrophoresis using microcapsules containing colored liquid and white particles dispersed in the liquid as photoelectric materials. display screen, a rotating ball display screen using rotating balls coated with different colors in each area of opposite polarity as the photoelectric material, a toner display screen using black toner as the photoelectric material, or a helium Or neon and other high-pressure gases are used as photoelectric materials in display devices such as plasma displays. In addition, the present invention can also be applied to a display device including a resistive touch panel or a capacitive touch panel.

(8)本发明的传感装置也可以应用在具有所谓的示意功能,当利用手指或手写笔50在画面上描绘线或简单的图形等时,确定与该图形对应的操作指令(例如,滚动、进入下页、返回前页、粘贴、复制、删除、还原等),进行对应确定的操作指令的处理的计算机装置中。在这种情况下,不需要显示表示利用手指或手写笔50画出的线和图形的图像。这样,在本发明的传感装置中,不是必须生成并显示这些表示检测出的接触位置的轨迹的图像。(8) The sensing device of the present invention can also be applied to a so-called gesture function. When a finger or a stylus 50 is used to draw a line or a simple figure on the screen, determine the corresponding operation instruction (for example, scrolling, etc.) , enter the next page, return to the previous page, paste, copy, delete, restore, etc.), in the computer device that performs the processing of the corresponding determined operation instruction. In this case, there is no need to display images representing lines and figures drawn with the finger or the stylus 50 . In this way, in the sensor device of the present invention, it is not necessary to generate and display the images showing the traces of the detected contact positions.

Claims (35)

1. sensing device is characterized in that having:
A plurality of sensors, it is arranged on the picture, generates respectively to have and the contact condition of object and above-mentioned picture or the 1st detection signal apart from corresponding level of above-mentioned object and above-mentioned picture;
Sensing element, it reads above-mentioned the 1st detection signal with predetermined period from above-mentioned a plurality of sensors;
2 value unit, the level of above-mentioned each the 1st detection signal that it is read by above-mentioned sensing element and threshold ratio generate the 2nd detection signal of 2 values respectively;
Identifying unit, it judges that according to above-mentioned each the 2nd detection signal above-mentioned object contacts or noncontact with above-mentioned picture;
Detecting unit, it detects above-mentioned object and above-mentioned picture position contacting according to above-mentioned each the 2nd detection signal; And
Control module, its result of determination at above-mentioned identifying unit is under the situation of noncontact, control above-mentioned sensing element according to the mode that makes above-mentioned predetermined period become for the 1st cycle, result of determination at above-mentioned identifying unit is under the situation of contact, controls above-mentioned sensing element according to the mode that makes above-mentioned predetermined period become the 2nd cycle shorter than above-mentioned the 1st cycle.
2. sensing device according to claim 1 is characterized in that,
Above-mentioned control module, though be under the situation of noncontact in the result of determination of above-mentioned identifying unit and the result of determination of above-mentioned identifying unit is contact but under the situation of the result of determination of this contact more than the not lasting schedule time, control above-mentioned sensing element according to the mode that makes above-mentioned predetermined period become above-mentioned the 1st cycle, result of determination at above-mentioned identifying unit is under the situation of the contact more than the continuous above-mentioned schedule time, controls above-mentioned sensing element according to the mode that makes above-mentioned predetermined period become above-mentioned the 2nd cycle shorter than above-mentioned the 1st cycle.
3. sensing device is characterized in that having:
A plurality of sensors, it is arranged on the picture, generates respectively to have and the contact condition of object and above-mentioned picture or the 1st detection signal apart from corresponding level of above-mentioned object and above-mentioned picture;
Sensing element, it reads above-mentioned the 1st detection signal with predetermined period from above-mentioned a plurality of sensors;
2 value unit, the level of above-mentioned each the 1st detection signal that it is read by above-mentioned sensing element and threshold ratio generate the 2nd detection signal of 2 values respectively;
Identifying unit, it judges that according to above-mentioned each the 2nd detection signal above-mentioned object contacts or noncontact with above-mentioned picture;
Detecting unit, it detects above-mentioned object and above-mentioned picture position contacting according to above-mentioned each the 2nd detection signal; And
Control module, it is after beginning to contact the accepting of input, control above-mentioned sensing element according to the mode that makes above-mentioned predetermined period become for the 1st cycle, result of determination at above-mentioned identifying unit is under the situation of contact, controls above-mentioned sensing element according to the mode that makes above-mentioned predetermined period become the 2nd cycle shorter than above-mentioned the 1st cycle.
4. sensing device according to claim 3 is characterized in that,
Above-mentioned control module, when beginning to contact the accepting of input, control above-mentioned sensing element according to the mode that makes above-mentioned predetermined period become above-mentioned the 1st cycle, result of determination at above-mentioned identifying unit is under the situation of the contact more than the lasting schedule time, controls above-mentioned sensing element according to the mode that makes above-mentioned predetermined period become the 2nd cycle shorter than above-mentioned the 1st cycle.
5. sensing device is characterized in that having:
A plurality of sensors, it is arranged on the picture, generates respectively to have and the contact condition of object and above-mentioned picture or the 1st detection signal apart from corresponding level of above-mentioned object and above-mentioned picture;
Sensing element, it reads above-mentioned the 1st detection signal with predetermined period from above-mentioned a plurality of sensors; 2 value unit, the level of above-mentioned each the 1st detection signal that it is read by above-mentioned sensing element and threshold ratio generate the 2nd detection signal of 2 values respectively;
Identifying unit, it judges that according to above-mentioned each the 2nd detection signal above-mentioned object contacts or noncontact with above-mentioned picture;
Detecting unit, it detects above-mentioned object and above-mentioned picture position contacting according to above-mentioned each the 2nd detection signal; And
Control module, it is after beginning to contact the accepting of input, control above-mentioned sensing element according to the mode that makes above-mentioned predetermined period become the 2nd cycle shorter than the 1st cycle, result of determination at above-mentioned identifying unit is under the situation of noncontact, controls above-mentioned sensing element according to the mode that makes above-mentioned predetermined period become above-mentioned the 1st cycle.
6. sensing device according to claim 5 is characterized in that,
Above-mentioned control module, when beginning to contact the accepting of input, control above-mentioned sensing element according to the mode that makes above-mentioned predetermined period become above-mentioned the 2nd cycle shorter than above-mentioned the 1st cycle, under the result of determination of above-mentioned identifying unit is non-contacting situation more than the continuous schedule time, control above-mentioned sensing element according to the mode that makes above-mentioned predetermined period become above-mentioned the 1st cycle.
7. according to any described sensing device in the claim 1,3,5, it is characterized in that,
Has the change unit, its situation and above-mentioned control module of controlling above-mentioned sensing element according to the mode that makes above-mentioned predetermined period become above-mentioned the 1st cycle at above-mentioned control module is controlled under the situation of above-mentioned sensing element according to the mode that makes above-mentioned predetermined period become above-mentioned the 2nd cycle, changes above-mentioned threshold value.
8. sensing device according to claim 7 is characterized in that,
Above-mentioned change unit, control under the situation of above-mentioned sensing element according to the mode that makes above-mentioned predetermined period become above-mentioned the 1st cycle at above-mentioned control module, is the 1st threshold setting in corresponding above-mentioned the 1st cycle above-mentioned threshold value, controlling according to the mode that makes above-mentioned predetermined period become above-mentioned the 2nd cycle under the situation of above-mentioned sensing element at above-mentioned control module, is the 2nd threshold setting in corresponding above-mentioned the 2nd cycle above-mentioned threshold value.
9. according to any described sensing device in the claim 1,3,5, it is characterized in that,
Above-mentioned identifying unit is counted satisfying in whole above-mentioned the 2nd detection signals by the number of above-mentioned the 2nd detection signal of the condition that above-mentioned threshold value limited, and judges that according to count results above-mentioned object contacts or noncontact with above-mentioned picture.
10. a sensing device is used for detected object thing and picture position contacting, it is characterized in that having:
A plurality of sensors, it is arranged on the above-mentioned picture, generates the 1st detection signal with corresponding size with quantity of incident light respectively;
Sensing element, it can move with normal mode and low power consumption mode, under normal mode, read above-mentioned the 1st detection signal from above-mentioned a plurality of sensors with the 1st cycle, under low power consumption mode, to read above-mentioned the 1st detection signal from above-mentioned a plurality of sensors than the 2nd cycle of above-mentioned the 1st cycle length;
2 value unit, above-mentioned each the 1st detection signal that it is read by above-mentioned sensing element and threshold ratio generate the 2nd detection signal of 2 values respectively;
Detect the unit, it detects above-mentioned object and above-mentioned picture noncontact according to above-mentioned each the 2nd detection signal;
Detecting unit, it detects above-mentioned object and above-mentioned picture position contacting according to above-mentioned each the 2nd detection signal; And
Control module, it manages the switching between above-mentioned normal mode and the above-mentioned low power consumption mode, under above-mentioned normal mode, detect under the non-contacting situation in the continuous schedule time of above-mentioned detecting unit, control above-mentioned sensing element and forward above-mentioned low power consumption mode to, and under predetermined situation, control above-mentioned sensing element and forward above-mentioned normal mode to from above-mentioned low power consumption mode.
11. a sensing device is used for detected object thing and picture position contacting, it is characterized in that having:
A plurality of sensors, it is arranged on the above-mentioned picture, generates the 1st detection signal with corresponding size with quantity of incident light respectively;
Sensing element, it can move with normal mode and low power consumption mode, under normal mode, read above-mentioned the 1st detection signal from above-mentioned a plurality of sensors with the 1st cycle, under low power consumption mode, to read above-mentioned the 1st detection signal from above-mentioned a plurality of sensors than the 2nd cycle of above-mentioned the 1st cycle length;
2 value unit, above-mentioned each the 1st detection signal that it is read by above-mentioned sensing element and threshold ratio generate the 2nd detection signal of 2 values respectively;
Detect the unit, it is according to above-mentioned each the 2nd detection signal, and the distance that detects the approaching above-mentioned picture of above-mentioned object and above-mentioned object and above-mentioned picture is the following situation of certain distance;
Detecting unit, it detects above-mentioned object and above-mentioned picture position contacting; And
Control module, it manages the switching between above-mentioned normal mode and the above-mentioned low power consumption mode, under above-mentioned low power consumption mode, in the above-mentioned unit that detects when detecting situation about becoming below the certain distance, control above-mentioned sensing element and forward above-mentioned normal mode to, and the above-mentioned sensing element of control forwards above-mentioned low power consumption mode to from above-mentioned normal mode under predetermined situation.
12. a sensing device is used for detected object thing and picture position contacting, it is characterized in that having:
A plurality of sensors, it is arranged on the above-mentioned picture, generates the 1st detection signal with corresponding size with quantity of incident light respectively;
Sensing element, it can move with normal mode and low power consumption mode, under normal mode, read above-mentioned the 1st detection signal from above-mentioned a plurality of sensors with the 1st cycle, under low power consumption mode, to read above-mentioned the 1st detection signal from above-mentioned a plurality of sensors than the 2nd cycle of above-mentioned the 1st cycle length;
2 value unit, it can use in order to judge whether above-mentioned object becomes below the certain distance and the 1st threshold value and the 2nd threshold value in order to judge whether above-mentioned object is set with above-mentioned picture noncontact of setting near the distance of above-mentioned picture and above-mentioned object and above-mentioned picture, the any one party in above-mentioned each the 1st detection signal of reading by above-mentioned sensing element and above-mentioned the 1st threshold value and above-mentioned the 2nd threshold value relatively, generate the 2nd detection signal of 2 values respectively;
Detect the unit, it uses above-mentioned the 1st threshold value to generate under the situation of above-mentioned each the 2nd detection signal in above-mentioned 2 value unit, detect above-mentioned object according to this each the 2nd detection signal and become situation below the certain distance near the distance of above-mentioned picture and above-mentioned object and above-mentioned picture, use above-mentioned the 2nd threshold value to generate under the situation of above-mentioned each the 2nd detection signal in above-mentioned 2 value unit, detect above-mentioned object and the non-contacting situation of above-mentioned picture according to this each the 2nd detection signal;
Detecting unit, it uses above-mentioned the 2nd threshold value to generate under the situation of above-mentioned each the 2nd detection signal in above-mentioned 2 value unit, detects above-mentioned object and above-mentioned picture position contacting according to this each the 2nd detection signal; With
Control module, it manages the switching between above-mentioned normal mode and the above-mentioned low power consumption mode, and manage the change between above-mentioned the 1st threshold value and above-mentioned the 2nd threshold value, under above-mentioned low power consumption mode, in the above-mentioned unit that detects when detecting situation about becoming below the certain distance, control above-mentioned sensing element and forward above-mentioned normal mode to, and control above-mentioned 2 value unit so that it uses above-mentioned the 2nd threshold value to generate above-mentioned each the 2nd detection signal, under above-mentioned normal mode, continue the schedule time when detecting non-contacting situation in the above-mentioned unit that detects, control above-mentioned sensing element and forward above-mentioned low power consumption mode to, and control above-mentioned 2 value unit so that it uses above-mentioned the 1st threshold value to generate above-mentioned each the 2nd detection signal.
13. according to any described sensing device in the claim 10~12, it is characterized in that,
Above-mentioned a plurality of sensor is the point of crossing of corresponding m bar sweep trace and n bar sense wire, is arranged in m * n sensor on the above-mentioned picture, and wherein m, n are respectively the integer more than 2,
Above-mentioned sensing element can move with normal mode and low power consumption mode, under normal mode, read above-mentioned the 1st detection signal from above-mentioned m * n sensor with above-mentioned the 1st cycle, under low power consumption mode, with above-mentioned the 2nd cycle, from corresponding with above-mentioned sweep trace of continuously arranged M bar and the above-mentioned sense wire of continuously arranged N bar, less than above-mentioned m * n M * N the sensor, read above-mentioned the 1st detection signal, wherein M is the integer more than 2, below the above-mentioned m, and N is the integer more than 2, below the said n.
14. sensing device according to claim 13 is characterized in that, has:
Backlight, the back side that it is arranged on above-mentioned picture has a plurality of light sources of adjusting the light quantity of emergent light; With
Adjustment unit, its a plurality of above-mentioned the 1st detection signal of reading according to above-mentioned sensing element calculates the illumination of surround lighting, in the illumination that calculates less than predetermined value and under above-mentioned low power consumption mode, compare the light quantity of the emergent light of other above-mentioned light sources, increase the light quantity of the emergent light of the regional corresponding above-mentioned light source of arranging with above-mentioned M * N the sensor.
15. according to any described sensing device in the claim 10~12, it is characterized in that,
Arrange on above-mentioned picture the point of crossing of corresponding multi-strip scanning line of above-mentioned a plurality of sensor and many sense wires,
Above-mentioned sensing element has selected cell,
Each bar of this selected cell above-mentioned multi-strip scanning line of select progressively under above-mentioned normal mode under above-mentioned low power consumption mode, is selected 1 ratio with every L bar, the above-mentioned multi-strip scanning line of select progressively, and wherein L is the integer more than 2,
Above-mentioned sensing element by above-mentioned many sense wires, is read above-mentioned the 1st detection signal from the sensor corresponding with the selected above-mentioned sweep trace of above-mentioned selected cell respectively.
16. a sensing device is used for detected object thing and picture position contacting, it is characterized in that having:
M * n sensor, the crossover arrangement of its corresponding m bar sweep trace and n bar sense wire generate the 1st detection signal with corresponding size with quantity of incident light respectively on above-mentioned picture, wherein m is the integer more than 2, and n is the integer more than 2;
Sensing element, it can move with common readout mode and part readout mode, under common readout mode, from each of above-mentioned m * n sensor, read above-mentioned the 1st detection signal, under the part readout mode, from corresponding with above-mentioned sweep trace of continuously arranged M bar and the above-mentioned sense wire of continuously arranged N bar, read above-mentioned the 1st detection signal less than each of above-mentioned m * n M * N the sensor, wherein M is the integer more than 2, below the above-mentioned m, and N is the integer more than 2, below the said n;
2 value unit, above-mentioned each the 1st detection signal that it is read by above-mentioned sensing element and threshold ratio generate the 2nd detection signal of 2 values respectively;
Detect the unit, it detects above-mentioned object and the non-contacting situation of above-mentioned picture according to above-mentioned each the 2nd detection signal;
Detecting unit, it detects above-mentioned object and above-mentioned picture position contacting according to above-mentioned each the 2nd detection signal; With
Control module, it manages the switching between above-mentioned common readout mode and the above-mentioned part readout mode, under above-mentioned common readout mode, detect the continuous schedule time of unit and detect when being the situation of noncontact above-mentioned, control above-mentioned sensing element and forward above-mentioned part readout mode to, and under predetermined case, control above-mentioned sensing element and forward above-mentioned common readout mode to from above-mentioned part readout mode.
17. a sensing device is used for detected object thing and picture position contacting, it is characterized in that having:
M * n sensor, the crossover arrangement of its corresponding m bar sweep trace and n bar sense wire generate the 1st detection signal with corresponding size with quantity of incident light respectively on above-mentioned picture, wherein m is the integer more than 2, and n is the integer more than 2;
Sensing element, it can move with common readout mode and part readout mode, under common readout mode, from each of above-mentioned m * n sensor, read above-mentioned the 1st detection signal, under the part readout mode, from corresponding with above-mentioned sweep trace of continuously arranged M bar and the above-mentioned sense wire of continuously arranged N bar, read above-mentioned the 1st detection signal less than each of above-mentioned m * n M * N the sensor, M is the integer more than 2, below the above-mentioned m, and N is the integer more than 2, below the said n;
2 value unit, above-mentioned each the 1st detection signal that it is read by above-mentioned sensing element and threshold ratio generate the 2nd detection signal of 2 values respectively;
Detect the unit, it detects above-mentioned object according to above-mentioned each the 2nd detection signal becomes situation below the certain distance near the distance of above-mentioned picture and above-mentioned object and above-mentioned picture;
Detecting unit, it detects above-mentioned object and above-mentioned picture position contacting; With
Control module, it manages the switching between above-mentioned common readout mode and the above-mentioned part readout mode, under above-mentioned part readout mode, in the above-mentioned unit that detects when detecting situation about becoming below the certain distance, control above-mentioned sensing element so that it forwards above-mentioned common readout mode to, and under predetermined situation, control above-mentioned sensing element so that it forwards above-mentioned part readout mode to from above-mentioned common readout mode.
18. a sensing device is used for detected object thing and picture position contacting, it is characterized in that having:
M * n sensor, the crossover arrangement of its corresponding m bar sweep trace and n bar sense wire generate the 1st detection signal with corresponding size with quantity of incident light respectively on above-mentioned picture, wherein m is the integer more than 2, and n is the integer more than 2;
Sensing element, it can move with common readout mode and part readout mode, under common readout mode, from each of above-mentioned m * n sensor, read above-mentioned the 1st detection signal, under the part readout mode, from corresponding with above-mentioned sweep trace of continuously arranged M bar and the above-mentioned sense wire of continuously arranged N bar, read above-mentioned the 1st detection signal less than each of above-mentioned m * n M * N the sensor, wherein M is the integer more than 2, below the above-mentioned m, and N is the integer more than 2, below the said n;
2 value unit, it can use in order to judge whether above-mentioned object becomes below the certain distance and the 1st threshold value and the 2nd threshold value in order to judge whether above-mentioned object is set with above-mentioned picture noncontact of setting near the distance of above-mentioned picture and above-mentioned object and above-mentioned picture, the any one party of above-mentioned each the 1st detection signal of reading by above-mentioned sensing element and above-mentioned the 1st threshold value and above-mentioned the 2nd threshold value relatively, generate the 2nd detection signal of 2 values respectively;
Detect the unit, it uses above-mentioned the 1st threshold value to generate under the situation of above-mentioned each the 2nd detection signal in above-mentioned 2 value unit, detect above-mentioned object according to this each the 2nd detection signal and become situation below the certain distance near the distance of above-mentioned picture and above-mentioned object and above-mentioned picture, use above-mentioned the 2nd threshold value to generate under the situation of above-mentioned each the 2nd detection signal in above-mentioned 2 value unit, detect above-mentioned object and the non-contacting situation of above-mentioned picture according to this each the 2nd detection signal;
Detecting unit, it uses above-mentioned the 2nd threshold value to generate under the situation of above-mentioned each the 2nd detection signal in above-mentioned 2 value unit, detects above-mentioned object and above-mentioned picture position contacting according to this each the 2nd detection signal; With
Control module, its manage the switching between above-mentioned common readout mode and the above-mentioned part readout mode and manage above-mentioned the 1st threshold value and above-mentioned the 2nd threshold value between change, under above-mentioned part readout mode, in the above-mentioned unit that detects when detecting situation about becoming below the certain distance, control above-mentioned sensing element so that it forwards above-mentioned common readout mode to, and control above-mentioned 2 value unit so that it uses above-mentioned the 2nd threshold value to generate above-mentioned each the 2nd detection signal, under above-mentioned common readout mode, detect the continuous schedule time of unit when detecting non-contacting situation above-mentioned, control above-mentioned sensing element so that it forwards above-mentioned part readout mode to, and control above-mentioned 2 value unit so that it uses above-mentioned the 1st threshold value to generate above-mentioned each the 2nd detection signal.
19. according to any described sensing device in the claim 16~18, it is characterized in that,
Above-mentioned sensing element has selected cell,
This selected cell is under above-mentioned common readout mode, and each bar of the above-mentioned m bar of select progressively sweep trace under above-mentioned part readout mode, is selected the above-mentioned sweep trace of 1 the above-mentioned M bar of ratio select progressively with every L bar, and wherein L is the integer more than 2,
Above-mentioned sensing element is read above-mentioned the 1st detection signal from each of above-mentioned m * n sensor under above-mentioned common readout mode, under above-mentioned part readout mode, read above-mentioned the 1st detection signal from each of M * N/L the sensor.
20., it is characterized in that having according to any described sensing device in the claim 16~18:
Backlight, it is located at the back side of above-mentioned picture, and has a plurality of light sources of adjusting the light quantity of emergent light; With
Adjustment unit, a plurality of above-mentioned the 1st detection signal that it is read according to above-mentioned sensing element, calculate the illumination of surround lighting, in the illumination that calculates less than predetermined value and under above-mentioned part readout mode, compare the light quantity of the emergent light of other above-mentioned light sources, increase the light quantity of the emergent light of the regional corresponding above-mentioned light source of arranging with above-mentioned M * N the sensor.
21. a sensing device is used for detected object thing and picture position contacting, it is characterized in that having:
A plurality of sensors, the crossover arrangement of its corresponding multi-strip scanning line and many sense wires generate the 1st detection signal with corresponding size with quantity of incident light respectively on above-mentioned picture;
Selected cell, it can move with normal mode and interval rejecting pattern, each of the above-mentioned multi-strip scanning line of select progressively under normal mode selected 1 the above-mentioned multi-strip scanning line of ratio select progressively with every K bar under interval rejecting pattern, wherein K is the integer more than 2;
Sensing element, its from the corresponding the sensor of the selected above-mentioned sweep trace of above-mentioned selected cell, by above-mentioned many sense wires, read above-mentioned the 1st detection signal respectively;
2 value unit, above-mentioned each the 1st detection signal that it is read by above-mentioned sensing element and threshold ratio generate the 2nd detection signal of 2 values respectively;
Detect the unit, it detects above-mentioned object and the non-contacting situation of above-mentioned picture according to above-mentioned each the 2nd detection signal;
Detecting unit, it detects above-mentioned object and above-mentioned picture position contacting according to above-mentioned each the 2nd detection signal; With
Control module, it manages the switching between above-mentioned normal mode and the above-mentioned interval rejecting pattern, under above-mentioned normal mode, detect the continuous schedule time of unit and detect when being the situation of noncontact above-mentioned, control above-mentioned selected cell and reject pattern so that it forwards above-mentioned interval to, and under predetermined situation, control above-mentioned selected cell so that it forwards above-mentioned normal mode to from above-mentioned interval rejecting pattern.
22. a sensing device is used for detected object thing and picture position contacting, it is characterized in that having:
A plurality of sensors, the crossover arrangement of its corresponding multi-strip scanning line and many sense wires generate the 1st detection signal with corresponding size with quantity of incident light respectively on above-mentioned picture;
Selected cell, it can move with normal mode and interval rejecting pattern, each of the above-mentioned multi-strip scanning line of select progressively under normal mode selected 1 the above-mentioned multi-strip scanning line of ratio select progressively with every K bar under interval rejecting pattern, wherein K is the integer more than 2;
Sensing element, its from the corresponding the sensor of the selected above-mentioned sweep trace of above-mentioned selected cell, by above-mentioned many sense wires, read above-mentioned the 1st detection signal respectively;
2 value unit, above-mentioned each the 1st detection signal that it is read by above-mentioned sensing element and above-mentioned threshold ratio generate the 2nd detection signal of 2 values respectively;
Detect the unit, it is according to above-mentioned each the 2nd detection signal, and the distance that detects the approaching above-mentioned picture of above-mentioned object and above-mentioned object and above-mentioned picture becomes the following situation of certain distance;
Detecting unit, it detects above-mentioned object and above-mentioned picture position contacting; With
Control module, it manages the switching between above-mentioned normal mode and the above-mentioned interval rejecting pattern, under above-mentioned interval rejecting pattern, in the above-mentioned unit that detects when detecting situation about becoming below the certain distance, control above-mentioned selected cell so that it forwards above-mentioned normal mode to, and under predetermined situation, control above-mentioned selected cell so that it forwards above-mentioned interval to from above-mentioned normal mode and reject pattern.
23. a sensing device is used for detected object thing and picture position contacting, it is characterized in that having:
A plurality of sensors, the crossover arrangement of its corresponding multi-strip scanning line and many sense wires generate the 1st detection signal with corresponding size with quantity of incident light respectively on above-mentioned picture;
Selected cell, it can move with normal mode and interval rejecting pattern, each of the above-mentioned multi-strip scanning line of select progressively under normal mode selected 1 the above-mentioned multi-strip scanning line of ratio select progressively with every K bar under interval rejecting pattern, wherein K is the integer more than 2;
Sensing element, its from the corresponding the sensor of the selected above-mentioned sweep trace of above-mentioned selected cell, by above-mentioned many sense wires, read above-mentioned the 1st detection signal respectively;
2 value unit, it can use in order to judge whether above-mentioned object becomes below the certain distance and the 1st threshold value and the 2nd threshold value in order to judge whether above-mentioned object is set with above-mentioned picture noncontact of setting near the distance of above-mentioned picture and above-mentioned object and above-mentioned picture, the any one party of above-mentioned each the 1st detection signal of reading by above-mentioned sensing element and above-mentioned the 1st threshold value and above-mentioned the 2nd threshold value relatively, generate the 2nd detection signal of 2 values respectively;
Detect the unit, it uses above-mentioned the 1st threshold value to generate under the situation of above-mentioned each the 2nd detection signal in above-mentioned 2 value unit, according to this each the 2nd detection signal, the distance that detects the approaching above-mentioned picture of above-mentioned object and above-mentioned object and above-mentioned picture becomes the following situation of certain distance, use above-mentioned the 2nd threshold value to generate under the situation of above-mentioned each the 2nd detection signal in above-mentioned 2 value unit, detect above-mentioned object and the non-contacting situation of above-mentioned picture according to this each the 2nd detection signal;
Detecting unit, it uses above-mentioned the 2nd threshold value to generate under the situation of above-mentioned each the 2nd detection signal in above-mentioned 2 value unit, according to this each the 2nd detection signal, detects above-mentioned object and above-mentioned picture position contacting; With
Control module, its manage the switching between above-mentioned normal mode and the above-mentioned interval rejecting pattern and manage above-mentioned the 1st threshold value and above-mentioned the 2nd threshold value between change, under above-mentioned interval rejecting pattern, in the above-mentioned unit that detects when detecting situation about becoming below the certain distance, control above-mentioned selected cell so that it forwards above-mentioned normal mode to, and control above-mentioned 2 value unit so that it uses above-mentioned the 2nd threshold value to generate above-mentioned each the 2nd detection signal, under above-mentioned normal mode, detect the continuous schedule time of unit when detecting non-contacting situation above-mentioned, control above-mentioned selected cell and reject pattern, and control above-mentioned 2 value unit so that it uses above-mentioned the 1st threshold value to generate above-mentioned each the 2nd detection signal so that it forwards above-mentioned interval to.
24. according to any described sensing device in the claim 10,16,21, it is characterized in that,
The above-mentioned unit that detects is counted the number that satisfies above-mentioned the 2nd detection signal of the condition that is limited by above-mentioned threshold value in whole above-mentioned the 2nd detection signals, detects above-mentioned object and the non-contacting situation of above-mentioned picture according to count results.
25. according to any described sensing device in the claim 11,17,22, it is characterized in that,
The above-mentioned unit that detects, number to above-mentioned the 2nd detection signal that satisfies the condition that is limited by above-mentioned threshold value in whole above-mentioned the 2nd detection signals is counted, and the distance that detects above-mentioned object and above-mentioned picture according to count results becomes the situation below the certain distance.
26. a display device is characterized in that having:
Any described sensing device in the claim 1,10,16,17,21,22; With
The display part of display image.
27. display device according to claim 26 is characterized in that, has:
Indicative control unit, its generation are represented by the image of the track of the detected position of above-mentioned detecting unit and are presented in the above-mentioned display part.
28. electronic equipment that possesses the described display device of claim 26.
29. method for sensing, it uses a plurality of sensors, detect object and picture position contacting, these a plurality of sensors are arranged on the above-mentioned picture, generate respectively and have and the contact condition of above-mentioned object and above-mentioned picture or the 1st detection signal apart from corresponding level of above-mentioned object and above-mentioned picture, it is characterized in that
Read above-mentioned the 1st detection signal with predetermined period from above-mentioned a plurality of sensors;
The level of above-mentioned each the 1st detection signal of reading and threshold ratio, generate the 2nd detection signal of 2 values respectively;
According to above-mentioned each the 2nd detection signal, judge that above-mentioned object contacts or noncontact with above-mentioned picture;
Detect above-mentioned object and above-mentioned picture position contacting according to above-mentioned each the 2nd detection signal;
Result in above-mentioned judgement is under the situation of noncontact, control reading of above-mentioned each the 1st detection signal according to the mode that makes above-mentioned predetermined period become for the 1st cycle, result in above-mentioned judgement is under the situation of contact, controls reading of above-mentioned each the 1st detection signal according to the mode that makes above-mentioned predetermined period become the 2nd cycle shorter than above-mentioned the 1st cycle.
30. a method for sensing, it uses a plurality of sensors, detects object and picture position contacting, and these a plurality of sensors are arranged on the above-mentioned picture, generates the 1st detection signal with corresponding size with quantity of incident light respectively, it is characterized in that,
Can carry out reading of above-mentioned the 1st detection signal with normal mode and low power consumption mode, under normal mode, read above-mentioned the 1st detection signal from above-mentioned a plurality of sensors with the 1st cycle, under low power consumption mode, to read above-mentioned the 1st detection signal from above-mentioned a plurality of sensors than the 2nd cycle of above-mentioned the 1st cycle length, and, read above-mentioned the 1st detection signal respectively with any one party of above-mentioned normal mode and above-mentioned low power consumption mode;
Above-mentioned each the 1st detection signal of reading and threshold ratio, generate the 2nd detection signal of 2 values respectively;
According to above-mentioned each the 2nd detection signal, detect above-mentioned object and the non-contacting situation of above-mentioned picture;
According to above-mentioned each the 2nd detection signal, detect above-mentioned object and above-mentioned picture position contacting;
Manage the switching between above-mentioned normal mode and the above-mentioned low power consumption mode, under above-mentioned normal mode, when the schedule time detects above-mentioned object and the non-contacting situation of above-mentioned picture continuously, reading of above-mentioned the 1st detection signal forwarded to above-mentioned low power consumption mode, and under predetermined situation, reading from above-mentioned low power consumption mode of above-mentioned the 1st detection signal forwarded to above-mentioned normal mode.
31. a method for sensing, it uses a plurality of sensors, detects object and above-mentioned picture position contacting, and these a plurality of sensors are arranged on the picture, generates the 1st detection signal with corresponding size with quantity of incident light respectively, it is characterized in that,
Can carry out reading of above-mentioned the 1st detection signal with normal mode and low power consumption mode, under normal mode, read above-mentioned the 1st detection signal from above-mentioned a plurality of sensors with the 1st cycle, under low power consumption mode, read above-mentioned the 1st detection signal from above-mentioned a plurality of sensors with the 2nd cycle longer, and read above-mentioned the 1st detection signal respectively with any one party of above-mentioned normal mode and above-mentioned low power consumption mode than above-mentioned the 1st cycle;
Above-mentioned each the 1st detection signal of reading and threshold ratio, generate the 2nd detection signal of 2 values respectively;
According to above-mentioned each the 2nd detection signal, the distance that detects the approaching above-mentioned picture of above-mentioned object and above-mentioned object and above-mentioned picture becomes the following situation of certain distance;
Manage the switching between above-mentioned normal mode and the above-mentioned low power consumption mode, under above-mentioned low power consumption mode, when the distance that detects above-mentioned object and above-mentioned picture becomes situation below the certain distance, reading of above-mentioned the 1st detection signal forwarded to above-mentioned normal mode, and under predetermined situation, reading from above-mentioned normal mode of above-mentioned the 1st detection signal forwarded to above-mentioned low power consumption mode.
32. method for sensing, it uses m * n sensor object and picture position contacting, the point of crossing of corresponding m bar sweep trace of this m * n sensor and n bar sense wire is arranged on the above-mentioned picture, generate the 1st detection signal respectively with corresponding size with quantity of incident light, wherein m is the integer more than 2, n is the integer more than 2, it is characterized in that
Can carry out reading of above-mentioned the 1st detection signal with common readout mode and part readout mode, under common readout mode, from each of above-mentioned m * n sensor, read above-mentioned the 1st detection signal, under the part readout mode, from corresponding with above-mentioned sweep trace of continuously arranged M bar and the above-mentioned sense wire of continuously arranged N bar, read above-mentioned the 1st detection signal less than in each of M * N the sensor of above-mentioned m * n, and read above-mentioned the 1st detection signal respectively with any one party of above-mentioned common readout mode and above-mentioned part readout mode, wherein M is more than 2, the integer that above-mentioned m is following, N is more than 2, the integer that said n is following;
Above-mentioned each the 1st detection signal of reading and threshold ratio, generate the 2nd detection signal of 2 values respectively;
Detect above-mentioned object and the non-contacting situation of above-mentioned picture according to above-mentioned each the 2nd detection signal;
Detect above-mentioned object and above-mentioned picture position contacting according to above-mentioned each the 2nd detection signal;
Manage the switching between above-mentioned common readout mode and the above-mentioned part readout mode, under above-mentioned common readout mode, detect above-mentioned object and above-mentioned picture when being the situation of noncontact in continuous schedule time, reading of above-mentioned the 1st detection signal forwarded to above-mentioned part readout mode, and under predetermined situation, reading from above-mentioned part readout mode of above-mentioned the 1st detection signal forwarded to above-mentioned common readout mode.
33. method for sensing, it uses m * n sensor object and picture position contacting, the point of crossing of corresponding m bar sweep trace of this m * n sensor and n bar sense wire is arranged on the above-mentioned picture, generate the 1st detection signal respectively with corresponding size with quantity of incident light, wherein m is the integer more than 2, n is the integer more than 2, it is characterized in that
Can carry out reading of above-mentioned the 1st detection signal with common readout mode and part readout mode, under common readout mode, from each of above-mentioned m * n sensor, read above-mentioned the 1st detection signal, under the part readout mode, from corresponding with above-mentioned sweep trace of continuously arranged M bar and the above-mentioned sense wire of continuously arranged N bar, read above-mentioned the 1st detection signal less than in each of M * N the sensor of above-mentioned m * n, and read above-mentioned the 1st detection signal respectively with any one party of above-mentioned common readout mode and above-mentioned part readout mode, wherein M is more than 2, the integer that above-mentioned m is following, N is more than 2, the integer that said n is following;
Above-mentioned each the 1st detection signal of reading and threshold ratio, generate the 2nd detection signal of 2 values respectively;
According to above-mentioned each the 2nd detection signal, the distance that detects the approaching above-mentioned picture of above-mentioned object and above-mentioned object and above-mentioned picture becomes the following situation of certain distance;
Manage the switching between above-mentioned common readout mode and the above-mentioned part readout mode, under above-mentioned part readout mode, when the distance that detects above-mentioned object and above-mentioned picture becomes situation below the certain distance, reading of above-mentioned the 1st detection signal forwarded to above-mentioned common readout mode, and under predetermined situation, reading from above-mentioned common readout mode of above-mentioned the 1st detection signal forwarded to above-mentioned part readout mode.
34. method for sensing, it uses a plurality of sensor objects and picture position contacting, and the crossover arrangement of corresponding multi-strip scanning line of these a plurality of sensors and many sense wires generates the 1st detection signal with corresponding size with quantity of incident light respectively on above-mentioned picture, it is characterized in that
Can carry out the selection of above-mentioned sweep trace with normal mode and interval rejecting pattern, under normal mode, each of the above-mentioned multi-strip scanning line of select progressively is under interval rejecting pattern, select 1 the above-mentioned multi-strip scanning line of ratio select progressively with every K bar, wherein K is the integer more than 2;
From with the corresponding the sensor of selected above-mentioned sweep trace, by above-mentioned many sense wires, read above-mentioned the 1st detection signal respectively;
Above-mentioned each the 1st detection signal of reading and threshold ratio, generate the 2nd detection signal of 2 values respectively;
According to above-mentioned each the 2nd detection signal, detect above-mentioned object and the non-contacting situation of above-mentioned picture;
According to above-mentioned each the 2nd detection signal, detect above-mentioned object and above-mentioned picture position contacting;
Manage the switching between above-mentioned normal mode and the above-mentioned interval rejecting pattern, under above-mentioned normal mode, when the schedule time detects above-mentioned object and the non-contacting situation of above-mentioned picture continuously, the selection of above-mentioned sweep trace is forwarded to above-mentioned interval reject pattern, and under predetermined situation, the selection of above-mentioned sweep trace is forwarded to above-mentioned normal mode from above-mentioned interval rejecting pattern.
35. method for sensing, it uses a plurality of sensor objects and picture position contacting, and the crossover arrangement of corresponding multi-strip scanning line of these a plurality of sensors and many sense wires generates the 1st detection signal with corresponding size with quantity of incident light respectively on above-mentioned picture, it is characterized in that
Can carry out the selection of above-mentioned sweep trace with normal mode and interval rejecting pattern, under normal mode, each of the above-mentioned multi-strip scanning line of select progressively is under interval rejecting pattern, select 1 the above-mentioned multi-strip scanning line of ratio select progressively with every K bar, wherein K is the integer more than 2;
From with the corresponding the sensor of selected above-mentioned sweep trace, by above-mentioned many sense wires, read above-mentioned the 1st detection signal respectively;
Above-mentioned each the 1st detection signal of reading and threshold ratio, generate the 2nd detection signal of 2 values respectively;
According to above-mentioned each the 2nd detection signal, the distance that detects the approaching above-mentioned picture of above-mentioned object and above-mentioned object and above-mentioned picture becomes the following situation of certain distance;
Manage the switching between above-mentioned normal mode and the above-mentioned interval rejecting pattern, under above-mentioned interval rejecting pattern, when the distance that detects above-mentioned object and above-mentioned picture becomes situation below the certain distance, the selection of above-mentioned sweep trace is forwarded to above-mentioned normal mode, and under predetermined situation, the selection of above-mentioned sweep trace is forwarded to above-mentioned interval from above-mentioned normal mode reject pattern.
CNA2009100076527A 2008-02-18 2009-02-16 Sensing device, display device, electronic apparatus and sensing method Pending CN101515213A (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2008035646 2008-02-18
JP2008035641 2008-02-18
JP2008035647 2008-02-18
JP2008035640A JP4775386B2 (en) 2008-02-18 2008-02-18 Sensing device, display device, electronic device, and sensing method
JP2008035640 2008-02-18

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
CN101515213A true CN101515213A (en) 2009-08-26

Family

ID=41039682

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CNA2009100076527A Pending CN101515213A (en) 2008-02-18 2009-02-16 Sensing device, display device, electronic apparatus and sensing method

Country Status (2)

Country Link
JP (1) JP4775386B2 (en)
CN (1) CN101515213A (en)

Cited By (12)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102043546A (en) * 2009-10-16 2011-05-04 索尼公司 Information input device, information input method, information input/output device, and electronic device
CN102073416A (en) * 2009-11-20 2011-05-25 株式会社半导体能源研究所 Display device
CN102681702A (en) * 2011-03-07 2012-09-19 联想(北京)有限公司 Control method, control device and electronic equipment
CN102768594A (en) * 2011-05-03 2012-11-07 宏达国际电子股份有限公司 Management and application method and system of touch control type device
CN103472939A (en) * 2012-06-05 2013-12-25 宏碁股份有限公司 Driving method of touch panel and touch device thereof
CN103493124A (en) * 2011-04-08 2014-01-01 夏普株式会社 Display device, electronic device, control method of display device, and control method of electronic device
CN103534669A (en) * 2011-05-23 2014-01-22 索尼爱立信移动通讯有限公司 Finger-on display detection
CN104898908A (en) * 2014-03-07 2015-09-09 辛纳普蒂克斯显像装置合同会社 Semiconductor device
CN104285197B (en) * 2012-03-05 2018-02-09 艾利普提克实验室股份有限公司 Touchless User Interface
CN102411451B (en) * 2011-11-23 2018-07-13 南京中兴新软件有限责任公司 The signal processing method and device of touch screen
US10345912B2 (en) 2011-03-07 2019-07-09 Lenovo (Beijing) Co., Ltd. Control method, control device, display device and electronic device
CN111310642A (en) * 2015-10-16 2020-06-19 联咏科技股份有限公司 Optical device and method for operating optical device

Families Citing this family (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP5973789B2 (en) * 2012-05-28 2016-08-23 シャープ株式会社 Electronic device and detection information output method
US10296142B2 (en) 2015-12-22 2019-05-21 Ricoh Company, Ltd. Information display device, system, and recording medium
JP6930364B2 (en) * 2017-03-31 2021-09-01 株式会社デンソーウェーブ Information reader

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH09152932A (en) * 1995-11-30 1997-06-10 Toshiba Corp Input device driving method, input device driving system, and coordinate input system
CN1768322A (en) * 2003-03-31 2006-05-03 东芝松下显示技术有限公司 Display device and information terminal device
CN1873599A (en) * 2005-05-31 2006-12-06 富士通天株式会社 Map display device and map display method

Family Cites Families (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP3258159B2 (en) * 1993-12-28 2002-02-18 同和鉱業株式会社 Ultrasonic detector
JP3269596B2 (en) * 1994-10-31 2002-03-25 シャープ株式会社 Touch panel type input device
US7277087B2 (en) * 2003-12-31 2007-10-02 3M Innovative Properties Company Touch sensing with touch down and lift off sensitivity
JP2006106844A (en) * 2004-09-30 2006-04-20 Seiko Epson Corp Touch panel data capture method and apparatus
JP2006244218A (en) * 2005-03-04 2006-09-14 Toshiba Matsushita Display Technology Co Ltd Sensor built-in display device
JP2007011152A (en) * 2005-07-01 2007-01-18 Toshiba Matsushita Display Technology Co Ltd Flat display device
JP2007128497A (en) * 2005-10-05 2007-05-24 Sony Corp Display device and display method
JP2007163891A (en) * 2005-12-14 2007-06-28 Sony Corp Display device

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH09152932A (en) * 1995-11-30 1997-06-10 Toshiba Corp Input device driving method, input device driving system, and coordinate input system
CN1768322A (en) * 2003-03-31 2006-05-03 东芝松下显示技术有限公司 Display device and information terminal device
CN1873599A (en) * 2005-05-31 2006-12-06 富士通天株式会社 Map display device and map display method

Cited By (22)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102043546A (en) * 2009-10-16 2011-05-04 索尼公司 Information input device, information input method, information input/output device, and electronic device
US9086760B2 (en) 2009-11-20 2015-07-21 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Display device
CN102073416A (en) * 2009-11-20 2011-05-25 株式会社半导体能源研究所 Display device
CN102073416B (en) * 2009-11-20 2016-05-18 株式会社半导体能源研究所 Display device
CN102681702A (en) * 2011-03-07 2012-09-19 联想(北京)有限公司 Control method, control device and electronic equipment
US10345912B2 (en) 2011-03-07 2019-07-09 Lenovo (Beijing) Co., Ltd. Control method, control device, display device and electronic device
CN102681702B (en) * 2011-03-07 2015-11-25 联想(北京)有限公司 Control method, control device and electronic equipment
CN103493124A (en) * 2011-04-08 2014-01-01 夏普株式会社 Display device, electronic device, control method of display device, and control method of electronic device
CN103493124B (en) * 2011-04-08 2016-09-28 夏普株式会社 Display device, electronic device, control method of display device, and control method of electronic device
US9152255B2 (en) 2011-05-03 2015-10-06 Htc Corporation Management and application methods and systems for touch-sensitive devices, and computer program products thereof
CN102768594A (en) * 2011-05-03 2012-11-07 宏达国际电子股份有限公司 Management and application method and system of touch control type device
CN102768594B (en) * 2011-05-03 2016-06-29 宏达国际电子股份有限公司 Management and application method and system of touch-sensitive device
CN103534669B (en) * 2011-05-23 2016-09-14 索尼爱立信移动通讯有限公司 Finger on screen display detection
CN103534669A (en) * 2011-05-23 2014-01-22 索尼爱立信移动通讯有限公司 Finger-on display detection
CN102411451B (en) * 2011-11-23 2018-07-13 南京中兴新软件有限责任公司 The signal processing method and device of touch screen
CN104285197B (en) * 2012-03-05 2018-02-09 艾利普提克实验室股份有限公司 Touchless User Interface
CN103472939B (en) * 2012-06-05 2016-08-10 宏碁股份有限公司 Driving method of touch panel and touch device thereof
CN103472939A (en) * 2012-06-05 2013-12-25 宏碁股份有限公司 Driving method of touch panel and touch device thereof
CN104898908A (en) * 2014-03-07 2015-09-09 辛纳普蒂克斯显像装置合同会社 Semiconductor device
CN104898908B (en) * 2014-03-07 2019-07-30 辛纳普蒂克斯日本合同会社 Semiconductor device
CN111310642A (en) * 2015-10-16 2020-06-19 联咏科技股份有限公司 Optical device and method for operating optical device
CN111310642B (en) * 2015-10-16 2024-04-09 联咏科技股份有限公司 Optical device and operation method thereof

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP4775386B2 (en) 2011-09-21
JP2009193481A (en) 2009-08-27

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN101515213A (en) Sensing device, display device, electronic apparatus and sensing method
US8390578B2 (en) Sensing device, display device, electronic apparatus, and sensing method
US8665223B2 (en) Display device and method providing display contact information based on an amount of received light
US8610670B2 (en) Imaging and display apparatus, information input apparatus, object detection medium, and object detection method
JP4770844B2 (en) Sensing device, display device, and electronic device
JP4645658B2 (en) Sensing device, display device, electronic device, and sensing method
US10909916B2 (en) OLED array substrate, OLED display panel, pixel circuit, driving method and method for fingerprint recognition using OLED display panel
US8638317B2 (en) Display apparatus and method for controlling the same
US8487886B2 (en) Information input device, information input method, information input/output device, and information input program
KR101534588B1 (en) Display image pickup device and method for detecting an object
JP4257221B2 (en) Display device and information terminal device
CN101266743B (en) Display device and control method thereof
CN101135949B (en) Imaging and display apparatus, information input apparatus, object detection method
JP4915367B2 (en) Display imaging apparatus and object detection method
CN101542422B (en) Image pickup device, display and image pickup device, and image pickup processing device
US20110084934A1 (en) Information input device, information input method, information input/output device, computer readable non-transitory recording medium and electronic unit
JP2006244446A (en) Display device
JP4720833B2 (en) Sensing device, display device, electronic device, and sensing method
JP4919094B2 (en) Image display device and driving method of image display device
JP4605243B2 (en) Image display device and driving method of image display device
WO2011065553A1 (en) Display device
JP2009199204A (en) Electro-optical device, control method thereof, and electronic equipment
JP4788755B2 (en) Display imaging apparatus, object detection program, and object detection method

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
C06 Publication
PB01 Publication
ASS Succession or assignment of patent right

Owner name: SONY CORPORATION

Free format text: FORMER OWNER: SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION

Effective date: 20100712

C41 Transfer of patent application or patent right or utility model
TA01 Transfer of patent application right

Effective date of registration: 20100712

Address after: Tokyo, Japan

Applicant after: Sony Corp.

Address before: Tokyo, Japan

Applicant before: Seiko Epson Corp.

C10 Entry into substantive examination
SE01 Entry into force of request for substantive examination
ASS Succession or assignment of patent right

Owner name: NIPPON DISPLAY CO., LTD.

Free format text: FORMER OWNER: SONY CORPORATION

Effective date: 20121105

C41 Transfer of patent application or patent right or utility model
TA01 Transfer of patent application right

Effective date of registration: 20121105

Address after: Aichi

Applicant after: Japan display West Co.,Ltd.

Address before: Tokyo, Japan

Applicant before: Sony Corp.

C12 Rejection of a patent application after its publication
RJ01 Rejection of invention patent application after publication

Application publication date: 20090826